2010 Buick Enclave Owner Manual M

In Brief ...... 1-1 Storage ...... 4-1 Climate Controls ...... 8-1 Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Storage Compartments ...... 4-1 Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Initial Drive Information ...... 1-3 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Air Vents ...... 8-9 Vehicle Features ...... 1-14 Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Performance and Driving and Operating ...... 9-1 Maintenance ...... 1-18 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving Information ...... 9-2 Controls ...... 5-2 Starting and Operating ...... 9-17 Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Warning Lights, Gages, and Engine Exhaust ...... 9-23 Keys and Locks ...... 2-2 Indicators ...... 5-12 Automatic Transmission ...... 9-24 Doors ...... 2-9 Information Displays ...... 5-25 Drive Systems ...... 9-28 Vehicle Security...... 2-12 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-31 Brakes ...... 9-28 Exterior Mirrors ...... 2-15 Vehicle Personalization ...... 5-40 Ride Control Systems ...... 9-30 Interior Mirrors ...... 2-18 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-47 Cruise Control ...... 9-32 Windows ...... 2-18 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-35 Roof ...... 2-21 Lighting ...... 6-1 Fuel ...... 9-42 Exterior Lighting ...... 6-1 Towing...... 9-47 Seats and Restraints ...... 3-1 Interior Lighting ...... 6-5 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-58 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Lighting Features ...... 6-6 Front Seats ...... 3-3 Vehicle Care ...... 10-1 Rear Seats ...... 3-8 Infotainment System ...... 7-1 General Information ...... 10-2 Safety Belts ...... 3-13 Introduction ...... 7-1 Vehicle Checks ...... 10-4 Airbag System ...... 3-29 Radio ...... 7-6 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-28 Child Restraints ...... 3-44 Audio Players ...... 7-12 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Rear Seat Infotainment ...... 7-36 Electrical System ...... 10-30 Phone ...... 7-46 2010 Buick Enclave Owner Manual M

Wheels and Tires ...... 10-37 Jump Starting ...... 10-80 Towing...... 10-84 Appearance Care ...... 10-87 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 General Information ...... 11-1 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts ...... 11-7 Maintenance Records ...... 11-10 Technical Data ...... 12-1 Vehicle Identification ...... 12-1 Vehicle Data ...... 12-2 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy...... 13-15 Index ...... i-1 Introduction iii

options that you did not purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Propriétaires Canadiens Please refer to the purchase A French language copy of this documentation relating to your manual can be obtained from your specific vehicle to confirm each of dealer/retailer or from: GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the the features found on your vehicle. On peut obtenir un exemplaire de GM Emblem, BUICK, the BUICK For vehicles first sold in Canada, ce guide en français auprès du Emblem are registered trademarks; substitute the name “General concessionnaire ou à l'adresse and the name ENCLAVE is a Motors of Canada Limited” for Buick suivante: trademark of General Motors. Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual. Helm, Incorporated This manual describes features that P.O. Box 07130 may or may not be on your specific Keep this manual in the vehicle for Detroit, MI 48207 vehicle either because they are quick reference. 1-800-551-4123 Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française www.helminc.com

Using this Manual Symbols { WARNING To quickly locate information The vehicle has components and about the vehicle use the Index in These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of the back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or manual and the page number where information relating to a specific it can be found. Notice: This means there is component, control, message, something that could result in gauge, or indicator. property or vehicle damage. Danger, Warnings, and M : This symbol is shown when This would not be covered by you need to see your owner manual Cautions the vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or Warning messages found on vehicle information. labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when reduce them. you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or Danger indicates a hazard with a information. high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. A circle with a slash through it Warning or Caution indicates a is a safety symbol which means hazard that could result in injury or “Do Not,”“Do not do this” or “Do not death. let this happen.” Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart # : Fog Lamps Here are some additional symbols . : Fuel Gage that may be found on the vehicle + and what they mean. For more : Fuses information on the symbol, refer to i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam the index. Changer 9 : Airbag Readiness Light j : LATCH System Child # : Air Conditioning Restraints ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls : Oil Pressure or OnStar® } : Power $ : Brake System Warning Light / : Remote Vehicle Start " : Charging System > : Safety Belt Reminders I : Cruise Control 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor B : Engine Coolant Temperature F : Traction Control/StabiliTrak O : Exterior Lamps M : Windshield Washer Fluid vi Introduction

2 NOTES In Brief 1-1

Sensing System for Passenger Performance and Maintenance In Brief Airbag ...... 1-8 StabiliTrak® ...... 1-18 Mirror Adjustment ...... 1-9 Tire Pressure Monitor ...... 1-19 Instrument Panel Steering Wheel Tire Sealant and Adjustment ...... 1-10 Compressor Kit ...... 1-19 Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Interior Lighting ...... 1-11 Engine Oil Life System ...... 1-19 Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting ...... 1-11 Driving for Better Fuel Initial Drive Information ...... 1-3 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12 Economy ...... 1-20 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls ...... 1-13 Roadside Assistance System ...... 1-4 Program ...... 1-20 Vehicle Features OnStar® ...... 1-21 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-4 Radio(s) ...... 1-14 Door Locks ...... 1-5 Satellite Radio ...... 1-15 Liftgate ...... 1-5 Portable Audio Devices ...... 1-15 Windows ...... 1-6 Bluetooth® ...... 1-15 Seat Adjustment ...... 1-6 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16 Second Row Seats ...... 1-7 Navigation System ...... 1-16 Third Row Seats ...... 1-7 Cruise Control ...... 1-17 Heated Seats ...... 1-7 Storage Compartments ...... 1-17 Heated and Ventilated Power Outlets ...... 1-18 Seats ...... 1-8 Sunroof ...... 1-18 Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8 Safety Belt ...... 1-8 1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑9. L. Horn on page 5‑5. Initial Drive B. Windshield Wiper/Washer on M. Steering Wheel Controls on Information page 5‑5. page 5‑3. C. Instrument Cluster on N. Hazard Warning Flashers on This section provides a brief overview about some of the page 5‑13. page 6‑4. important features that may or may D. Driver Information Center (DIC) O. Dual Automatic Climate Control not be on your specific vehicle. Buttons. See Driver Information System on page 8‑1. For more detailed information, refer Center (DIC) on page 5‑25. P. Center Console Shift Lever. to each of the features which can be E. Clock on page 5‑9. See “Console Shift Lever” under found later in this owner manual. Shifting Into Park on page 9 21. F. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑6. ‑ Navigation/Radio System Q. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on (If Equipped). See Navigation page 5‑6. System manual. R. Power Outlets on page 5‑10. G. Exterior Lamp Controls on S. Heated Front Seats on page 6 1. ‑ page 3‑7. H. Hood Release. See Hood on T. Passenger Air Bag Status page 10‑5. Indicator. See Passenger I. Instrument Panel Illumination Sensing System on page 3‑37. Control on page 6 5. ‑ U. Glove Box on page 4‑1. J. Cruise Control on page 9‑32. K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 5‑2. 1-4 In Brief

Remote Keyless Entry Press Q to lock all doors. Remote Vehicle Start (RKE) System Lock and unlock feedback can be Starting the Vehicle personalized. The RKE transmitter is used to With this feature the engine can be remotely lock and unlock the doors To open or close the liftgate, press started from outside of the vehicle. from up to 60 m (195 feet) away and hold & until the liftgate from the vehicle. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the begins to move. vehicle. Press L and release to locate the 2. Press Q . vehicle. 3. Immediately after completing Press L and hold for more than Step 2, press and hold / until two seconds to sound the panic the parking lamps flash. alarm. When the vehicle starts, the parking Press L again to cancel the panic lamps will turn on and remain on as alarm. long as the engine is running. The See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on. System Operation on page 2‑3. The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a Press K to unlock the driver door. 10-minute time extension. Remote Press K again within five seconds start can be extended only once. to unlock all remaining doors. In Brief 1-5

Canceling a Remote Start Power Door Locks Power Liftgate To cancel a remote start: On vehicles with power door locks, On vehicles with a power liftgate, the controls are located on the front the vehicle must be in P (Park) to . Aim the RKE transmitter at the doors. operate it. vehicle and press and hold / " . until the parking lamps turn off. (Unlock): Press to unlock the Press and hold the liftgate doors. button & on the Remote . Turn on the hazard warning flashers. Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. . Turn the ignition switch on and See Power Door Locks on then off. page 2‑7. See Remote Vehicle Start on Liftgate page 2‑5. To open the liftgate the vehicle must Door Locks be in P (Park). Press the touchpad under the liftgate handle. To close To lock or unlock a door manually: the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull . From the inside use the door strap as an aid. lock knob on the window sill. . From the outside turn the key toward the front or rear . of the vehicle, or press Press the liftgate button on the center console. the Q or " button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . Press the touchpad switch on transmitter. the outside liftgate handle. For more information see Liftgate on page 2‑9. 1-6 In Brief

Windows Seat Adjustment Raise or lower the seat by moving the control (A) up or down. Power Seats See Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3. To raise or recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control (B) forward or rearward. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5. Press the front or rear of the control (C) to increase or decrease lumbar support. See Lumbar Adjustment on On vehicles with power windows, page 3‑4. the switches are on the driver door A. Power Seat Adjustment Control armrest. Each passenger door has a switch that controls only that B. Reclining Seatbacks window. C. Lumbar Adjustment Press the switch to lower the Move the seat forward or rearward window. Pull the switch up to by moving the control (A) forward or raise it. rearward. For more information, see Power Windows on page 2‑19. In Brief 1-7

Second Row Seats Third Row Seats Heated Seats The third row seats can be folded Heated Front Seats forward or removed. The heated seat controls are located on the center console. The engine must be running to operate them. I : Press to turn on the heated seatback. J : Press to turn on or off the heated seat and seatback. For more information see Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7. To access the third row, pull the sliding seat lever forward so that the seat cushion folds and the entire Pull up on the release lever located seat slides forward. on the back of the seat and push See Rear Seats on page 3‑8. the seatback forward. For detailed procedures see Third Row Seats on page 3‑11. 1-8 In Brief

Heated and Ventilated Safety Belt Sensing System for Seats Passenger Airbag On vehicles with this feature, the controls are on the front doors near the handle. H : Press to ventilate the seat. z : Press to heat the seat. For more information see Heated United States and Ventilated Front Seats on page 3‑8. Head Restraint Adjustment Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use Do not drive until the head restraints safety belts properly. for all occupants are installed and Canada . Safety Belts on page 3 13. adjusted properly. ‑ The passenger sensing system will For more information see Head . How to Wear Safety Belts turn off the right front passenger Restraints on page 3‑2. Properly on page 3‑17. frontal airbag under certain . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑22. . Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑53. In Brief 1-9 conditions. The driver airbag, Mirror Adjustment To adjust each mirror: seat‐mounted side impact airbags, Exterior Mirrors 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the and roof‐rail airbags are not affected driver or passenger side mirror. by the passenger sensing system. 2. Press one of the four arrows The passenger airbag status located on the control pad to indicator will be visible on the adjust the mirror. instrument panel when the vehicle is started. See Passenger Sensing 3. Press either (A) or (B) again to System on page 3‑37 for more deselect the mirror. information. Folding Mirrors To adjust each mirror: 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving position. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to Controls for the outside power the folded position. mirrors are located on the driver If equipped, manually fold the door armrest. mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward to return it to the original position. 1-10 In Brief

Interior Mirror Steering Wheel Power Tilt Wheel The vehicle has an automatic Adjustment dimming rearview mirror. Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the headlamps of the vehicle behind you. The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the ignition is turned to start. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2‑18.

For vehicles with the power tilt and telescope wheel, the control is on The adjustment lever is located on the left side of the steering column. the left side of the steering column. . Push the control up or down 1. Pull the lever down to adjust the to tilt the steering wheel up steering wheel. or down. 2. Move the steering wheel up or . Push the control forward or down or backward or forward rearward to move the steering into a comfortable position. wheel toward the front or rear of 3. Pull the lever up to lock the the vehicle. steering wheel in place. See Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 5‑2. In Brief 1-11

Interior Lighting Dome Lamp Override Exterior Lighting Dome Lamps The dome lamp override button is next to the exterior lamps control. The dome lamps are located in the E overhead console and above the : Press the button in and the rear seat passengers. dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to The dome lamps automatically return it to the extended position so come on when a door is opened, that the dome lamps come on when unless the dome lamp override a door is opened. button is pressed in. Reading Lamps To manually turn them on, turn the instrument panel brightness control Press the button near each lamp to clockwise to the farthest position. turn them on or off. For more information, see: 9 : Briefly turn to this position to . Dome Lamps on page 6‑5. turn the automatic light control off or on again. . Instrument Panel Illumination Control on page 6‑5. AUTO : Automatic operation of the headlamps at normal brightness and other exterior lamps. 1-12 In Brief

;: Manual operation of the parking Windshield Wiper/Washer 6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn the lamps and other exterior lamps, band up for more frequent wipes or The windshield wiper/washer lever except the headlamps. down for less frequent wipes. is located on the left side of the 2: Manual operation of the steering column. 1 : Slow wipes. headlamps and other exterior lamps. 2 : Fast wipes. # (If Equipped): Push the fog lamp Windshield Washer button in to turn on the fog lamps. J : Press the button at the end For more information, see: of the turn signal/lane change lever to spray washer fluid on the . Exterior Lamp Controls on windshield. page 6‑1. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ page 5‑5. Automatic Headlamp System on page 6‑3. . Delayed Headlamps on page 6 3. ‑ Turn the band with the wiper symbol . Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. to control the windshield wipers. 8 : Use for a single wiping cycle. 9 : Turns the wipers off. In Brief 1-13

Climate Controls See Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8‑1. For more information about the rear climate control, see Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) on page 8‑7 or Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑8.

A. Fan Control H. Display B. AUTO I. Power (On/Off) C. Defrost J. Rear Window Defogger D. Air Recirculation K. Air Conditioning E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) L. PASS (Passenger) F. Air Delivery Mode Control M. Passenger Side Temperature G. Driver Side Temperature Control Control 1-14 In Brief

Vehicle Features 4 : Change the display between the radio station frequency and the Radio(s) time, if equipped. While the ignition is off, press 4 to display the time. For more information about these and other radio features, see Operation on page 7‑2. Storing a Favorite Station A maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations. Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑6. O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped. decrease the volume. f : Select radio stations. © ¨ : Seek or scan stations. In Brief 1-15

Setting the Clock Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices To set the time and date for the Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite This vehicle may have an auxiliary radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port: Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite input located on the radio faceplate 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ Radio subscription can receive XM and a USB port located in the center ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then programming. console. External devices such as ® press O , to turn the radio on. iPod , laptop computers, MP3 XM Satellite Radio Service players, CD changers, USB storage 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, XM is a satellite radio service that is device, etc. can be connected MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, based in the 48 contiguous United to the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm month, day, and year). States and 10 Canadian provinces. (1/8 in) input jack or the USB port XM Satellite Radio has a wide depending on the audio system. 3. Press the pushbutton located variety of programming and under any one of the labels to be See Auxiliary Devices on commercial-free music, page 7‑34. changed. coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality 4. To increase or decrease the time sound. A fee is required to receive Bluetooth® or date, turn f clockwise or the XM service. The in-vehicle Bluetooth counter‐clockwise. For more information refer to: system allows users with a For detailed instructions on setting . www.xmradio.com or call Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to the clock for the vehicles specific 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). make and receive hands-free calls audio system, see Clock on . www.xmradio.ca or call using the vehicle’s audio system, page 5‑9. 1-877-438-9677 (Canada). microphone and controls. See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8. 1-16 In Brief

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone b g : Press to silence the vehicle Navigation System must be paired with the in-vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn The vehicle's navigation system Bluetooth system before it can be the sound on. Press and hold longer provides detailed maps of most used in the vehicle. Not all phones than two seconds to interact with major freeways and roads will support all functions. OnStar® or Bluetooth systems. throughout the United States and See Bluetooth on page 7‑46. + e − e : Increases or decreases Canada. After a destination has volume. been set, the system provides Steering Wheel Controls turn-by-turn instructions for reaching c : Press to reject an incoming the destination. In addition, the call, or to end a call. system can help locate a variety SRCE : Press to switch between of points of interest (POI), such the radio, CD, and for vehicles with, as banks, airports, restaurants, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear and more. auxiliary. See the vehicle's Navigation System ¨ : Press to seek the next radio manual for more information. station, the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot, or to select tracks and folders on an iPod® or USB device. For more information, see Steering w / x : Press to change favorite Wheel Controls on page 5‑3. radio stations, select tracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks or folders on an iPod® or USB device. In Brief 1-17

Cruise Control Storage Compartments

Press the buttons (B, C) on the front of the consoles to access the upper T : On/Off. For vehicles with a second row and lower storage areas. + RES : Press to accelerate or center console, open each area to Increase the storage area by folding resume speed. access the storage compartment the top of the console forward. Lift inside. up on rear console handle (A) and SET : Press to set speed or – pull forward. decrease speed. See Floor Console Storage on [ : Press to cancel cruise control. page 4‑2. See Cruise Control on page 9‑32. 1-18 In Brief

Power Outlets Performance and The vehicle has three 12‐volt Maintenance accessory power outlets which can be used to plug in electrical StabiliTrak® equipment, such as a cellular telephone. The traction control system limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak The power outlets are located: system assists with directional . On the instrument panel below control of the vehicle in difficult the climate controls. driving conditions. Both systems . At the rear of the center floor turn on automatically every time the vehicle is started. console. The switch to operate the front . . In the rear cargo area. sunroof is on the headliner above To turn off the traction control the rearview mirror. part of StabiliTrak, press and To use the outlets, remove the release 5 located on the cover. Vent: Press the front or rear of the switch to vent or close the sunroof. instrument panel below the See Power Outlets on page 5‑10. climate controls. illuminates Express-open/Express-close: F and the appropriate DIC Sunroof From the closed position, press and release the rear or front of message is displayed. See The ignition must be in ON/RUN or the switch to express-open or Vehicle Messages on page 5‑31. ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the express-close the sunroof. . The StabiliTrak system sunroof and power sunshade. See remains on. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) For more information see Sunroof For more information, see on page 9‑19 on page 2‑21. StabiliTrak System on page 9‑30. In Brief 1-19

Tire Pressure Monitor You may notice during cooler Tire Sealant and conditions that the low tire pressure This vehicle may have a Tire warning light will appear when the Compressor Kit Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). vehicle is first started and then This vehicle may come with a jack turn off as you drive. This may be and spare tire or a tire sealant and an early indicator that your tire compressor kit. The kit can be used pressures are getting low and the to seal small punctures in the tread tires need to be inflated to the area of the tire. proper pressure. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor Kit on page 10‑59 for complete The Tire Pressure Monitor System System can alert you about low tire operating information. alerts you when a significant pressure, but it does not replace reduction in pressure occurs in one normal monthly tire maintenance. Engine Oil Life System It is the driver s responsibility to or more of your vehicle’s tires by ’ maintain correct tire pressures. The engine oil life system calculates illuminating the low tire pressure engine oil life based on vehicle use warning light on the instrument See Tire Pressure Monitor System and displays the “Change Engine cluster. If the warning light comes on page 10‑45 and Tire Pressure Oil Soon” message when it is time on, stop as soon as possible and Monitor Operation on page 10‑46. to change the engine oil and filter. inflate the tires to the recommended The oil life system should be reset pressure shown on the tire loading to 100% only following an oil information label located on the change. driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12. The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected. 1-20 In Brief

Resetting the Oil Life System . Avoid idling the engine for long Roadside Assistance periods of time. 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Program with the engine off. . When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use U.S.: 1-800-252-1112 2. Press the vehicle information cruise control, if equipped. TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 button until “Oil Life Remaining” displays. . Always follow posted speed Canada: 1-800-268-6800 limits or drive more slowly when 3. Press and hold the set/reset conditions require. As the owner of a new Buick, you button until “100%” is displayed. are automatically enrolled in the Three chimes sound and the . Keep vehicle tires properly Roadside Assistance program. This “Change Engine Oil Soon” inflated. program provides technically trained message goes off. . Combine several trips into a advisors who are available 24 hours 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. single trip. a day, 365 days a year, minor repair information or towing arrangements. See Engine Oil Life System on . Replace the vehicle's tires with page 10‑10. the same TPC Spec number Roadside Assistance and OnStar molded into the tire's sidewall If you have a current OnStar Driving for Better Fuel near the size. subscription, press the OnStar Economy . Follow recommended scheduled button and the current GPS location maintenance. will be sent to an OnStar Advisor Driving habits can affect fuel who will assess your problem, mileage. Here are some driving tips contact Roadside Assistance, and to get the best fuel economy relay exact location to get you the possible. help you need. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly. . Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. In Brief 1-21

Online Owner Center Automatic Crash Response Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle The Online Owner Center is a In a crash, built in sensors can Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, complimentary service that includes automatically alert an OnStar Remote Door Unlock, Roadside online service reminders, vehicle advisor who is immediately Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn maintenance tips, online owner connected to the vehicle to see if Navigation and Hands‐Free manual, special privileges you need help. Calling are available on most and more. vehicles. Not all OnStar services are How OnStar Service Works available on all vehicles. For more Sign up today at: information see the OnStar Owner's Q : This blue button connects you www.gmownercenter.com/buick Guide or visit www.onstar.com to a specially trained OnStar advisor (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada). (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada), to verify your account information contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR ® and to answer questions. OnStar (1 888 466 7827) or TTY ] ‐ ‐ ‐ : Push this red emergency 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to button to get priority help from speak with an OnStar advisor specially trained OnStar emergency 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. advisors. X For a full description of OnStar : Push this button for hands‐free, services and system limitations, see voice‐activated calling and to give the OnStar Owner's Guide in the voice commands for turn‐by‐turn glove box. OnStar® uses several innovative navigation. technologies and live advisors to OnStar service is subject to the provide a wide range of safety, OnStar terms and conditions security, navigation, diagnostics, included in the OnStar Subscriber and calling services. Information. 1-22 In Brief

OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the OnStar Steering Wheel the vehicle is in a place where direction from which the vehicle was Controls OnStar has an agreement with a hit). When the virtual advisor feature wireless service provider for service of OnStar hands-free calling is This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute in that area. OnStar service also used, the vehicle also sends OnStar button that can be used to interact cannot work unless the vehicle is in the vehicle's GPS location so they with OnStar hands-free calling. a place where the wireless service can provide services where it is See Steering Wheel Controls on provider OnStar has hired for located. page 5‑3 for more information. that area has coverage, network Location information about the On some vehicles, the mute button capacity and reception when the vehicle is only available if the GPS can be used to dial numbers into service is needed, and technology satellite signals are unobstructed voice mail systems, or to dial phone that is compatible with the OnStar and available. extensions. See the OnStar Owner's service. Not all services are Guide for more information. available everywhere, particularly in The vehicle must have a working remote or enclosed areas, or at all electrical system, including Your Responsibility times. adequate battery power, for the Increase the volume of the radio if OnStar equipment to operate. There the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. The OnStar system can record and are other problems OnStar cannot transmit vehicle information. This control that may prevent OnStar If the light next to the OnStar information is automatically sent to from providing OnStar service at buttons is red, the system may an OnStar call center when Q is any particular time or place. Some not be functioning properly. pressed, ] is pressed, or if the examples are damage to important Press Q and request a vehicle airbags or ACR system deploy. parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, diagnostic. If the light appears This information usually includes tall buildings, tunnels, weather or clear (no light is appearing), your the vehicle's GPS location and, in wireless phone network congestion. OnStar subscription has expired and the event of a crash, additional all services have been deactivated. information regarding the crash that Press Q to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Doors Interior Mirrors Keys, Doors and Liftgate ...... 2-9 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ...... 2-18 Windows Vehicle Security Vehicle Security ...... 2-12 Windows Keys and Locks Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-12 Windows ...... 2-18 Immobilizer ...... 2-13 Power Windows ...... 2-19 Keys ...... 2-2 Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-13 Sun Visors ...... 2-21 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ...... 2-2 Exterior Mirrors Roof Remote Keyless Convex Mirrors ...... 2-15 Sunroof ...... 2-21 Entry (RKE) System Power Mirrors ...... 2-16 Operation ...... 2-3 Folding Mirrors ...... 2-16 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-17 Door Locks ...... 2-7 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-17 Power Door Locks ...... 2-7 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-8 Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Safety Locks ...... 2-8 2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Keys Program on page 13‑6. { WARNING Remote Keyless Leaving children in a vehicle with Entry (RKE) System the ignition key is dangerous for See Radio Frequency Statement on many reasons, children or others page 13‑16 for information could be badly injured or even regarding Part 15 of the Federal killed. They could operate the Communications Commission (FCC) power windows or other controls The key is used for the ignition and Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry or even make the vehicle move. all door locks. Canada. The windows will function with the The key has a bar-coded key tag Changes or modifications to keys in the ignition and children that the dealer/retailer or qualified this system by other than an could be seriously injured or killed locksmith can use to make new authorized service facility could void if caught in the path of a closing keys. Store this information in a safe authorization to use this equipment. window. Do not leave the keys in place, not in the vehicle. If there is a decrease in the RKE a vehicle with children. See your dealer/retailer if a operating range: replacement key or additional . Check the distance. The key is needed. transmitter may be too far from Notice: If you ever lock your keys the vehicle. in the vehicle, you may have to . Check the location. Other damage the vehicle to get in. vehicles or objects may be Be sure you have spare keys. blocking the signal. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

. Check the transmitter's battery. when is pressed again within See Battery Replacement later Q “ ” five seconds. See Vehicle in this section. Personalization on page 5‑40 . If the transmitter is still not for additional information. working correctly, see your dealer/retailer or a qualified Pressing Q may arm the technician for service. content theft‐deterrent system. See Anti-Theft Alarm System on Remote Keyless Entry page 2‑12. (RKE) System Operation K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door. If K is pressed The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions work up to again within five seconds, all With Remote Start and Power remaining doors unlock. The interior 60 m (195 feet) away from the Liftgate Shown, Without Similar vehicle. lamps come on and stay on for / (Remote Vehicle Start): For 20 seconds or until the ignition is There are other conditions which vehicles with this feature, see turned on. can affect the performance of the Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5 transmitter. See Remote Keyless If enabled through the DIC, the for additional information. parking lamps flash twice to indicate Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2. Q (Lock): Press to lock all unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle the doors. Personalization on page 5‑40. If enabled through the Driver Pressing K on the RKE transmitter Information Center (DIC), the disarms the content theft‐deterrent parking lamps flash once to indicate system. See Anti-Theft Alarm locking has occurred. If enabled System on page 2‑12. through the DIC, the horn sounds 2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

& (Power Liftgate): Press replacement can be purchased and and hold until the liftgate begins to programmed through your dealer/ move to open or close the liftgate. retailer. When the replacement The taillamps flash and a chime transmitter is programmed to this sounds to indicate when the liftgate vehicle using the DIC, all remaining is opening or closing. transmitters must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen L (Vehicle Locator/Panic transmitters will no longer work Alarm): Press and release to once the new transmitter is locate the vehicle. The parking programmed. Each vehicle can lamps flash and the horn sounds have up to eight transmitters three times. programmed to it. See “Relearn Press and hold L for more than Remote Key” under Driver 1. Separate the transmitter with a two seconds to activate the panic Information Center (DIC) on flat, thin object inserted into the alarm. The parking lamps flash and page 5‑25 for instructions on notch on the side. the horn sounds repeatedly for how to program transmitters to 2. Remove the old battery. Do not this vehicle. 30 seconds. The alarm turns off use a metal object. when the ignition is moved to Battery Replacement 3. Insert the new battery, positive ON/RUN or is pressed again. L Replace the battery if the REPLACE side facing down. Replace with a The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY CR2032 or equivalent battery. for the panic alarm to work. message displays in the DIC. 4. Snap the transmitter back Programming Transmitters to Notice: When replacing the together. the Vehicle battery, do not touch any of the Only RKE transmitters programmed circuitry on the transmitter. Static to this vehicle will work. If a from your body could damage the transmitter is lost or stolen, a transmitter. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

Remote Vehicle Start There are other conditions which automatic system, or at the same can affect the performance of the setting as when the vehicle was last This vehicle may have a remote transmitter, see Remote Keyless turned off. starting feature that starts the Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 engine from outside of the vehicle. If the vehicle has an automatic for additional information. climate control system and heated / (Remote Start): This button is Starting the Engine Using seats, the heated seats turn on located on the RKE transmitter if the Remote Start during colder outside temperatures vehicle has remote start. and shut off when the key is turned Laws in some communities may To start the vehicle: to ON/RUN. See Heated Front restrict the use of remote starters. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the Seats on page 3‑7 or Heated For example, some laws may vehicle. and Ventilated Front Seats on require a person using the remote page 3‑8 for more information. 2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. start to have the vehicle in view The rear window defogger and when doing so. Check local 3. Immediately after completing heated mirrors, if the vehicle has regulations for any requirements Step 2, press and hold / until them, turn on during colder outside on remote starting of vehicles. the parking lamps flash. If the temperatures and turn off when the Do not use the remote start feature vehicle's lights can not be seen, key is turned to ON/RUN. if the vehicle is low on fuel. The press and hold / for at least After entering the vehicle during a vehicle could run out of fuel. four seconds. remote start, insert and turn the key to the ON/RUN position to drive If the vehicle has the remote start When the vehicle starts the parking the vehicle. feature, the RKE transmitter lamps will turn on and remain on functions have an increased range as long as the engine is running. If the vehicle is left running it of operation. However, the range The doors will be locked and the automatically shuts off after may be less while the vehicle is climate control system will operate 10 minutes unless a time extension running. automatically if the vehicle has the has been done. 2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Extending Engine Run Time A maximum of two remote starts or Conditions in Which the remote start attempts are allowed To extend the engine run time by Remote Start Will Not Work between ignition cycles. 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 though 3 The vehicle cannot be started using while the engine is still running. After the vehicle's engine has been the remote start feature if the key is The engine run time can only be started two times using the remote in the ignition, the hood is open, or if extended if it is the first remote start start button, the ignition must be there is an emission control system since the vehicle has been driven. turned on and then back off before malfunction. Remote start can be extended the remote start procedure can be The engine turns off during a remote one time. used again. start if the coolant temperature gets If the remote start procedure is Shutting the Engine Off After a too high or if the oil pressure used again before the first Remote Start gets low. 10 minute time frame has ended, Vehicles that have the remote the first 10 minutes will immediately To manually shut off a remote start: vehicle start feature are shipped expire and the second 10 minute . Aim the RKE transmitter at the from the factory with the remote time frame will start. vehicle and press / until the vehicle start system enabled. For example, if the lock button and parking lamps turn off. The system may be enabled or then the remote start buttons are . Turn on the hazard warning disabled through the DIC if the pressed again after the vehicle has flashers. vehicle has DIC buttons. See been running for five minutes, “REMOTE START” under Vehicle . 10 minutes are added, allowing Turn the ignition switch on and Personalization on page 5‑40 for the engine to run for a total of then off. additional information. If the vehicle 15 minutes. does not have DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to enable or disable the remote start system. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

Door Locks Power Door Locks WARNING (Continued) The power door lock switches { WARNING . Young children who get into are located on the front doors. Unlocked doors can be unlocked vehicles may be " (Unlock): Press to unlock dangerous. unable to get out. A child can the doors. be overcome by extreme heat (Lock): Remove the key . Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent Q children, can easily open the from the ignition and press to injuries or even death from lock the doors. doors and fall out of a moving heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle. When a door is vehicle whenever leaving it. locked, the handle will not Delayed Locking . Outsiders can easily enter open it. The chance of being When locking the doors with the through an unlocked door thrown out of the vehicle in a power lock switch and a door or the when you slow down or stop crash is increased if the liftgate is open, the doors will lock your vehicle. Locking your doors are not locked. So, all five seconds after the last door is doors can help prevent this passengers should wear closed. You will hear three chimes from happening. safety belts properly and the to signal that the delayed locking doors should be locked feature is in use. whenever the vehicle To lock or unlock a door, use the is driven. key from the outside or the door lock from the inside. (Continued) 2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Pressing the power lock switch Lockout Protection twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override This feature protects you from the delayed locking feature and locking the key in the vehicle when immediately lock all the doors. the key is in the ignition and a front door is open. This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition. If the driver side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver's This feature can be programmed by door is open and the key is in the using the Driver Information Center ignition, all of the doors will lock and (DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK” then the driver door will unlock. under Vehicle Personalization on page 5‑40. If the passenger side power door lock switch is pressed when the Open the rear doors to access the Automatic Door Locks front passenger door is open and security locks on the inside edge of the key is in the ignition, all of the each door. Vehicles with an automatic doors will lock and then the front To set the locks, insert a key into lock/unlock feature enable you passenger door will unlock. the slot and turn it to the horizontal to program the vehicle's power position. The door can only be door locks. This feature can be Safety Locks opened from the outside with the programmed through the Driver door unlocked. To return the door to The vehicle has rear door security Information Center (DIC). See normal operation, turn the slot to the locks to prevent passengers from Vehicle Personalization on vertical position. page 5‑40 for more information. opening the rear doors from the inside. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Doors To unlock the liftgate, use the WARNING (Continued) power door lock switch or press the door unlock button on the Liftgate If the vehicle must be driven with RKE transmitter twice. See Remote Manual Liftgate Operation the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: Keyless Entry (RKE) System . Close all of the windows. Operation on page 2‑3. { WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on To open the liftgate, press the or under the instrument touchpad under the liftgate handle. Exhaust gases can enter the panel. The vehicle must be in P (Park) to vehicle if it is driven with the open the liftgate. To close the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with . Adjust the Climate Control liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap any objects that pass through the system to a setting that as an aid. seal between the body and the brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the The liftgate will not open if the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine highest setting. See Climate battery is disconnected or has low exhaust contains Carbon Control System in the Index. voltage. The liftgate will resume Monoxide (CO) which cannot be operation when the battery is seen or smelled. It can cause . If the vehicle is equipped with reconnected and charged. unconsciousness and even death. a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function. If the battery is properly connected (Continued) and has adequate voltage, and the For more information about liftgate still will not function, the carbon monoxide, see Engine vehicle should be taken to a Exhaust on page 9‑23. dealers/retailer for service. 2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

Power Liftgate Operation The power liftgate can be power Pressing the buttons or touchpad a opened and closed in the second time while the liftgate is The vehicle may have a power following ways: moving reverses the direction. liftgate. The vehicle must be in P (Park) to use this feature. . Press and hold the power liftgate button on the RKE transmitter. The taillamps will flash and a chime See Remote Keyless Entry will sound when the power liftgate (RKE) System Operation on is used. page 2‑3 for more information. { WARNING

You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing. Power Liftgate Button near Notice: If you open the liftgate Liftgate Latch without checking for overhead The liftgate can also be closed by obstructions such as a garage pressing the power liftgate button door, you could damage the next to the liftgate latch. Press the liftgate or the liftgate glass. button a second time during liftgate . Press the liftgate button on the Always check to make sure the operation to reverse that operation. area above and behind the liftgate center console. The power liftgate may be is clear before opening it. . Press the touchpad on the temporarily disabled under extreme outside liftgate handle. temperatures or under low battery conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

If the transmission is shifted out of close cycle. After removing the closed manually. Do not force the P (Park) while the power function is obstruction, the power liftgate liftgate open or closed during a in progress, the liftgate power operation can be used again. power cycle. function will continue to completion. If the liftgate comes across more If the transmission is shifted out of Manual Operation of Power obstacles on the same power cycle, Liftgate P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates the power function deactivates, and before the power liftgate latches you must manually open or close closed, the liftgate may reverse to the liftgate. A message displays, the open position. Cargo could fall LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate that out of the vehicle. Always make the liftgate is open. See Driver sure the power liftgate is closed and Information Center (DIC) on latched before you drive away. page 5‑25 for more information. If you power open the liftgate and After removing the obstructions, the liftgate support struts have lost manually open the liftgate to the full pressure, the lights will flash and a open position or close the liftgate to chime will sound. The liftgate will the fully closed and latched position. stay open temporarily, then slowly The liftgate resumes normal power close. See your dealer/retailer for operation. service before using the liftgate if The vehicle has pinch sensors this occurs. To change the liftgate to manual located on the side edges of the operation, press the switch on the Obstacle Detection Features liftgate. If an object is caught center console to the OFF position. between the liftgate and the body A warning chime will sound and the and presses against this sensor, the With the power liftgate disabled and liftgate will automatically reverse liftgate will reverse direction and all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate direction to the full closed or open open fully. The liftgate will remain can be manually opened and position if the liftgate encounters an open until it is activated again or closed. obstacle during a power open or 2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

To open the liftgate, press the Vehicle Security When the door is closed, the touchpad on the handle on the security light stops flashing and outside of the liftgate and lift the Vehicle theft is big business, stays on solid for approximately gate open. To close the liftgate, use especially in some cities. This 30 seconds. The content theft the pull cup to lower the liftgate and vehicle has theft-deterrent features, deterrent alarm is not armed close. The liftgate latch will power however, they do not make it until the security light goes off. impossible to steal. close. Always close the liftgate If the delayed locking feature is before driving. active, the alarm is not activated If the RKE button or the power close Anti-Theft Alarm System until all doors are closed and the button on the liftgate is pressed On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm security light goes off. while power operation is disabled, system, to activate the system: the lights will flash three times, but . Press Q when the driver door is the liftgate will not move. . Press Q on the Remote Keyless closed. The security light comes Entry (RKE) transmitter or the on solid for approximately It is not recommended that you power door lock switch when 30 seconds and then goes off. drive with the liftgate open. any door is open. The content theft deterrent alarm However, if you must drive with the is not armed until the security liftgate open, the liftgate should be light goes off. set to manual operation by pressing the OFF switch on the center The theft-deterrent system will not console. activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle's key or the manual door lock.

The security light flashes. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

If a locked door is opened without Testing the Alarm Immobilizer using the RKE transmitter, a To test the alarm: ten second pre-alarm occurs. See Radio Frequency Statement on The horn chirps and the lights 1. From inside the vehicle, lower page 13‑16 for information flash. If the key is not placed in the driver side window and open regarding Part 15 of the Federal the ignition and turned to START the driver door. Communications Commission (FCC) or the door is not unlocked by Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry 2. Press Q . Canada. pressing Q during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm goes off. 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the The headlamps flash and the horn door and wait for the security Immobilizer Operation sounds for about 30 seconds, then light to go out. This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ turns off to save the battery power. 4. Then reach in through the (Personalized Automotive Security window, unlock the door with the System) theft-deterrent system. The vehicle can be started with the ® correct ignition key if the alarm has manual door lock and open the PASS-Key III+ is a passive been set off. door. This should set off the theft-deterrent system. alarm. To avoid setting off the alarm by The system is automatically armed accident: If the alarm does not sound when it when the key is removed from the should, but the vehicle's headlamps ignition. . Lock the vehicle with the door flash, check to see if the horn key after the doors are closed. The system is automatically works. The horn fuse may be blown. disarmed when the key is turned to . Unlock the door with the RKE To replace the fuse, see Fuses and ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or transmitter. Unlocking a door any Circuit Breakers on page 10‑31. START from the LOCK/OFF other way sets off the alarm if If the alarm does not sound or the position. the system has been armed. vehicle's headlamps do not flash, Press K or place the key in the see your dealer/retailer for service. ignition and turn it to START to turn off the alarm. 2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

You do not have to manually arm or If the engine still does not start, and additional keys only. If all the disarm the system. the key appears to be undamaged, currently programmed keys are lost The security light comes on if try another ignition key and check or do not operate, you must see the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit your dealer/retailer or a locksmith there is a problem with arming or ® disarming the theft-deterrent Breakers on page 10‑31 for who can service PASS-Key III+ to system. additional information. If the engine have keys made and programmed still does not start with the other key, to the system. ® When the PASS-Key III+ system the vehicle needs service. If the senses an incorrect key, the vehicle See your dealer/retailer or a vehicle does start, the first key may locksmith who can service does not start. Anyone using a be faulty. See your dealer/retailer ® trial-and-error method to start the ® PASS-Key III+ to get a new key who can service the PASS-Key III+ blank that is cut exactly as the vehicle will be discouraged because to have a new key made. In an of the high number of electrical ignition key that operates the emergency, contact Roadside system. key codes. Assistance. See Roadside If the engine does not start and the Assistance Program on page 13‑6. To program the new additional key: security light on the instrument It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ 1. Verify that the new key has panel comes on when trying to start decoder to learn the transponder a 1 stamped on it. the vehicle, there may be a problem value of a new or replacement key. with your theft-deterrent system. Up to 10 keys may be programmed 2. Insert the already programmed Turn the ignition off and try again. to the vehicle. The following key in the ignition and start the procedure is for programming engine. If the engine does not start, see your dealer/retailer for service. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

3. After the engine has started, The SERVICE THEFT Exterior Mirrors turn the key to LOCK/OFF, DETERRENT SYSTEM message and remove the key. displays on the Driver Information Convex Mirrors 4. Insert the key to be programmed Center (DIC) when there is a and turn it to the ON/RUN problem with the theft-deterrent position within five seconds of system. See Anti-Theft Alarm { WARNING the original key being turned to System Messages on page 5‑37 for additional information. A convex mirror can make things, the LOCK/OFF position. like other vehicles, look farther Do not leave the key or device that The security light turns off once away than they really are. If you disarms or deactivates the theft the key has been programmed. cut too sharply into the right lane, deterrent system in the vehicle. 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if you could hit a vehicle on the additional keys are to be right. Check the inside mirror or programmed. glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see your dealer/retailer The passenger side mirror is convex or a locksmith to have a new shaped. A convex mirror's surface is key made. curved so more can be seen from the driver seat. 2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Power Mirrors To adjust each mirror: For vehicles with outside power 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the foldaway mirrors: driver or passenger side mirror. 2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to adjust the mirror. 3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen. 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. Folding Mirrors Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on the driver For vehicles with manual folding The controls for power foldaway door armrest. mirrors, fold the mirrors inward mirrors are located on the driver to prevent damage when going door armrest. through an automatic car wash. 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out To fold, push the mirror toward the to the driving position. vehicle. Push the mirror outward to return it to the original position. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

Resetting the Power Foldaway Automatic Dimming Feature Park Tilt Mirrors Mirrors The driver outside mirror adjusts for If the vehicle has the memory Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: the glare of the headlamps behind package, the outside mirrors have a you. See Automatic Dimming . The mirrors are accidentally park tilt feature. This feature tilts the Rearview Mirror on page 2 18 for obstructed while folding. ‑ outside mirrors to a preselected information on how to turn this position when the vehicle is in . They are accidentally manually feature on. R (Reverse). This allows the driver folded/unfolded. Turn Signal Indicator to view the curb for parallel parking. . The mirrors vibrate at normal The passenger and/or driver mirror The vehicle may have a turn signal driving speeds. returns to its original position indicator lamp that is built into the when the vehicle is shifted out Fold and unfold the mirrors one time mirror housing. The turn signal lamp of R (Reverse), or the ignition is using the mirror controls to reset flashes with the use of the vehicle's turned off or to OFF/LOCK. them to their normal position. turn signal and hazard flashers. A popping noise may be heard This feature can be turned on or during the resetting of the power Heated Mirrors off through the Driver Information foldaway mirrors. This sound is Center (DIC). See Vehicle normal after a manual folding For vehicles with heated mirrors: Personalization on page 5‑40 operation. < (Rear Window Defogger): for more information. Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8‑1 for more information. 2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Interior Mirrors O (On/Off): Press to turn the Windows dimming feature on or off. Automatic Dimming The vehicle may also have a Rear { WARNING Rearview Mirror Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑36 Leaving children, helpless adults, The vehicle has an automatic for more information. or pets in a vehicle with the dimming inside rearview mirror. windows closed is dangerous. If the vehicle has RVC, the O Automatic dimming reduces the They can be overcome by button for turning the dimming glare from the headlamps of the the extreme heat and suffer feature on or off will not be vehicle behind you. The dimming permanent injuries or even death available. feature comes on and the indicator from heat stroke. Never leave a light illuminates each time the Cleaning the Mirror child, a helpless adult, or a pet ignition is turned to start. alone in a vehicle, especially with Do not spray glass cleaner directly ® Vehicles with OnStar have three on the mirror. Use a soft towel the windows closed in warm or additional control buttons located at dampened with water. hot weather. the bottom of the mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more information about OnStar® and how to subscribe to it. See the OnStar® owner guide for more information about the services OnStar® provides. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

WARNING (Continued)

They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the Power Windows rear seat use the window lockout Uplevel shown, base similar button to prevent unintentional The power window controls are { WARNING operation of the windows. located on each of the side doors. The driver door also has switches Leaving children in a vehicle with that control the passenger and the keys is dangerous for many rear windows. The power windows reasons, children or others could work with the ignition in ACC/ be badly injured or even killed. ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when (Continued) Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑19. Press the switch to lower the window. Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window. 2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

Express-Up/Express-Down Programming the Power Anti-Pinch Feature Windows Windows The anti-pinch feature is on A window with the express‐up/down If the battery on the vehicle has windows with the express-up feature allows it to be raised or been recharged, disconnected, feature. If an object is in the way of lowered without holding the switch. or replaced, windows with the the window as it is express-closing, Press or pull the window switch fully express-up feature need to be or in certain weather conditions like and release it to activate the reprogrammed for this feature to severe icing, the window will stop express feature. The express mode work. To program the window: and open to a factory preset position. The window functions can be canceled by pressing or 1. Close all doors with the ignition normally once the obstruction is pulling the switch. in the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/ removed. RUN position, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is Window Lockout active. See Retained Accessory o (Window Lockout): The window Power (RAP) on page 9‑19. lockout switch is located with the 2. Press and continue to hold the power window switches on the window switch until the window driver door armrest. This feature is fully open. prevents the rear windows from 3. Pull up and hold the window being operated, except from the switch to close the window. driver position. Press the switch to Continue to hold it briefly after turn the lockout feature on or off. the window is fully closed. An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on. 4. Repeat for each window that has the express-up feature. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-21

Sun Visors Roof Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the Sunroof center mount and slide it along the The ignition must be in ON/RUN or rod from side-to-side to cover the ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the driver or passenger side of the front sunroof and power sunshade. See window. Swing the sun visor to the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) side to cover the side window. on page 9‑19 It can be moved along the rod from side-to-side in this position also. The vehicle may have a sunroof over the front seats and a rear Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror sunroof over the second row seats. Vent: From the closed position, The vehicle has lighted visor vanity The rear sunroof does not open. press and hold the front of the mirrors on both the driver and The switch to operate the front switch to vent the sunroof. Press passenger sun visors. Pull the sun sunroof is on the headliner above and hold the rear of the switch to visor down and lift the mirror cover the rearview mirror. close the sunroof. to turn the lamps on. Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in the tracks, damage the sunroof operation and plug the water draining system. 2-22 Keys, Doors and Windows

Express-open/Express-close: Rear Power Sunshade To open the rear sunshade, located From the closed position, press and over the second row seats, press On vehicles with a rear power release the rear of the switch to and release the rear of the switch. sunshade, the switch is on the express-open the sunroof. Press Press and release the front of the headliner above the rearview mirror. and release the front of the switch to switch to close the sunshade. express-close the sunroof. Do not keep the sunroof open for The front sunshade must be opened long periods of time while the and closed manually. Push up on vehicle is not in use. Debris can the sunshade handle to open the collect in the tracks, damage the sunshade. sunroof operation, and plug the water draining system. Manual Sunshades On a vehicle with only manual sunshades, press the button on the sunshade handle to release it and guide it back. Pull the sunshade forward until it latches to close it. Notice: The rear sunshade could be damaged if you attempt to open or close it manually. Do not manually open or close the rear sunshade. Seats and Restraints 3-1

Safety Belt Extender ...... 3-28 Child Restraints Seats and Safety System Check ...... 3-28 Older Children ...... 3-44 Restraints Safety Belt Care ...... 3-28 Infants and Young Replacing Safety Belt System Children ...... 3-47 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-29 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-49 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-51 Head Restraints Airbag System Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers Airbag System ...... 3-29 for Children (LATCH Front Seats Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-31 System) ...... 3-53 Power Seat Adjustment ...... 3-3 When Should an Airbag Replacing LATCH System Lumbar Adjustment ...... 3-4 Inflate? ...... 3-33 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-59 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-5 What Makes an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Heated Front Seats ...... 3-7 Inflate? ...... 3-34 (Rear Seat ) ...... 3-60 Heated and Ventilated Front How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Seats ...... 3-8 Restrain? ...... 3-35 (Right Front What Will You See After an Passenger Seat) ...... 3-62 Rear Seats Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-35 Rear Seats ...... 3-8 Passenger Sensing Third Row Seats ...... 3-11 System ...... 3-37 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Safety Belts Vehicle ...... 3-42 Safety Belts ...... 3-13 Adding Equipment to the How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42 Properly ...... 3-17 Airbag System Check ...... 3-43 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-22 Replacing Airbag System Safety Belt Use During Parts After a Crash ...... 3-44 Pregnancy ...... 3-27 3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/ spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the 1. Pull the head restraint up to drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same raise it. To lower the head all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's restraint, press the release adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the button, located on the head chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint post on the top of the seatback, while you push the head restraint down. 2. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. Seats and Restraints 3-3

Front Seats If the vehicle has power seats, the Memory Seat and Mirrors controls are located on the outboard On vehicles with the memory side of the seats. Power Seat Adjustment package, the controls are located on Move the seat forward or rearward the driver door. by sliding the power seat 1: Saves the seating position for adjustment control (A) forward or driver 1. rearward. 2: Saves the seating position for The vehicle may have additional driver 2. features to adjust the power seat: S : Recalls the easy exit position. . Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the power seat To save a position in memory: adjustment control (A) up 1. Adjust the driver seat, including or down. the seatback recliner, both . Raise or lower the front part of outside mirrors, and the power the seat cushion by moving the steering column to a comfortable Driver Seat with Power Seat front of the control up or down. position. Control, Power Recline, . Raise or lower the rear part of See Power Mirrors on and Power Lumbar shown the seat cushion by moving the page 2‑16 for more information. A. Power Seat Adjustment Control rear of the control up or down. Not all vehicles will have the B. Reclining Seatbacks on The vehicle may have a memory ability to save and recall the page 3‑5. function which allows seat settings mirror positions. C. Lumbar Adjustment on to be saved and recalled. See 2. Press and hold button 1 until page 3‑4. “Memory Seat and Mirrors” later in two beeps sound to let you this section for more information. know that the position has been stored. 3-4 Seats and Restraints

A second seating and mirror If something has blocked the driver Lumbar Adjustment position can be programmed by seat while recalling a memory repeating the above steps and position, the driver seat recall may Manual Lumbar pressing button 2. stop working. If this happens, To recall the memory positions, the remove the obstruction and press vehicle must be in P (Park). Press the appropriate control for the area and release either button 1 or 2. that is not recalling for two seconds. The seat, outside mirrors, and Try pressing the memory button power steering column will move again. If the memory position is still to the position previously stored. not being recalled, see your dealer/ You will hear a single beep. retailer for service. If the RKE transmitter is used to Easy Exit Seat enter the vehicle and the remote S : With the vehicle in P (Park), recall memory feature has been press the exit button. You will hear turned on, automatic seat and a single beep. The driver seat will mirror movement will occur. move back into the exit position. On vehicles with this feature, the See MEMORY SEAT RECALL “ ” handle is located on the inboard under Vehicle Personalization on If the easy exit seat feature has side of the seatback. page 5‑40 for more information. been turned on in the Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic Turn the handle rearward to To stop recall movement of the seat movement will occur when the decrease lumbar support. Turn the memory feature at any time, press key is removed from the ignition. handle forward to increase lumbar one of the power seat controls, support. memory buttons, or power mirror For programming information, buttons. see Vehicle Personalization on The lumbar support may need to be page 5‑40 for more information. adjusted when changing the seating position. Seats and Restraints 3-5

Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks On vehicles with power lumbar, the Manual Reclining Seatbacks controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats. See “Power Lumbar” { WARNING under Power Seat Adjustment on You can lose control of the page 3‑3 for more information. vehicle if you try to adjust a To increase or decrease lumbar manual driver's seat while the support, press and hold the front or vehicle is moving. The sudden rear of the control (C). movement could startle and Release the control when the confuse you, or make you push a seatback reaches the desired level pedal when you do not want to. On vehicles with seats that have of lumbar support. Adjust the driver's seat only when manual reclining seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is The lumbar support may need to be the vehicle is not moving. located on the outboard side of adjusted when changing the seating the seat. position. { WARNING To recline the seatback: If either seatback is not locked, it 1. Lift the recline lever. could move forward in a sudden 2. Move the seatback to the stop or crash. That could cause desired position, then release injury to the person sitting there. the lever to lock the seatback in Always push and pull on the place. seatbacks to be sure they are 3. Push and pull on the seatback to locked. make sure it is locked. 3-6 Seats and Restraints

To return the seatback to an upright position: { WARNING WARNING (Continued) 1. Lift the lever without applying Sitting in a reclined position when For proper protection when the pressure to the seatback and the vehicle is in motion can be vehicle is in motion, have the the seatback will return to the dangerous. Even when buckled upright position. seatback upright. Then sit well up, the safety belts cannot do back in the seat and wear the 2. Push and pull on the seatback to their job when reclined like this. safety belt properly. make sure it is locked. The shoulder belt cannot do its Power Reclining Seatbacks job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in On vehicles with seats that have front of you. In a crash, you could power reclining seatbacks, the go into it, receiving neck or other control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the injuries. seat behind the power seat control. The lap belt cannot do its job See “Reclining Seatbacks” under either. In a crash, the belt could Power Seat Adjustment on go up over your abdomen. The page 3‑3 for more information. belt forces would be there, not at . To recline the seatback, tilt the your pelvic bones. This could top of the control (B) rearward. cause serious internal injuries. . To bring the seatback forward, (Continued) Do not have a seatback reclined if tilt the top of the control forward. the vehicle is moving. Seats and Restraints 3-7

Heated Front Seats On vehicles with heated front seats, The passenger seat may take the controls are located on the longer to heat up. center console. To operate the { WARNING If the vehicle has remote vehicle heated seats the engine must be start and is started using the RKE If you cannot feel temperature running. transmitter, the front heated seats change or pain to the skin, the I (Heated Seatback): Press to will be turned on to the high setting seat heater may cause burns turn on the heated seatback. if it is cold outside. See “Remote even at low temperatures. J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Vehicle Start” under Remote To reduce the risk of burns, Press to turn on or off the heated Keyless Entry (RKE) System people with such a condition seat and seatback. Operation on page 2‑3. When should use care when using the the ignition is turned on, the heated The light on the button will come seat heater, especially for long seat feature will turn off. To turn the on to indicate that the feature is on. periods of time. Do not place heated seat feature back on, press Each time the button is pressed, the desired button. anything on the seat that the temperature settings change insulates against heat, such as a from high, to medium, to low, to off. blanket, cushion, cover or similar Indicator lights above the button will item. This may cause the seat show the level of heat selected: heater to overheat. An three for high, two for medium, and overheated seat heater may one for low. cause a burn or may damage the seat. 3-8 Seats and Restraints

Heated and Ventilated H (Ventilated Seat): Press to Rear Seats Front Seats ventilate the entire seat. This symbol appears on the climate { WARNING control display to indicate that the feature is on. If you cannot feel temperature z (Heated Seat and Seatback): change or pain to the skin, the Press to heat the entire seat. seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures. This symbol appears on the climate To reduce the risk of burns, control display to indicate that the feature is on. people with such a condition should use care when using the For either feature press the button seat heater, especially for long once for the highest setting. With each press of the switch, the seat periods of time. Do not place A. Seat Adjustment Handle anything on the seat that changes to the next lower setting, insulates against heat, such and then the off setting. The lights B. Reclining Seatback Strap indicate three for the highest setting as a blanket, cushion, cover C. Sliding Seat Lever or similar item. This may cause and one for the lowest. the seat heater to overheat. The heated and ventilated seats are An overheated seat heater may canceled after the ignition is turned cause a burn or may damage off. To use the heated and ventilated the seat. seat feature after the vehicle is started, you will need to press the On vehicles with the heated and appropriate seat button again. ventilated seat feature, the controls are located on the front doors near the door handle. Seats and Restraints 3-9

Entering and Exiting the 3. Place folding armrests in the Third Row upright position. 4. Ensure that the safety belt is { WARNING unfastened and in the stowed position. Using the third row seating 5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) position while the second row is forward and move the seatback folded, or folded and tumbled, forward. The seat cushion will could cause injury in a sudden fold, and the entire seat will slide stop or crash. Be sure to return forward. the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the Returning the Seat to the seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row: Seating Position place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in To return the second row seat to its front of or on the second row normal seating position: Notice: Folding a rear seat with seat, or in the seat tracks on the the safety belts still fastened may floor. 1. Remove objects on the floor cause damage to the seat or the behind the second row seat or in 2. Move the front center console safety belts. Always unbuckle the the seat tracks on the floor. armrest completely forward. safety belts and return them to See Center Console Storage 2. Pull the seatback rearward until their normal stowed position on page 4 1. it is locked in place. before folding a rear seat. ‑ 3. Slide the seat rearward by pushing on the seatback until it is locked into place. 3-10 Seats and Restraints

4. Push down on the rear of the Folding the Rear Seat To return the seatback to the seat cushion until it is locked in seating position, lift the upper To fold the second row seats: place. corner of the seatback and push it 1. Remove anything on or under 5. Push and pull on the seatback rearward until it locks into place. the seat. and seat cushion to make sure Push and pull on the seatback to they are locked in place. 2. Place the armrest in the upright make sure it is locked. position, and unfasten the 6. Check that the safety belt is not Adjusting the Seats safety belt. under the seat cushion. To adjust the second row seats, pull 3. Pull forward on the reclining Reclining the Seatbacks outward on the seat adjustment seatback strap (B) and push handle (A). Slide the seat forward or To recline the seatback: down on the seatback. rearward to the desired position. 1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull If the headrest touches the front Release the handle and push and the reclining seatback strap (B). seat, slide the second row seat pull on the seat to make sure it is rearward. locked. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the strap to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. Seats and Restraints 3-11

Third Row Seats To fold the seatback: 1. Remove anything on or under { WARNING the seat.

Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or pushed forward in the entry position, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure 3. Pull up on the release lever it is locked into place. located on the back of the seat. The third row seats can be folded The headrest moves forward forward or removed. automatically. 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt Notice: Folding a rear seat with 4. Push the seatback forward to mini-latch, using a key in the slot lay flat. the safety belts still fastened may on the mini-buckle, let the belt cause damage to the seat or the retract into the headliner. Stow safety belts. Always unbuckle the the mini-latch in the holder safety belts and return them to located in the headliner. their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 3-12 Seats and Restraints

To return the seatback to the Notice: Folding a rear seat with seating position: { WARNING the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the 1. Raise the seatback into place by A safety belt that is improperly using the pullstrap from the rear safety belts. Always unbuckle the routed, not properly attached, safety belts and return them to of the vehicle, or by pushing it or twisted will not provide the into place from inside the their normal stowed position protection needed in a crash. before folding a rear seat. vehicle. The person wearing the belt could 2. The headrest must be locked be seriously injured. After raising 3. Fold the seatback down. See Folding the Seatback earlier in into place before sitting in the rear seatback, always check “ ” this section. the seat. to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, 4. Remove the rear bolts located { WARNING and are not twisted. on the floor on each side of the seat. If either seatback is not locked, it 4. Reconnect the center safety belt 5. Remove the seat by tilting it could move forward in a sudden mini-latch to the mini-buckle. slightly upward, and then pulling stop or crash. That could cause Do not let it twist. it out of the rear of the vehicle in injury to the person sitting there. 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure one motion. Always push and pull on the the mini-latch is secure. 6. Replace the bolts in the floor seatbacks to be sure they are holes for storage. locked. Removing the Third Row Seats 1. Remove the cargo management Installing the Third Row Seats 3. Push and pull on the seatback to system, if it is in the vehicle. make sure it is locked in place. 1. Before installing the seat the See Cargo Management System seatback must be folded on page 4‑3. forward. See “Folding the 2. Remove anything on or under Seatback” earlier in this section. the seat. Seats and Restraints 3-13

The seats must be placed in Safety Belts the proper locations to attach { WARNING correctly. The wider seat must This section of the manual be installed on the driver side describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride and the narrower seat on the properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside passenger side. Remove the things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people bolts from the holes in the floor riding in these areas are more before installing the seats. { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride 2. Place the seat on the vehicle in any area of your vehicle that floor so that the front seat hooks Do not let anyone ride where is not equipped with seats and are on the vehicle bars. a safety belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in 3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to passenger(s) are not wearing your vehicle is in a seat and using 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. seat to make sure it is locked in much worse. You can hit things place. inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a 4. Raise the seatback to its upright ejected from the vehicle. You reminder to buckle the safety belts. position. Push and pull on the and your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on seatback to make sure it is seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑16 for additional information. locked into place. same crash, you might not be, 5. Push the headrest up into if you are buckled up. Always position. Push and pull on the fasten your safety belt, and check headrest to make sure it is that your passenger(s) are locked into place. restrained properly too. 6. Reconnect the center safety belt mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do not let it twist. 3-14 Seats and Restraints

In most states and in all Canadian Why Safety Belts Work provinces, the law requires wearing When you ride in or on anything, safety belts. Here is why: you go as fast as it goes. You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people Put someone on it. who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. it is just a seat on wheels. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Seats and Restraints 3-15

Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... 3-16 Seats and Restraints

Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I Safety Belts never drive far from home, why should I wear safety Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts? after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash — even A: You could be whether you are — one that is not your fault — you wearing a safety belt or not. But and your passenger(s) can be your chance of being conscious hurt. Being a good driver does during and after an accident, so not protect you from things you can unbuckle and get out, is beyond your control, such as much greater if you are belted. bad drivers. or the safety belts! And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are Most accidents occur within With safety belts, you slow down upside down. 40 km (25 miles) of home. as the vehicle does. You get more And the greatest number of time to stop. You stop over more Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why serious injuries and deaths distance, and your strongest bones should I have to wear safety occur at speeds of less than take the forces. That is why safety belts? 65 km/h (40 mph). belts make such good sense. A: Airbags are supplemental Safety belts are for everyone. systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. Seats and Restraints 3-17

How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your If you slid under it, the belt would passenger(s) wear a safety belt, apply force on your abdomen. This Properly there is important information you could cause serious or even fatal This section is only for people of should know. injuries. The shoulder belt should go adult size. over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are Be aware that there are special best able to take belt restraining things to know about safety belts forces. and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and The shoulder belt locks if there is a infants. If a child will be riding in sudden stop or crash. the vehicle, see Older Children on page 3‑44 or Infants and Young Children on page 3‑47. Follow those rules for everyone's protection. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that Sit up straight and always keep unbelted people are hurt more often your feet on the floor in front of you. in crashes than those who are The lap part of the belt should be wearing safety belts. worn low and snug on the hips, Occupants who are not buckled up just touching the thighs. In a crash, can be thrown out of the vehicle in a this applies force to the strong crash. And they can strike others in pelvic bones and you would be less the vehicle who are wearing safety likely to slide under the lap belt. belts. 3-18 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. A: The lap belt is too loose. It will It will not give as much not give nearly as much protection this way. protection this way. Seats and Restraints 3-19

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your You can be seriously injured if lap belt is too loose. In a crash, your belt is buckled in the wrong you could slide under the lap place like this. In a crash, the belt belt and apply force on your would go up over your abdomen. abdomen. This could cause The belt forces would be there, serious or even fatal injuries. not on the pelvic bones. This The lap belt should be worn low could cause serious internal and snug on the hips, just injuries. Always buckle your belt touching the thighs. into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle. 3-20 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. Seats and Restraints 3-21

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured by you wear the shoulder belt under not wearing the lap-shoulder belt your arm. In a crash, your body properly. In a crash, you would would move too far forward, not be restrained by the shoulder which would increase the chance belt. Your body could move too of head and neck injury. Also, the far forward increasing the chance belt would apply too much force of head and neck injury. You to the ribs, which are not as might also slide under the lap strong as shoulder bones. You belt. The belt force would then be could also severely injure internal applied right on the abdomen. organs like your liver or spleen. That could cause serious or fatal The shoulder belt should go over A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should the shoulder and across the go over the shoulder and across chest. the chest. 3-22 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Lap-Shoulder Belt { WARNING All seating positions in the vehicle You can be seriously injured by a have a lap-shoulder belt. twisted belt. In a crash, you would If you are using a rear seating not have the full width of the belt position with a detachable safety to spread impact forces. If a belt belt and the safety belt is not is twisted, make it straight so it attached, see Third Row Seats on can work properly, or ask your page 3‑11 for instruction on dealer/retailer to fix it. reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. Seats and Restraints 3-23

5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks. get twisted. 4. Pull up on the latch plate to The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 3‑28. belt go back slightly to unlock it. Position the release button on Then pull the belt across you the buckle so that the safety belt more slowly. 6. To make the lap part tight, pull could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt. If the shoulder portion of a necessary. passenger belt is pulled out all It may be necessary to pull the the way, the child restraint stitching on the safety belt locking feature may be engaged. through the latch plate to fully If this happens, let the belt go tighten the lap belt on smaller back all the way and start again. occupants. 3-24 Seats and Restraints

Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions. Adjust the height so that the To unlatch the belt, push the button shoulder portion of the belt is To move it down, push down on the on the buckle. The belt should centered on the shoulder. The belt button (A) and move the height return to its stowed position. Slide should be away from the face and adjuster to the desired position. the latch plate up the safety belt neck, but not falling off of the You can move the height adjuster webbing when the safety belt is not shoulder. Improper shoulder belt up by pushing up on the shoulder in use. The latch plate should rest height adjustment could reduce the belt guide. on the stitching on the safety belt, effectiveness of the safety belt in a After the adjuster is set to the near the guide loop on the side wall. crash. desired position, try to move it down without pushing the button to make sure it has locked into position. Seats and Restraints 3-25

Safety Belt Pretensioners Pretensioners work only once. If the Here is how to install a comfort pretensioners activate in a crash, guide to the safety belt: This vehicle has safety belt they will need to be replaced, and pretensioners for the front outboard probably other new parts for the occupants. Although the safety belt vehicle's safety belt system. See pretensioners cannot be seen, they Replacing Safety Belt System Parts are part of the safety belt assembly. After a Crash on page 3 29. They can help tighten the safety ‑ belts during the early stages of a Rear Safety Belt Comfort moderate to severe frontal, near Guides frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner This vehicle may have rear shoulder activation are met. And, for vehicles belt comfort guides. If not, they are with side impact airbags, safety belt available through your dealer/ pretensioners can help tighten the retailer. The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older safety belts in a side crash or a Outboard Positions rollover event. children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When 1. For the outboard positions, installed and properly adjusted, the remove the guide from its comfort guide positions the shoulder storage clip on the interior body. belt away from the neck and head. For the third row center position, locate the comfort guide which is located in a storage pocket, at the top of the seat, under the headrest on the driver's side of the vehicle. 3-26 Seats and Restraints

To access the comfort guide, you will first need to move the headrest forward by pulling on the handle behind the seatback. The comfort guide will now be accessible.

2. Place the guide over the belt 3. Be sure that the belt is not and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.

Third Row Center Position Pull the comfort guide out of its storage location and then return the headrest to its upright position. Seats and Restraints 3-27

Safety Belt Use During { WARNING Pregnancy A safety belt that is not properly Safety belts work for everyone, worn may not provide the including pregnant women. Like all protection needed in a crash. occupants, they are more likely to The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured if they do not be seriously injured. The shoulder wear safety belts. belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage location or A pregnant woman should wear on its storage clip. a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. 3-28 Seats and Restraints

The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check Safety Belt Care to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry. that the fetus will not be hurt in a belt reminder light, safety belts, crash. For pregnant women, as for buckles, latch plates, retractors { WARNING anyone, the key to making safety and anchorages are working belts effective is wearing them properly. Look for any other loose or Do not bleach or dye safety belts. properly. damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. In that might keep a safety belt system a crash, they might not be able Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer/ to provide adequate protection. retailer to have it repaired. Torn or Clean safety belts only with mild If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten frayed safety belts may not protect soap and lukewarm water. around you, you should use it. you in a crash. They can rip apart But if a safety belt is not long under impact forces. If a belt is torn enough, your dealer/retailer will or frayed, get a new one right away. order you an extender. When you Make sure the safety belt reminder go in to order it, take the heaviest light is working. See Safety Belt coat you will wear, so the extender Reminders on page 5‑16 for more will be long enough for you. To help information. avoid personal injury, do not let Keep safety belts clean and dry. someone else use it, and use it only See Safety Belt Care on for the seat it is made to fit. The page 3 28. extender has been designed for ‑ adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. Seats and Restraints 3-29

Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System safety belts may not be necessary. System Parts After a But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following Crash were used during any crash may airbags: have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver. { WARNING See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the right front A crash can damage the safety replaced. passenger. belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be . A seat-mounted side impact A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt airbag for the driver. may not properly protect the system was not being used at the . A seat-mounted side impact person using it, resulting in time of the crash. airbag for the right front serious injury or even death in a Have the safety belt pretensioners passenger. crash. To help make sure the checked if the vehicle has been in a . safety belt systems are working A roof-rail airbag for the driver, crash, or if the airbag readiness light passenger seated directly properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle inspected and any necessary behind the driver, and the third or while you are driving. See Airbag row outboard passenger replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5‑16. position. possible. . A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger, passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger, and the third row outboard passenger position. 3-30 Seats and Restraints

All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things have the word AIRBAG embossed to know about the airbag system: { WARNING in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening. Airbags inflate with great force, { WARNING faster than the blink of an eye. For frontal airbags, the word Anyone who is up against, or AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not very close to, any airbag when it part of the steering wheel for the inflates can be seriously injured wearing your safety belt — even if driver and on the instrument panel or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for the right front passenger. you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety close to the airbag, as you would With seat-mounted side impact belts, but do not replace them. be if you were sitting on the edge airbags, the word AIRBAG will Also, airbags are not designed to of your seat or leaning forward. appear on the side of the seatback Safety belts help keep you in closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only position before and during a With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑33. headliner or trim. should sit as far back as possible Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance the protection provided by safety the vehicle. of hitting things inside the vehicle belts. Even though today's airbags or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on or are also designed to help reduce sleep against the door or side are “supplemental restraints” to the risk of injury from the force of an windows in seating positions with inflating bag, all airbags must inflate the safety belts. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags very quickly to do their job. and/or roof-rail airbags. properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Seats and Restraints 3-31

Where Are the Airbags? { WARNING

Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel cluster, for adults and older children, but which shows the airbag symbol. not for young children and infants. The system checks the airbag Neither the vehicle's safety belt electrical system for malfunctions. system nor its airbag system The light tells you if there is an is designed for them. Young electrical problem. See Airbag children and infants need the Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for protection that a child restraint more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the system can provide. Always middle of the steering wheel. secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 3‑44 or Infants and Young Children on page 3‑47. 3-32 Seats and Restraints

The right front passenger frontal Driver Side shown, Passenger Driver Side shown, Passenger airbag is in the instrument panel on Side similar Side similar the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbags for the driver and right front right front passenger, passengers passenger are in the side of the behind the driver and right front seatbacks closest to the door. passenger, and the third row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. Seats and Restraints 3-33

When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate { WARNING at different crash speeds. Inflate? For example: If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to occupant and an airbag, the . If the vehicle hits a stationary inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate airbag might not inflate properly or near-frontal crashes to help or it might force the object into at a different crash speed than if reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object. that person causing severe injury injuries mainly to the driver's or right or even death. The path of an front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that inflating airbag must be kept However, they are only designed deforms, the airbags could clear. Do not put anything to inflate if the impact exceeds inflate at a different crash speed between an occupant and an a predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds that does not deform. anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed the occupants. Do not use seat accessories that than if the vehicle hits a wide block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will object (like a wall). seat-mounted side impact airbag. or should deploy is not based on . If the vehicle goes into an object how fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could Never secure anything to the roof It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight by routing a rope or tie down quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object. through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an Thresholds can also vary with inflating roof-rail airbag will be specific vehicle design. blocked. 3-34 Seats and Restraints

Frontal airbags are not intended to the system's designed threshold determined by the location and inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear level. The threshold level can vary severity of the side impact. In a impacts, or in many side impacts. with specific vehicle design. rollover event, roof-rail airbag In addition, the vehicle has Seat-mounted side impact airbags deployment is determined by the dual-stage frontal airbags. are not intended to inflate in frontal direction of the roll. Dual-stage airbags adjust the impacts, near-frontal impacts, restraint according to crash severity. rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail What Makes an Airbag The vehicle has electronic frontal airbags are not intended to inflate in Inflate? sensors, which help the sensing rear impacts. A seat-mounted side In a deployment event, the sensing system distinguish between a impact airbag is intended to deploy system sends an electrical signal moderate frontal impact and a more on the side of the vehicle that is triggering a release of gas from the severe frontal impact. For moderate struck. Both roof-rail airbags will inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags deploy when either side of the airbag causing the bag to break out inflate at a level less than full vehicle is struck, or if the sensing of the cover and deploy. The inflator, deployment. For more severe frontal system predicts that the vehicle is the airbag, and related hardware are impacts, full deployment occurs. about to roll over, or in a severe all part of the airbag module. The vehicle has seat-mounted side frontal impact. Frontal airbag modules are located impact and roof-rail airbags. See In any particular crash, no one inside the steering wheel and Airbag System on page 3 29. can say whether an airbag should ‑ instrument panel. For vehicles with Seat-mounted side impact and have inflated simply because of seat-mounted side impact airbags, roof-rail airbags are intended to the damage to a vehicle or because there are airbag modules in the side inflate in moderate to severe side of what the repair costs were. of the front seatbacks closest to crashes. In addition, these roof-rail For frontal airbags, inflation is the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate determined by what the vehicle hits, airbags, there are airbag modules in during a rollover or in a severe the angle of the impact, and how the ceiling of the vehicle, near the frontal impact. Seat-mounted side quickly the vehicle slows down. side windows that have occupant impact and roof-rail airbags will For seat-mounted side impact and seating positions. inflate if the crash severity is above roof-rail airbags, deployment is Seats and Restraints 3-35

How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags What Will You See After are designed to help contain the Restrain? head and chest of occupants in the an Airbag Inflates? In moderate to severe frontal or outboard seating positions in the After the frontal airbags and near frontal collisions, even belted first and second rows. The rollover seat-mounted side impact airbags occupants can contact the steering capable roof-rail airbags are inflate, they quickly deflate, so wheel or the instrument panel. In designed to help reduce the risk of quickly that some people may not moderate to severe side collisions, full or partial ejection in rollover even realize an airbag inflated. even belted occupants can contact events, although no system can Roof-rail airbags may still be at least the inside of the vehicle. prevent all such ejections. partially inflated for some time after Airbags supplement the protection But airbags would not help in they deploy. Some components of provided by safety belts. Frontal many types of collisions, primarily the airbag module may be hot for airbags distribute the force of the because the occupant's motion is several minutes. For location of the impact more evenly over the not toward those airbags. See When airbag modules, see What Makes occupant's upper body, stopping Should an Airbag Inflate? on an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑34. the occupant more gradually. page 3‑33 for more information. The parts of the airbag that Seat‐mounted side impact and Airbags should never be regarded come into contact with you may roof-rail airbags distribute the force as anything more than a supplement be warm, but not too hot to of the impact more evenly over the to safety belts. touch. There may be some occupant's upper body. smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. 3-36 Seats and Restraints

Airbag inflation does not prevent The vehicle has a feature that may In many crashes severe enough to the driver from seeing out of the automatically unlock the doors, turn inflate the airbag, windshields are windshield or being able to steer the on the interior lamps and hazard broken by vehicle deformation. vehicle, nor does it prevent people warning flashers, and shut off the Additional windshield breakage from leaving the vehicle. fuel system after the airbags inflate. may also occur from the right front You can lock the doors, turn off the passenger airbag. interior lamps and hazard warning { WARNING . Airbags are designed to inflate flashers by using the controls for only once. After an airbag When an airbag inflates, there those features. inflates, you will need some may be dust in the air. This dust new parts for the airbag system. could cause breathing problems { WARNING If you do not get them, the for people with a history of airbag system will not be there asthma or other breathing trouble. A crash severe enough to inflate to help protect you in another To avoid this, everyone in the the airbags may have also crash. A new system will include vehicle should get out as soon damaged important functions in airbag modules and possibly as it is safe to do so. If you have the vehicle, such as the fuel other parts. The service manual breathing problems but cannot system, brake and steering for your vehicle covers the need get out of the vehicle after an systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to replace other parts. airbag inflates, then get fresh air appears to be drivable after a by opening a window or a door. moderate crash, there may be If you experience breathing concealed damage that could problems following an airbag make it difficult to safely operate deployment, you should seek the vehicle. medical attention. Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred. Seats and Restraints 3-37

. The vehicle has a crash sensing The passenger sensing system and diagnostic module which turns off the right front passenger records information after a frontal airbag under certain crash. See Vehicle Data conditions. The driver airbag, Recording and Privacy on seat‐mounted side impact airbags page 13‑15 and Event Data and the roof-rail airbags are not Recorders on page 13‑15. United States affected by the passenger sensing . Let only qualified technicians system. work on the airbag systems. The passenger sensing system Improper service can mean that works with sensors that are part an airbag system will not work of the right front passenger seat. properly. See your dealer/retailer The sensors are designed to detect for service. the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right Passenger Sensing Canada front passenger frontal airbag System The words ON and OFF, or the should be enabled (may inflate) symbol for on and off, are visible or not. The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. If you are According to accident statistics, sensing system for the right front using remote start, if equipped, to passenger position. The passenger children are safer when properly start the vehicle from a distance, secured in a rear seat in the correct airbag status indicator will be visible you may not see the system on the instrument panel when the child restraint for their weight check. When the system check is and size. vehicle is started. complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5‑17. 3-38 Seats and Restraints

We recommend that children be The passenger sensing system is secured in a rear seat, including: WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front an infant or a child riding in a passenger frontal airbag if: rear-facing child restraint; a child injured or killed if the right front . The right front passenger seat is passenger airbag inflates and the riding in a forward-facing child seat; unoccupied. an older child riding in a booster passenger seat is in a forward seat; and children, who are large position. . The system determines that an enough, using safety belts. infant is present in a child Even if the passenger sensing restraint. A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right “Never put a rear-facing child seat front passenger frontal airbag, no . A right front passenger takes in the front.” This is because the risk system is fail-safe. No one can his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time. to the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual . Or, if there is a critical problem circumstance, even though the with the airbag system or the { WARNING airbag is turned off. passenger sensing system. A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints When the passenger sensing restraint can be seriously in a rear seat, even if the system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off injured or killed if the right airbag is off. If you secure a indicator will light and stay lit to front passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move remind you that the airbag is off. This is because the back of the See Passenger Airbag Status rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far Indicator on page 5‑17. be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a child restraint can be seriously rear seat. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-39

The passenger sensing system is body build. Everyone in the If the On Indicator is Lit for a designed to turn on (may inflate) the vehicle who has outgrown child Child Restraint right front passenger frontal airbag restraints should wear a safety belt If a child restraint has been installed anytime the system senses that a properly — whether or not there is person of adult size is sitting an airbag for that person. and the on indicator is lit: properly in the right front 1. Turn the vehicle off. passenger seat. { WARNING 2. Remove the child restraint from When the passenger sensing the vehicle. system has allowed the airbag to be If the airbag readiness light ever 3. Remove any additional items enabled, the on indicator will light comes on and stays on, it means from the seat such as blankets, and stay lit to remind you that the that something may be wrong cushions, seat covers, seat airbag is active. with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, heaters, or seat massagers. For some children, including have the vehicle serviced right 4. Reinstall the child restraint children in child restraints, and for away. See Airbag Readiness following the directions very small adults, the passenger provided by the child restraint sensing system may or may not Light on page 5‑16 for more manufacturer and refer to turn off the right front passenger information, including important Securing Child Restraints frontal airbag, depending upon safety information. (Rear Seat ) on page 3 60 or the person s seating posture and ‑ ’ Securing Child Restraints (Right Front Passenger Seat) on page 3‑62. 3-40 Seats and Restraints

5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an use the following steps to allow the restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant system to detect that person and vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, enable the right front passenger turn the vehicle off. Then slightly frontal airbag: recline the vehicle seatback 1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that 2. Remove any additional material the vehicle seatback is not from the seat, such as blankets, pushing the child restraint into cushions, seat covers, seat the seat cushion. heaters, or seat massagers. Also make sure the child 3. Place the seatback in the fully restraint is not trapped under upright position. the vehicle head restraint. If this 4. Have the person sit upright in happens, adjust the head the seat, centered on the seat restraint. See Head Restraints cushion, with legs comfortably on page 3‑2. If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended. 6. Restart the vehicle. the right front passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be 5. Restart the vehicle and have the The passenger sensing system because that person is not sitting person remain in this position for may or may not turn off the properly in the seat. If this happens, two to three minutes after the on airbag for a child in a child indicator is lit. restraint depending upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Seats and Restraints 3-41

Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the The on indicator may be lit if an System Operation performance of the passenger object, such as a briefcase, sensing system. Here is how: handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Safety belts help keep the other electronic device, is put on . The passenger sensing system passenger in position on the an unoccupied seat. If this is not seat during vehicle maneuvers may turn off the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into desired remove the object from and braking, which helps the the seat. passenger sensing system maintain the seat. If this happens, the off the passenger airbag status. indicator will be lit, and the { See “Safety Belts” and “Child airbag readiness light on the WARNING Restraints in the Index for instrument panel will also be lit. ” Stowing of articles under the additional information about the . Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the importance of proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and A thick layer of additional material, more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system will enable (turn proper operation of the passenger on) the passenger airbag while a or aftermarket equipment such as sensing system. seat covers, seat heaters, and child restraint or child occupant seat massagers can affect how is on the seat. If the passenger well the passenger sensing system airbag is turned on, the on operates. We recommend that indicator will be lit. you not use seat covers or other If the passenger seat gets wet, dry aftermarket equipment except when the seat immediately. If the airbag approved by GM for your specific readiness light is lit, do not install a vehicle. See Adding Equipment to child restraint or allow anyone to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on occupy the seat. See Airbag page 3‑42 for more information Readiness Light on page 5‑16 for about modifications that can affect important safety information. how the system operates. 3-42 Seats and Restraints

Servicing the panel, roof-rail airbag modules, WARNING (Continued) ceiling headliner or pillar garnish Airbag-Equipped Vehicle trim, overhead console, front Airbags affect how the vehicle They are probably part of the sensors, side impact sensors, should be serviced. There are parts airbag system. Be sure to follow rollover sensor module, or airbag of the airbag system in several proper service procedures, and wiring can affect the operation of places around the vehicle. Your make sure the person performing the airbag system. dealer/retailer and the service work for you is qualified to do so. In addition, the vehicle has a manual have information about passenger sensing system servicing the vehicle and the airbag Adding Equipment to the for the right front passenger system. To purchase a service Airbag-Equipped Vehicle position, which includes sensors manual, see Service Publications that are part of the passenger Ordering Information on page 13‑12. Q: Is there anything I might add seat. The passenger sensing to or change about the vehicle system may not operate properly { WARNING that could keep the airbags if the original seat trim is from working properly? replaced with non-GM covers, For up to 10 seconds after the A: Yes. If you add things that upholstery or trim, or with GM ignition is turned off and the change the vehicle's frame, covers, upholstery or trim battery is disconnected, an airbag bumper system, height, front end designed for a different vehicle. can still inflate during improper or side sheet metal, they may Any object, such as an service. You can be injured if you keep the airbag system from aftermarket seat heater or a are close to an airbag when it working properly. Changing or comfort enhancing pad or inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. moving any parts of the front device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also (Continued) seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, interfere with the operation of steering wheel, instrument the passenger sensing system. Seats and Restraints 3-43

This could either prevent proper Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check deployment of the passenger I have to get my vehicle airbag(s) or prevent the modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need passenger sensing system whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance from properly turning off the airbag system? or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. passenger airbag(s). See A: If you have questions, call Passenger Sensing System on See Airbag Readiness Light on Customer Assistance. The page 5‑16 for more information. page 3‑37. phone numbers and addresses If you have questions, call for Customer Assistance are Notice: If an airbag covering is Customer Assistance. The in Step Two of the Customer damaged, opened, or broken, the phone numbers and addresses Satisfaction Procedure in this airbag may not work properly. for Customer Assistance are manual. Do not open or break the airbag in Step Two of the Customer coverings. If there are any Satisfaction Procedure in this In addition, your dealer/retailer and opened or broken airbag covers, manual. the service manual have information have the airbag covering and/or about the location of the airbag If the vehicle has rollover airbag module replaced. For the sensors, sensing and diagnostic location of the airbag modules, roof-rail airbags, see Different module and airbag wiring. Size Tires and Wheels on see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 3 34. See your page 10‑54 for additional ‑ important information. dealer/retailer for service. 3-44 Seats and Restraints

Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints Parts After a Crash replace airbag system parts. See your dealer/retailer for service. Older Children { WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag airbag systems in your vehicle. system may not work properly. Have A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light may not work properly and on page 5 16 for more information. may not protect you and your ‑ passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure your airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown possible. booster seats should wear the vehicle's safety belts. Seats and Restraints 3-45

The manufacturer's instructions that . Does the lap belt fit low and This applies belt force to the come with the booster seat, state snug on the hips, touching the child's pelvic bones in a crash. the weight and height limitations for thighs? If yes, continue. If no, It should never be worn over the that booster. Use a booster seat return to the booster seat. abdomen, which could cause with a lap-shoulder belt until the . Can proper safety belt fit be severe or even fatal internal child passes the below fit test: maintained for the length of the injuries in a crash. . Sit all the way back on the seat. trip? If yes, continue. If no, Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Do the knees bend at the seat return to the booster seat. Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on edge? If yes, continue. If no, Q: What is the proper way to page 3‑22. return to the booster seat. wear safety belts? According to accident statistics, . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. A: An older child should wear a children and infants are safer when Does the shoulder belt rest on lap-shoulder belt and get the properly restrained in a child the shoulder? If yes, continue. additional restraint a shoulder restraint system or infant restraint If no, try using the rear safety belt can provide. The shoulder system secured in a rear seating belt comfort guide. See “Rear belt should not cross the face or position. Safety Belt Comfort Guides” neck. The lap belt should fit under Lap-Shoulder Belt on snugly below the hips, just page 3‑22 for more information. touching the top of the thighs. If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat. 3-46 Seats and Restraints

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people WARNING (Continued) who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older The child could move too far children need to use safety belts forward increasing the chance of properly. head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap { WARNING belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. Never do this. That could cause serious or fatal Never allow two children to wear injuries. The shoulder belt should the same safety belt. The safety go over the shoulder and across belt can not properly spread the { WARNING the chest. impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together Never do this. and seriously injured. A safety Never allow a child to wear the belt must be used by only one safety belt with the shoulder belt person at a time. behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-47

Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older WARNING (Continued) Children children, but not for young children Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the person's arms. An infant should need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate be secured in an appropriate restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint. state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained every Canadian province says properly can strike other people, children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle. restrained while in a vehicle. { WARNING { WARNING Never do this. Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash. allow children to play with the (Continued) safety belts. 3-48 Seats and Restraints

Q: What are the different types of { WARNING add-on child restraints? Never do this. A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle's Children who are up against, owner, are available in four basic or very close to, any airbag when types. Selection of a particular it inflates can be seriously injured restraint should take into or killed. Never put a rear-facing consideration not only the child's child restraint in the right front weight, height, and age but also seat. Secure a rear-facing child whether or not the restraint will restraint in a rear seat. It is also be compatible with the motor better to secure a forward-facing vehicle in which it will be used. child restraint in a rear seat. If you For most basic types of child must secure a forward-facing restraints, there are many child restraint in the right front different models available. When seat, always move the front purchasing a child restraint, be passenger seat as far back as it sure it is designed to be used will go. in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Seats and Restraints 3-49

The restraint manufacturer's Child Restraint Systems instructions that come with the { WARNING restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still child restraint. In addition, there so small that the vehicle's regular are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low available for children with on the hip bones, as it should. special needs. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, { WARNING the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal need complete support. This is injuries. To reduce the risk of because an infant's neck is not serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat fully developed and its head crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A) weighs so much compared with always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating the rest of its body. In a crash, child restraints. surface against the back of the an infant in a rear-facing child infant. restraint settles into the restraint, The harness system holds the infant so the crash forces can be in place and, in a crash, acts to distributed across the strongest keep the infant positioned in the part of an infant's body, the back restraint. and shoulders. Infants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints. 3-50 Seats and Restraints

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH system, following the (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a To help reduce the chance of child to see out the window. injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. Seats and Restraints 3-51

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Keep in mind that an unsecured Where to Put the Children (LATCH System) on child restraint can move around in a Restraint page 3‑53 for more information. collision or sudden stop and injure Children can be endangered in a people in the vehicle. Be sure to According to accident statistics, crash if the child restraint is not properly secure any child restraint in children and infants are safer properly secured in the vehicle. the vehicle — even when no child is when properly restrained in a child When securing an add-on child in it. restraint system or infant restraint restraint, refer to the instructions system secured in a rear seating Securing the Child Within the position. that come with the restraint which Child Restraint may be on the restraint itself or in a We recommend that children and booklet, or both, and to this manual. child restraints be secured in a rear The child restraint instructions { WARNING seat, including: an infant or a child are important, so if they are not A child can be seriously injured riding in a rear-facing child restraint; available, obtain a replacement or killed in a crash if the child a child riding in a forward-facing copy from the manufacturer. child seat; an older child riding in a is not properly secured in the booster seat; and children, who are child restraint. Secure the child large enough, using safety belts. properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint. 3-52 Seats and Restraints

A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) restraint in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing Even if the passenger sensing See Passenger Sensing System child is so great, if the airbag system has turned off the right on page 3‑37 for additional deploys. front passenger frontal airbag, no information. system is fail-safe. No one can { WARNING guarantee that an airbag will not When securing a child restraint in deploy under some unusual a rear seating position, study the A child in a rear-facing child circumstance, even though it is instructions that came with the restraint can be seriously turned off. child restraint to make sure it is injured or killed if the right compatible with this vehicle. Secure rear-facing child restraints front passenger airbag inflates. in a rear seat, even if the Wherever a child restraint is This is because the back of the installed, be sure to secure the airbag is off. If you secure a rear-facing child restraint would child restraint properly. forward-facing child restraint in be very close to the inflating the right front seat, always move Keep in mind that an unsecured airbag. A child in a forward-facing the front passenger seat as far child restraint can move around in a child restraint can be seriously back as it will go. It is better to collision or sudden stop and injure injured or killed if the right front secure the child restraint in a people in the vehicle. Be sure to passenger airbag inflates and the rear seat. properly secure any child restraint in passenger seat is in a forward the vehicle — even when no child is position. (Continued) in it. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-53

Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors a top tether, you must also use Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must restraint during driving or in a crash. never be attached using only the top This system is designed to make tether and anchor. installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a Lower anchors (A) are metal bars the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that has LATCH built into the vehicle. There are child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint two lower anchors for each with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with LATCH seating position that will Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the accommodate a child restraint with child restraint is properly installed child restraint and its attachments. lower attachments (B). using the anchors, or use the The following explains how to vehicle's safety belts to secure the attach a child restraint with these restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle. that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments. 3-54 Seats and Restraints

Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have Lower Anchor and Top Tether a single tether (A) or a dual Anchor Locations tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and A top tether (A, C) anchors the follow the instructions for your child Second Row Bucket top of the child restraint to the restraint. — i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating vehicle. A top tether anchor is built If the child restraint does not have a positions with top tether anchors. into the vehicle. The top tether top tether, one can be obtained, in attachment (B) on the child restraint kit form, for many child restraints. j (Lower Anchor): Seating connects to the top tether anchor in Ask the child restraint manufacturer positions with two lower anchors. the vehicle in order to reduce the whether or not a kit is available. forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Seats and Restraints 3-55

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each second row anchor position has a label, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

Second Row — 60/40 Bench Third Row i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. To assist you in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is located on the cover or near the anchor. 3-56 Seats and Restraints

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 3‑51 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System

{ WARNING Second Row — Bucket Shown, Third Row Seat If a LATCH-type child restraint is Bench Similar The third row has one top tether not attached to anchors, the child The top tether anchors are located anchor located at the bottom rear of restraint will not be able to protect at the bottom rear of the seatback the center seatback. This anchor the child correctly. In a crash, the for each seating position in the should be used for the center child could be seriously injured second row. Open the cover to seating position only. Never install or killed. Install a LATCH-type two top tethers using the same top access the anchors. Be sure to use child restraint properly using the tether anchor. an anchor located on the same anchors, or use the vehicle's side of the vehicle as the seating Do not secure a child restraint in a safety belts to secure the position where the child restraint will position without a top tether anchor restraint, following the instructions be placed. if a national or local law requires that came with the child restraint that the top tether be attached, or if and the instructions in this the instructions that come with the manual. child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. Seats and Restraints 3-57

restraint with the top tether and { WARNING WARNING (Continued) the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer Do not attach more than one child Pull the shoulder belt all the way instructions and the instructions restraint to a single anchor. out of the retractor to set the lock, in this manual. Attaching more than one child if your vehicle has one, after the 1.1. Find the lower anchors for restraint to a single anchor could child restraint has been installed. cause the anchor or attachment the desired seating position. to come loose or even break Notice: Do not let the LATCH during a crash. A child or others attachments rub against the 1.2. Recline the seatback to the could be injured. To reduce the vehicle’s safety belts. This may full reclined position. risk of serious or fatal injuries damage these parts. If necessary, Make sure the second row during a crash, attach only one move buckled safety belts to bench seatbacks are child restraint per anchor. avoid rubbing the LATCH aligned at the same angle attachments. before placing the child Do not fold the empty rear seat restraint on the seat. Make { WARNING with a safety belt buckled. This sure the third row bench could damage the safety belt or seatbacks are both upright Children can be seriously injured the seat. Unbuckle and return the before placing the child or strangled if a shoulder belt is safety belt to its stowed position, restraint on the seat. wrapped around their neck and before folding the seat. 1.3. Put the child restraint on the safety belt continues to 1. Attach and tighten the lower the seat. tighten. Buckle any unused safety attachments to the lower belts behind the child restraint 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower anchors. If the child restraint so children cannot reach them. attachments on the child does not have lower restraint to the lower (Continued) attachments or the desired anchors. seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child 3-58 Seats and Restraints

2. If the child restraint manufacturer 2.3. Route, attach and tighten recommends that the top tether the top tether according to be attached, attach and tighten your child restraint the top tether to the top tether instructions and the anchor, if the vehicle has one. following instructions: Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. 2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip open the cover to expose the anchor. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. Seats and Restraints 3-59

Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make If the position you are using If the position you are using sure the LATCH system is has a fixed headrest or has a fixed headrest or working properly after a crash, head restraint and you are head restraint and you are see your dealer/retailer to have using a dual tether, route using a single tether, route the system inspected and any the tether around the the tether over the headrest necessary replacements made as headrest or head restraint. or head restraint. soon as possible. 3. Push and pull the child restraint If the vehicle has the LATCH system in different directions to be sure and it was being used during a it is secure. crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash. 3-60 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have (Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be When securing a child restraint in attached. a rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have instructions that came with the the LATCH system, you will be child restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure compatible with this vehicle. the child restraint in this position. If the child restraint has the LATCH Be sure to follow the instructions system, see Lower Anchors and that came with the child restraint. Tethers for Children (LATCH Secure the child in the child restraint System) on page 3‑53 for how and when and as the instructions say. 3. Push the latch plate into the where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint buckle until it clicks. using LATCH. If a child restraint needs to be installed in the rear is secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑51. the buckle so that the safety belt see Lower Anchors and Tethers for could be quickly unbuckled if 1. Put the child restraint on Children (LATCH System) on necessary. page 3‑53 for top tether anchor the seat. locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show the instructions that come with the you how. child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. Seats and Restraints 3-61

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑53 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 5. To tighten the belt, push down unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the let it return to the stowed position. set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to If the top tether is attached to a top tighten the lap portion of the belt tether anchor, disconnect it. and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 3-62 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child { WARNING WARNING (Continued) Restraints (Right Front Passenger Seat) A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints restraint can be seriously in a rear seat, even if the The vehicle has airbags. A rear injured or killed if the right front airbag is off. If you secure a seat is a safer place to secure passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in a forward-facing child restraint. This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move See Where to Put the Restraint on rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far page 3 51. ‑ be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to In addition, the vehicle has a airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously rear seat. designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System passenger frontal airbag under passenger airbag inflates and the certain conditions. See Passenger on page 3‑37 for additional passenger seat is in a forward information. Sensing System on page 3‑37 and position. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5‑17 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing If the child restraint has the LATCH including important safety system has turned off the right system, see Lower Anchors and information. front passenger frontal airbag, Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑53 for how and A label on the sun visor says, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will where to install the child restraint “Never put a rear-facing child seat in not deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint the front.” This is because the risk is secured using a safety belt and circumstance, even though it is to the rear-facing child is so great, it uses a top tether, see Lower turned off. if the airbag deploys. Anchors and Tethers for Children (Continued) (LATCH System) on page 3‑53 for top tether anchor locations. Seats and Restraints 3-63

Do not secure a child seat in a 2. Put the child restraint on position without a top tether anchor the seat. if a national or local law requires 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run that the top tether be anchored, or if the lap and shoulder portions of the instructions that come with the the vehicle's safety belt through child restraint say that the top strap or around the restraint. The child must be anchored. restraint instructions will show In Canada, the law requires that you how. forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. You will be using the lap-shoulder 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt belt to secure the child restraint in all the way out of the retractor to this position. Follow the instructions set the lock. that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal 4. Push the latch plate into the airbag, the off indicator on buckle until it clicks. the passenger airbag status Position the release button on indicator should light and stay the buckle so that the safety belt lit when the vehicle is started. could be quickly unbuckled if See Passenger Airbag Status necessary. Indicator on page 5‑17. 3-64 Seats and Restraints

If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on page 3‑37 for more information. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and 6. To tighten the belt, push down let it return to the stowed position. on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Storage 4-1

Storage cupholders located at the rear of the Storage center console. To access, pull the Compartments handle down. Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage Armrest Storage Glove Box ...... 4-1 This vehicle has an instrument Vehicles with a rear seat armrest, Cupholders ...... 4-1 panel storage area located above have two cupholders. Pull the Armrest Storage ...... 4-1 the radio. To open the cover, press armrest down from the rear Center Console Storage ...... 4-1 the button. seatback to access the cupholders. Floor Console Storage ...... 4-2 Additional Storage Features Glove Box Center Console Storage Cargo Cover ...... 4-3 Lift the glove box handle to open it. Cargo Tie Downs ...... 4-3 Use the key to lock and unlock the Cargo Management glove box. System ...... 4-3 Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Cupholders Roof Rack System There are two cupholders, with Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 removable liners, located in front of the center console. There may be cupholders located in the second row seat armrest. To access, pull the armrest down. There are additional cupholders located on each side of the third row seat and Pull up on the lever, located on the in each door. There may be front of the center console armrest, to slide it forward and backward. 4-2 Storage

To open the armrest storage area, press the button located on the front { WARNING of the armrest. There is additional storage under the armrest. Move Never open more than one of the the armrest all the way to the rear three latches at a time to help position, slide the cover back and avoid personal injury and damage remove the tray. to the console. Floor Console Storage Notice: Slide the front console as far forward as it will go before folding the second row console forward to help prevent damage to the consoles. To access the upper storage area, press the upper button (B) and lift up. To access the lower storage area, press the lower button (C) and lift up. The top of the console can be folded forward for increased storage area. Lift up on handle on the rear of the console (A) and pull forward.

For vehicles with a second row center console, open each area to access the storage compartment inside. Storage 4-3

Additional Storage WARNING (Continued) Features always store it outside of the Cargo Cover vehicle. When it is replaced, always be sure that it is securely For vehicles with a cargo cover, it reattached. can be used to cover items in the rear of the vehicle. To install the 1. Open the cover. It remains open cover, place the loops on each when lifted. corner of the cover on the four 2. Pull the cover up making sure to hooks in the rear of the vehicle. unhook the hinges at the rear of The cover should be stored securely the cover. when not in use. To remove the cargo management cover: 3. Remove the cover from the Cargo Tie Downs vehicle and store outside of the { WARNING vehicle. Four cargo tie‐downs are located in the rear compartment of the vehicle. An improperly latched and closed Convenience Net The tie-downs can be used to cargo cover, or cargo cover left secure small loads. in the open position, could be For vehicles with a convenience thrown about the vehicle during a net in the rear, use it to store small Cargo Management collision or sudden maneuver. loads as far forward as possible. The net should not be used to store Someone could be injured. System heavy loads. Be sure to return the cover to the This vehicle has a cargo closed position and latch before management system located driving. If the cover is removed, in the rear. (Continued) 4-4 Storage

Roof Rack System For vehicles with a roof rack, the fastened. Loading cargo on the roof rack can be used to load items. rack will make the vehicle’s center For roof racks that do not have of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, { WARNING crossrails included, GM Certified sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden crossrails can be purchased as an braking or abrupt maneuvers, If something is carried on top of accessory. See your dealer/retailer otherwise it may result in loss of the vehicle that is longer or wider for additional information. control. If driving for a long distance, than the roof rack— like paneling, on rough roads, or at high speeds, plywood, or a mattress— the wind Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than occasionally stop the vehicle to can catch it while the vehicle is make sure the cargo remains in its being driven. The item being 91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may place. Do not exceed the maximum carried could be violently torn off, damage the vehicle. Load cargo vehicle capacity when loading the and this could cause a collision, so that it rests evenly between vehicle. and damage the vehicle. Never the crossrails, making sure to For more information on vehicle carry something longer or wider fasten cargo securely. capacity and loading, see Vehicle than the roof rack on top of the Load Limits on page 9‑12. vehicle unless using a GM To prevent damage or loss of cargo Certified accessory carrier. when driving, check to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely Instruments and Controls 5-1

Voltmeter Gauge ...... 5-15 Vehicle Messages Instruments and Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-16 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-31 Controls Airbag Readiness Light ...... 5-16 Battery Voltage and Charging Passenger Airbag Status Messages ...... 5-31 Indicator ...... 5-17 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32 Controls Charging System Light ...... 5-18 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-32 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Malfunction Door Ajar Messages ...... 5-32 Steering Wheel Controls ...... 5-3 Indicator Lamp ...... 5-19 Engine Cooling System Horn ...... 5-5 Brake System Warning Messages ...... 5-33 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5 Light ...... 5-21 Engine Oil Messages ...... 5-34 Rear Window Wiper/ Antilock Brake System (ABS) Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-34 Washer ...... 5-6 Warning Light ...... 5-22 Fuel System Messages ...... 5-34 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-22 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-35 Compass ...... 5-7 ® Clock ...... 5-9 StabiliTrak Indicator Light . . . 5-23 Lamp Messages ...... 5-35 Power Outlets ...... 5-10 Engine Coolant Temperature Object Detection System Warning Light ...... 5-23 Messages ...... 5-36 Warning Lights, Gages, and Tire Pressure Light ...... 5-23 Ride Control System Indicators Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-24 Messages ...... 5-36 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Security Light ...... 5-24 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-36 Indicators ...... 5-12 High-Beam on Light ...... 5-24 Anti-Theft Alarm System Instrument Cluster ...... 5-13 Fog Lamp Light ...... 5-25 Messages ...... 5-37 Speedometer ...... 5-14 Cruise Control Light ...... 5-25 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-37 Tire Messages ...... 5-37 Odometer ...... 5-14 Information Displays Tachometer ...... 5-14 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-38 Fuel Gauge ...... 5-14 Driver Information Vehicle Reminder Engine Coolant Temperature Center (DIC) ...... 5-25 Messages ...... 5-39 Gauge ...... 5-15 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-39 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-39 5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Personalization Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel Vehicle Personalization ...... 5-40 while driving. Universal Remote System Steering Wheel Power Tilt Wheel Universal Remote System . . . 5-47 Adjustment Universal Remote System Programming ...... 5-47 The steering wheel can be adjusted. Universal Remote System The adjustment lever is on the Operation ...... 5-51 outboard side of the steering column.

For vehicles with the power tilt and telescope wheel, the control is on the outboard side of the steering column. Push the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down. Pull the lever down to move the steering wheel up or down and in or out. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. Instruments and Controls 5-3

Push the control forward or w / x (Next / Previous): Press 2. Press and release w or x to rearward to move the steering wheel to select preset or favorite radio scroll up or down the list, then toward the front or rear of the stations, select tracks on a CD/ press and hold , or press vehicle. To set the memory position, w ¨ DVD, or to select tracks and to play the highlighted track. see Vehicle Personalization on navigate folders on an iPod® or page 5‑40. USB device. To select tracks on an iPod or USB device for vehicles with a navigation To select preset or favorite radio system: Steering Wheel Controls stations: 1. Press and hold or while . w x Press and release w or x to go listening to a song listed in the to the next or previous radio main audio page, to quickly station stored as a preset or move forward or in reverse favorite. through the tracks. See the To select tracks on a CD/DVD: separate Navigation System manual for more information. Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous track. Track information is displayed on the screen. Release w or x To select tracks on an iPod or USB when the desired track is device for vehicles without a reached. navigation system: 2. Press and release to begin Vehicles with audio steering wheel 1. Press and hold w or x while x playing the track shown in the controls could differ depending on listening to a song until the display. the vehicle's options. Some audio contents of the current folder controls can be adjusted at the display on the radio display. steering wheel. 5-4 Instruments and Controls

To navigate folders on an iPod or To navigate folders on an iPod or b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to USB device for vehicles without a USB device for vehicles with a silence the vehicle speakers only. navigation system: navigation system: Press again to turn the sound on. 1. Press and hold w or x while 1. Go to the Music Navigator by For vehicles with Bluetooth or listening to a song until the first touching the center touch OnStar® systems, press and hold contents of the current folder screen folder button in the main for longer than two seconds to display on the radio display. audio page. interact with those systems. See 2. While in Music Navigator, select Bluetooth on page 7‑46 and the 2. Press and hold to go back to x the folder/artist/genre/category, OnStar Owner's Guide for more the previous folder list. etc. using the touch screen. information. 3. Press and release w or x to 3. Press and release x to scroll c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a current call. scroll up or down the list. through the selected music list. . To select a folder, press Touch the track label on the and hold w , or press ¨ touch screen to highlight and when the folder is begin playing the track from highlighted. that list. . To go back further in the 4. Press and hold x to quickly folder list, press and scroll through the selected hold x . music list Instruments and Controls 5-5

SRCE (Source/Voice For vehicles with a navigation Windshield Wiper/Washer Recognition): Press to switch system: between the radio, CD, and for The windshield wiper/washer lever vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is located on the left side of the and rear auxiliary. is heard, to place the radio into steering column. SCAN mode, a station will play For vehicles with the navigation Turn the band with the wiper symbol for five seconds before moving to control the windshield wipers. system, press and hold this button to the next station. for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice 2. To stop the SCAN function, Recognition” in the Navigation press ¨ again. System manual for more 3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB, information. press and hold to quickly move ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the forward through the tracks. next radio station while in AM, Release to stop on the desired FM, or XM™. track. For vehicles with or without a + e − e (Volume): Press to navigation system: increase or to decrease the volume. Press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or Horn 8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn the DVD slot. Press near the horn symbols or band to 8 and then release. Press ¨ to select a track or a press on the steering wheel pad to Several wipes, hold the band sound the horn. folder when navigating folders on an on 8 longer. iPod or USB device. 9 (Off): Turns the wipers off. 5-6 Instruments and Controls

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): The ignition key must be in ACC/ Rear Window Wiper/ Turn the band up for more frequent ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for Washer wipes or down for less frequent this to work. See Washer Fluid on wipes. page 10‑20 Windshield Washer The rear wiper and rear wash button Fluid. is located on the instrument panel 1 : Slow wipes. below the climate control system. 2 : Fast wipes. { WARNING Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the Clear ice and snow from the wiper rear wiper on and off. The wiper blades before using them. If frozen In freezing weather, do not use speed cannot be changed. your washer until the windshield to the windshield, carefully loosen or Y is warmed. Otherwise the washer (Wash): Press to spray thaw them. Damaged wiper blades washer fluid on the rear window. should be replaced. See Wiper fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. The window wiper will also come Blade Replacement on page 10‑26. on. Release the button when Heavy snow or ice can overload the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID enough fluid has been sprayed wipers. A circuit breaker stops them is displayed on the Driver on the window. The rear wiper will until the motor cools. Information Center (DIC) when the run a few more cycles after it is released. If the rear wiper function Windshield Washer washer fluid is low. See Washer Fluid Messages on page 5‑39. was already on, prior to pressing the J (Washer Fluid): Press the wash button, it stays on until the button at the end of the turn signal/ wiper button is pressed again. lane change lever, to spray washer The rear window washer uses the fluid on the windshield. The wipers same fluid that is in the windshield clear the windshield and either washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid stop or return to the preset speed. on page 10‑20. Instruments and Controls 5-7

Compass Compass variance is the difference between the earth's magnetic north Your vehicle may have a compass and true geographic north. If the in the Driver Information Center compass is not set to the zone (DIC). See Driver Information where you live, the compass may Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 for give false readings. The compass more information about the DIC. must be set to the variance zone in Compass Zone which the vehicle is traveling. The zone is set to zone eight upon To adjust for compass variance, use leaving the factory. Your dealer/ the following procedure: retailer will set the correct zone for Compass Variance (Zone) your location. Procedure 2. Find the vehicle's current Under certain circumstances, 1. Do not set the compass zone location and variance zone such as during a long distance when the vehicle is moving. number on the map. cross-country trip or moving to a Only set it when the vehicle is Zones 1 through 15 are new state or province, it will be in P (Park). necessary to compensate for available. compass variance by resetting the Press the vehicle information 3. Press the set/reset button to zone through the DIC if the zone is button until PRESS V TO scroll through and select the not set correctly. CHANGE COMPASS ZONE appropriate variance zone. displays. 5-8 Instruments and Controls

4. Press the trip/fuel button after making turns, there may be a 2. Press the vehicle information until the vehicle heading, strong magnetic field interfering with button until PRESS V TO for example, N for North, the compass. Such interference CALIBRATE COMPASS is displayed in the DIC. may be caused by a magnetic CB displays. or cell phone antenna mount, a 5. If calibration is necessary, 3. Press the set/reset button to calibrate the compass. magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder, or any other start the compass calibration. See “Compass Calibration magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, Procedure” following. 4. The DIC will display move the magnetic item, then turn CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN Compass Calibration on the vehicle and calibrate the CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle The compass can be manually compass. in tight circles at less than calibrated. Only calibrate the To calibrate the compass, use the 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the compass in a magnetically clean following procedure: calibration. The DIC will display and safe location, such as an open CALIBRATION COMPLETE parking lot, where driving the Compass Calibration Procedure for a few seconds when the vehicle in circles is not a danger. 1. Before calibrating the compass, calibration is complete. The DIC It is suggested to calibrate away make sure the compass zone display will then return to the from tall buildings, utility wires, is set to the variance zone in previous menu. manhole covers, or other industrial which the vehicle is located. structures, if possible. See “Compass Variance (Zone) If CAL should ever appear in the Procedure” earlier in this DIC display, the compass should be section. calibrated. Do not operate any switches If the DIC display does not show a such as window, sunroof, heading, for example, N for North, climate controls, seats, etc. or the heading does not change during the calibration procedure. Instruments and Controls 5-9

Clock Enabling/Disabling the Digital . If the radio clock display is Radio Clock turned off, the screen The vehicle has an analog clock displays Radio Clock OFF and a digital radio clock. The digital To enable or disable the radio clock for 10 seconds. The menus radio clock can be enabled or display: for clock and date settings disabled. are removed, and ON 1. Press H until the clock and date displays as a current status Setting the Analog Clock setting menus appear. indicating that the clock The analog clock is located on the 2. Press the pushbutton located display can be turned on. instrument panel above the radio. under the forward arrow label If the radio clock and analog clock The clock is not connected with any until the menu for default clock are not synchronized. Use the other vehicle system and runs by and date settings appear. procedure below to synchronize itself. To adjust the time: 3. Press the pushbutton located both clocks. 1. Push and hold the button under the currently displayed located directly above the clock status of either ON or OFF to Setting the Digital Radio Clock to advance the clock hands. toggle the radio clock display on Adjusting the Time and Date Holding the button down causes or off. The ON display indicates the clock to advance faster. the radio clock display is 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ disabled and the OFF display ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then 2. Push and release the button to indicates the radio clock display press O , to turn the radio on. increase the time by one minute is enabled. increments. 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, . If the radio clock display is MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, turned on, the screen month, day, and year). displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then returns to the original clock display menu. 5-10 Instruments and Controls

3. Press the pushbutton located Changing the Time and Date Power Outlets under any one of the labels to Display Setting be changed. The vehicle has three 12‐volt outlets To change the time default setting which can be used to plug in 4. To increase the time or date, do from 12 hour to 24 hour or to electrical equipment, such as a one of the following: change the date default display cellular telephone, a compact disc setting from month/day/year to day/ . Press the pushbutton below player, etc. month/year: the selected label. The power outlets are located on 1. Press G and then the . Press ¨ SEEK. the instrument panel below the pushbutton located under the climate controls, at the rear of the . Press \ FWD. forward arrow that displays on center console, and in the rear the radio screen until the time cargo area. Lift the cover to access . Turn f clockwise. 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the outlet. Close the cover when not 5. To decrease the time or date, do the date MM/DD (month and using the outlet. one of the following: day) and DD/MM (day and Notice: Leaving electrical month) displays. equipment plugged in for an . Press SEEK. © 2. Press the pushbutton located extended period of time while . Press s REV. under the desired option. the vehicle is off will drain the G battery. Power is always supplied . Turn f counter‐clockwise. 3. Press again to apply the to the outlets. Always unplug selected default, or let the electrical equipment when not in screen time out. use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating. Instruments and Controls 5-11

Certain accessory plugs may not be When adding electrical equipment, compatible to the accessory power be sure to follow the proper outlet and could result in blown installation instructions included vehicle and adapter fuses. with the equipment. If a problem is experienced, see Notice: Improper use of the your dealer/retailer for additional power outlet can cause damage information on the power accessory not covered by the vehicle outlets. warranty. Do not hang any type Notice: Adding any electrical of accessory or accessory equipment to the vehicle can bracket from the plug because damage it or keep other the power outlets are designed components from working as for accessory power plugs only. they should. The repairs would The power outlet is located on the not be covered by the vehicle Power Outlet 120 Volt rear of the center console. Alternative Current warranty. Do not use equipment An indicator light on the outlet turns exceeding maximum amperage The vehicle may have a power on to show it is in use. The light rating of 20 amperes. Check with outlet that can be used to plug in comes on when the ignition is in your dealer/retailer before adding electrical equipment that uses a ON/RUN and equipment requiring electrical equipment. maximum limit of 150 watts. less than 150 watts is plugged into the outlet, and no system fault is detected. The indicator light does not come on when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or if no equipment is plugged into the outlet. 5-12 Instruments and Controls

If equipment is connected using The power outlet is not designed for Warning Lights, more than 150 watts or a system the following electrical equipment fault is detected, a protection circuit and may not work properly if these Gages, and Indicators shuts off the power supply and the items are plugged into the power indicator light turns off. To reset the outlet: Warning Lights, Gauges, circuit, unplug the item and plug . Equipment with high initial peak and Indicators it back in or turn the Remote wattage such as: Accessory Power (RAP) off and compressor-driven refrigerators Warning lights come on when there then back on. See Retained and electric power tools. could be a problem with a vehicle Accessory Power (RAP) on function. Some warning lights come page 9‑19. The power restarts . Other equipment requiring on briefly when the engine is started when equipment using 150 watts or an extremely stable to indicate they are working. power supply such as: less is plugged into the outlet and a Gages can indicate when there system fault is not detected. microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch could be a problem with a vehicle sensor lamps, etc. function. Often gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a See High Voltage Devices and problem with the vehicle. Wiring on page 10‑30. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous. Instruments and Controls 5-13

Instrument Cluster

United States version shown, Canada similar 5-14 Instruments and Controls

Speedometer be damaged, and the damages When the fuel tank is low on fuel, would not be covered by the the FUEL LEVEL LOW message The speedometer shows the vehicle warranty. Do not operate appears on the Driver Information vehicle's speed in both kilometers the engine with the tachometer in Center (DIC). For more information per hour (km/h) and miles the shaded warning area. see Fuel System Messages on per hour (mph). page 5‑34. Fuel Gauge Odometer Here are some situations that can occur with the fuel gauge. None of The odometer shows how far the these indicate a problem with the vehicle has been driven, in either fuel gauge. kilometers or miles. . At the gas station, the fuel pump This vehicle has a tamper-resistant shuts off before the gauge odometer. If the vehicle needs a United States Canada reads full. new odometer installed, the new . It takes a little more or less fuel one is set to the mileage of the old When the ignition is on, the fuel to fill up than the fuel gauge odometer. If this is not possible, it is gauge shows about how much fuel indicated. For example, the set at zero and a label is put on the the vehicle has left in the fuel tank. gauge may have indicated the driver's door to show the old tank was half full, but it actually mileage reading. An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle the took a little more or less than fuel door is on. half the tank's capacity to fill Tachometer the tank. The gauge will first indicate empty The tachometer displays the before the vehicle is out of fuel, but . The gauge goes back to empty engine speed in revolutions the vehicle's fuel tank should be when the ignition is turned off. per minute (rpm). filled soon. Notice: If the engine is operated with the tachometer in the shaded warning area, the vehicle could Instruments and Controls 5-15

Engine Coolant Voltmeter Gauge Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of Temperature Gauge electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period. If there is a problem with the battery charging system, a SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM United States Canada When the engine is not running, but message appears in the Driver the ignition is on, this gauge shows Information Center (DIC) and/or the This gauge shows the engine the battery's state of charge in charging system light comes on. coolant temperature. Under normal DC volts. See Battery Voltage and Charging driving conditions the gauge will When the engine is running, this Messages on page 5‑31 for more read 210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gauge shows the condition of the information. gauge pointer is near 260°F charging system. The vehicle's However, readings in either warning (125 °C), the engine is too hot. charging system regulates voltage zone can indicate a possible It means that the engine coolant has based on the state of charge of the problem in the electrical system. overheated. If the vehicle has been battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate. Have the vehicle serviced as soon operating under normal driving This is normal. Readings between as possible. conditions, pull off the road, stop the the low and high warning zones vehicle and turn off the engine as indicate the normal operating range. soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 10‑17 for more information. 5-16 Instruments and Controls

Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt as a briefcase, handbag, grocery Reminder Light bag, laptop or other electronic Driver Safety Belt Reminder device. To turn off the warning light Light and or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the The driver safety belt reminder light safety belt. on the instrument panel cluster. Airbag Readiness Light This light shows if there is an When the engine is started this light electrical problem. The system and the chime come on and stay on check includes the airbag sensor, for several seconds to remind the the pretensioners, the airbag passenger to fasten their safety belt. modules, the wiring and the crash When the engine is started this light The light also begins to flash. sensing and diagnostic module. and the chime come on and stay on This only occurs if the passenger For more information on the airbag for several seconds to remind the airbag is enabled. See Passenger system, see Airbag System on driver to fasten the safety belt. Sensing System on page 3‑37 for page 3‑29. The light also begins to flash. more information. This cycle repeats if the driver This cycle repeats if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle remains unbuckled and the vehicle is moving. is moving. If the driver safety belt is already If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the light nor chime buckled, neither the chime nor the comes on. light comes on. This light will come on and stay The front passenger safety belt on for several seconds when the warning light and chime may turn on vehicle is started. Then the light if an object is put on the seat such should go out. Instruments and Controls 5-17

If the airbag readiness light stays on Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the after the vehicle has been started passenger airbag status indicator or comes on when while driving, Indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol the airbag system may not work The vehicle has a passenger for on and off, for several seconds properly. Have the vehicle serviced sensing system. See Passenger as a system check. If you are using right away. Sensing System on page 3‑37 remote start to start the vehicle from for important safety information. a distance, if equipped, you may not { WARNING The instrument panel has a see the system check. Then, after passenger airbag status indicator. several more seconds, the status If the airbag readiness light stays indicator will light either ON or OFF, on after the vehicle is started or or either the on or off symbol to let comes on while driving, it means you know the status of the right front the airbag system might not be passenger frontal airbag. working properly. The airbags in If the word ON or the on symbol is the vehicle might not inflate in a lit on the passenger airbag status crash, or they could even inflate United States indicator, it means that the right without a crash. To help avoid front passenger frontal airbag is injury, have the vehicle serviced enabled (may inflate). right away. If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger Canada frontal airbag. 5-18 Instruments and Controls

If, after several seconds, both status Charging System Light When this light comes on, the Driver indicator lights remain on, or if there Information Center (DIC) also are no lights at all, there may be a displays the SERVICE BATTERY problem with the lights or the CHARGING SYSTEM message. passenger sensing system. See See Vehicle Messages on your dealer/retailer for service. page 5‑31 for more information. { WARNING If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn off The charging system light comes on all accessories, such as the radio If the airbag readiness light ever briefly when the ignition is turned and air conditioner. comes on and stays on, it means on, but the engine is not running, as that something may be wrong a check to show the light is working. with the airbag system. To help It should go out when the engine is avoid injury to yourself or others, started. have the vehicle serviced right If the light stays on, or comes on away. See Airbag Readiness while driving, there may be a Light on page 5‑16 for more problem with the electrical charging information, including important system. Have it checked by your safety information. dealer/retailer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery. Instruments and Controls 5-19

Malfunction If the check engine light comes on Notice: Modifications made to the and stays on, while the engine is engine, transmission, exhaust, Indicator Lamp running, this indicates that there is intake, or fuel system of the A computer system called OBD II an OBD II problem and service is vehicle or the replacement of the (On-Board Diagnostics-Second required. original tires with other than Generation) monitors operation of Malfunctions often are indicated by those of the same Tire the fuel, ignition, and emission the system before any problem is Performance Criteria (TPC) can control systems. It ensures that apparent. Being aware of the light affect the vehicle's emission emissions are at acceptable levels can prevent more serious damage controls and can cause this light for the life of the vehicle, helping to to the vehicle. This system assists to come on. Modifications to produce a cleaner environment. the service technician in correctly these systems could lead to diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could Notice: If the vehicle is also result in a failure to pass a continually driven with this light required Emission Inspection/ on, after a while, the emission Maintenance test. See controls might not work as well, Accessories and Modifications on the vehicle's fuel economy might page 10‑3. This light comes on when the not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This This light comes on during a ignition is on, but the engine is not malfunction in one of two ways: running, as a check to show it is could lead to costly repairs that working. If it does not, have the might not be covered by the Light Flashing: A misfire condition vehicle serviced by your dealer/ vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire retailer. increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. 5-20 Instruments and Controls

The following can prevent more An emission system malfunction . Make sure to fuel the vehicle serious damage to the vehicle: might be corrected. with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as . Reduce vehicle speed. . Make sure the fuel cap is fully efficiently as designed and may installed. See Filling the Tank on . Avoid hard accelerations. cause: stalling after start-up, page 9‑45. The diagnostic stalling when the vehicle is . Avoid steep uphill grades. system can determine if the changed into gear, misfiring, . If towing a trailer, reduce the fuel cap has been left off or hesitation on acceleration, amount of cargo being hauled as improperly installed. A loose or or stumbling on acceleration. soon as it is possible. missing fuel cap allows fuel to These conditions might go away evaporate into the atmosphere. once the engine is warmed up. If the light continues to flash, when A few driving trips with the cap it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. properly installed should turn the If one or more of these Find a safe place to park the light off. conditions occurs, change the vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at fuel brand used. It will require at least 10 seconds, and restart the . If the vehicle has been driven least one full tank of the proper engine. If the light is still flashing, through a deep puddle of water, fuel to turn the light off. follow the previous steps and see the vehicle's electrical system See Recommended Fuel on your dealer/retailer for service as might be wet. The condition is page 9 42. soon as possible. usually corrected when the ‑ electrical system dries out. If none of the above have made Light On Steady: An emission A few driving trips should turn the light turn off, your dealer/retailer control system malfunction has the light off. can check the vehicle. The dealer/ been detected on the vehicle. retailer has the proper test Diagnosis and service might be equipment and diagnostic tools to required. fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed. Instruments and Controls 5-21

Emissions Inspection and . The vehicle will not pass this Brake System Warning Maintenance Programs inspection if the OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system Light Some state/provincial and local determines that critical emission This vehicle's hydraulic brake governments have or might begin control systems have not been system is divided into two parts. programs to inspect the emission completely diagnosed by the If one part is not working, the other control equipment on the vehicle. system. The vehicle would be part can still work and stop the Failure to pass this inspection considered not ready for vehicle. For good braking both could prevent getting a vehicle inspection. This can happen if parts need to be working. registration. the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run If the warning light comes on, there Here are some things to know to is a brake problem. Have the brake help the vehicle pass an inspection: down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical system inspected right away. . The vehicle will not pass this emission control systems during inspection if the check engine normal driving. This can take light is on with the engine several days of routine driving. running, or if the key is in ON/ If this has been done and the RUN and the light is not on. vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness, your dealer/ United States Canada retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection. This light should come on briefly when the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. This light may also come on due to low brake fluid. See Brakes on page 10‑21 for more information. 5-22 Instruments and Controls

When the ignition is on, the brake Then start the engine again to reset system warning light will also come WARNING (Continued) the system. If the light still stays on, on when the parking brake is set. or comes on again while driving, the The light will stay on if the parking the vehicle has been pulled off vehicle needs service. If the regular brake does not release fully. If it the road and carefully stopped, brake system warning light is not stays on after the parking brake is have the vehicle towed for on, there are still brakes, but no fully released, it means there is a service. antilock brakes. If the regular brake brake problem. system warning light is also on, If the light comes on while driving, Antilock Brake System there are no antilock brakes and pull off the road and stop carefully. (ABS) Warning Light there is a problem with the regular Make sure the parking brake is fully brakes. See Brake System Warning released. The pedal may be harder Light on page 5‑21. to push or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to Tow/Haul Mode Light stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑84. United States Canada

{ WARNING The ABS warning light comes on briefly when the ignition key is The brake system might not be turned to ON/RUN. This is normal. working properly if the brake If the light does not come on then, This light comes on when the Tow/ system warning light is on. have it fixed so it will be ready to Haul mode has been activated. warn you if there is a problem. Driving with the brake system For more information, see Tow/Haul warning light on can lead to a If the light stays on, turn the ignition Mode on page 9‑27. crash. If the light is still on after to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes on (Continued) while driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Instruments and Controls 5-23

StabiliTrak® Indicator Engine Coolant Tire Pressure Light Light Temperature Warning Light

For vehicles with a tire pressure This light comes on briefly while monitoring system, this light comes on briefly when the engine is starting the engine. If it does not, The engine coolant temperature have the vehicle serviced by your started. It provides information warning light comes on briefly when about tire pressures and the Tire dealer/retailer. If the system is the engine is started. working normally the indicator light Pressure Monitoring System. If it does not, have the vehicle goes off. When the Light is On Steady serviced by your dealer/retailer. If it stays on, or comes on while If the system is working normally the This indicates that one or more driving, there could be a problem indicator light then goes off. of the tires are significantly with the StabiliTrak system and the underinflated. vehicle might need service. When If the light comes on and stays on this warning light is on, the system while driving, the vehicle may have A tire pressure message in the is off and will not limit wheel spin. a problem with the cooling system. Driver Information Center (DIC), Stop the vehicle and turn off the can accompany the light. See Tire This light flashes when the engine to avoid damage to the Messages on page 5‑37 for more StabiliTrak system is active. engine. A warning chime sounds information. Stop as soon as See StabiliTrak System on when this light is on. possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the tire page 9‑30 for more information. See Engine Overheating on page 10‑17 for more information. 5-24 Instruments and Controls loading information label. See Tire Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Security Light Pressure on page 10‑44 for more maintenance can damage the information. engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. When the Light Flashes First and Always follow the maintenance Then is On Steady schedule in this manual for This indicates that there may be a changing engine oil. problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes This light flashes when the security for about a minute and stays on system is activated. steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle. This sequence For more information, see Anti-Theft repeats with every ignition cycle. Alarm System on page 2‑12. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10‑46 for more The oil pressure light should come High-Beam on Light information. on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on have the Engine Oil Pressure Light vehicle serviced by your dealer/ retailer. { WARNING If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through Do not keep driving if the oil the engine properly. The vehicle pressure is low. The engine can could be low on oil and might have The high-beam on light comes on become so hot that it catches fire. some other system problem. when the high-beam headlamps are Someone could be burned. Check in use. the oil as soon as possible and See Headlamp High/Low-Beam have the vehicle serviced. Changer on page 6‑2 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-25

Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). The DIC displays information The fog lamp light comes on when This light comes on whenever the about your vehicle. It also displays the fog lamps are in use. cruise control is set. warning messages if a system The light goes out when the fog The light goes out when the cruise problem is detected. lamps are turned off. See Fog control is turned off. See Cruise All messages will appear in the DIC Lamps on page 6 5 for more Control on page 9 32 for more ‑ ‑ display located at the top of the information. information. instrument panel cluster. The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. The DIC also displays a shift lever position indicator on the bottom line of the display. See Automatic Transmission on page 9‑24 for more information. 5-26 Instruments and Controls

The outside air temperature and DIC Buttons Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) compass, if equipped, also display transmitter programming, and on the DIC when viewing the trip compass calibration and zone and fuel information. The outside air setting on vehicles with this feature. temperature automatically appears 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button in the top right corner of the DIC to display the odometer, trip display. If there is a problem with odometers, fuel range, average the system that controls the economy, timer, fuel used, and temperature display, the numbers The buttons are the set/reset, average speed. will be replaced with dashes. If this customization, vehicle information, occurs, have the vehicle serviced. and trip/fuel buttons. The button Vehicle Information Menu The compass will be shown in the functions are detailed in the Items bottom right corner of the DIC following pages. T display. See Compass on (Vehicle Information): Press V (Set/Reset): Press this button to this button to scroll through the page 5‑7 for more information. set or reset certain functions and to following menu items: The DIC has different displays turn off or acknowledge messages which can be accessed by pressing on the DIC. OIL LIFE the DIC buttons located on the U (Customization): Press this Press the vehicle information instrument panel. button to customize the feature button until OIL LIFE REMAINING The DIC displays trip, fuel, and settings on your vehicle. See displays. This display shows an vehicle system information, and Vehicle Personalization on estimate of the oil's remaining warning messages if a system page 5‑40 for more information. useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE problem is detected. REMAINING on the display, that T (Vehicle Information): Press means 99% of the current oil life The DIC also allows some features this button to display the oil life, remains. The engine oil life system to be customized. See Vehicle park assist on vehicles with this will alert you to change the oil on Personalization on page 5‑40 for feature, units, tire pressure readings a schedule consistent with your more information. on vehicles with this feature, driving conditions. Instruments and Controls 5-27

When the remaining oil life is low, PARK ASSIST UNITS the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Press the vehicle information button message will appear on the display. Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, until UNITS displays. This display See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” press the vehicle information button allows you to select between under Engine Oil Messages on until PARK ASSIST displays. This English or Metric units of page 5‑34. You should change the display allows the system to be measurement. Once in this display, oil as soon as you can. See Engine turned on or off. Once in this press the set/reset button to select Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the display, press the set/reset button to between ENGLISH or METRIC engine oil life system monitoring the select between ON or OFF. If you units. All of the vehicle information oil life, additional maintenance is choose ON, the system will be will then be displayed in the unit of recommended in the Maintenance turned on. If you choose OFF, the measurement selected. Schedule in this manual. See system will be turned off. The URPA Scheduled Maintenance on system automatically turns back on FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES page 11‑2 for more information. after each vehicle start. When the On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Remember, you must reset the OIL URPA system is turned off and the Monitor System (TPMS), the LIFE display yourself after each oil vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the pressure for each tire can be viewed change. It will not reset itself. Also, DIC will display the PARK ASSIST in the DIC. The tire pressure will be be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE OFF message as a reminder that shown in either pounds per square display accidentally at any time the system has been turned off. See inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). other than when the oil has just Object Detection System Messages Press the vehicle information button been changed. It cannot be reset on page 5‑36 and Ultrasonic until the DIC displays FRONT accurately until the next oil change. Parking Assist on page 9‑35 for TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## To reset the engine oil life system, more information. RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle see Engine Oil Life System on information button again until the page 10‑10. DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. 5-28 Instruments and Controls

If a low tire pressure condition is 2. Press the set/reset button until COMPASS ZONE SETTING detected by the system while REMOTE KEY LEARNING This display will be available driving, a message advising you ACTIVE is displayed. if the vehicle has a compass. add air to a specific tire will appear 3. Press and hold the lock and See Compass on page 5‑7 in the display. See Tire Pressure on unlock buttons on the first for more information. page 10‑44 and Tire Messages on transmitter at the same time for page 5‑37 for more information. about 15 seconds. COMPASS RECALIBRATION If the tire pressure display shows On vehicles with memory recall This display will be available dashes instead of a value, there seats, the first transmitter if the vehicle has a compass. may be a problem with your vehicle. learned will match driver 1 and See Compass on page 5‑7 If this consistently occurs, see your the second will match driver 2. for more information. dealer/retailer for service. A chime will sound indicating Blank Display RELEARN REMOTE KEY that the transmitter is matched. This display shows no information. This display allows you to match 4. To match additional transmitters Trip/Fuel Menu Items Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) at this time, repeat Step 3. transmitters to your vehicle. This 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button procedure will erase all previously Each vehicle can have a to scroll through the following menu learned transmitters. Therefore, they maximum of eight transmitters items: must be relearned as additional matched to it. ODOMETER transmitters. 5. To exit the programming mode, To match an RKE transmitter to your you must cycle the key to Press the trip/fuel button until vehicle: LOCK/OFF. ODOMETER displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has 1. Press the vehicle information been driven in either miles (mi) or button until PRESS V TO kilometers (km). RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays. Instruments and Controls 5-29

To switch between English and To use the retroactive reset feature, RANGE metric measurements, see “UNITS” press and hold the set/reset button Press the trip/fuel button until earlier in this section. for at least four seconds. The trip RANGE displays. This display odometer will display the number of TRIPA and TRIP B shows the approximate number miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven of remaining miles (mi) or Press the trip/fuel button until since the ignition was last turned on kilometers (km) the vehicle can TRIPA or TRIP B displays. This and the vehicle was moving. Once be driven without refueling. The display shows the current distance the vehicle begins moving, the trip display will show LOW if the fuel traveled in either miles (mi) or odometer will accumulate mileage. level is low. kilometers (km) since the last reset For example, if the vehicle was for each trip odometer. Both trip driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is The fuel range estimate is based on odometers can be used at the started again, and then the an average of the vehicle's fuel same time. retroactive reset feature is activated, economy over recent driving history the display will show 5 miles (8 km). and the amount of fuel remaining in Each trip odometer can be reset to the fuel tank. This estimate will zero separately by pressing the set/ As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then increase to change if driving conditions change. reset button while the desired trip For example, if driving in traffic and odometer is displayed. 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. making frequent stops, this display The trip odometer has a feature may read one number, but if the called retroactive reset. This can be If the retroactive reset feature is vehicle is driven on a freeway, the used to set the trip odometer to the activated after the vehicle is started, number may change even though number of miles (kilometers) driven but before it begins moving, the the same amount of fuel is in the since the ignition was last turned display will show the number of fuel tank. This is because different on. This can be used if the trip miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that driving conditions produce different odometer is not reset at the were driven during the last ignition fuel economies. Generally, freeway beginning of the trip. cycle. driving produces better fuel economy than city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset. 5-30 Instruments and Controls

AVG (Average) ECONOMY Time will continue to be counted as AVG (Average) SPEED Press the trip/fuel button until AVG long as the ignition is on, even if Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays. This display another display is being shown SPEED displays. This display shows the approximate average on the DIC. The timer will record shows the average speed of the miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which kilometers per hour (km/h). This number is calculated based on the display will return to zero. average is calculated based on the the number of mpg (L/100 km) To stop the timer, press the set/reset various vehicle speeds recorded recorded since the last time this button briefly while TIMER is since the last reset of this value. menu item was reset. To reset AVG displayed. To reset the value to zero, press ECONOMY, press and hold the set/ To reset the timer to zero, press and and hold the set/reset button. reset button. hold the set/reset button while Blank Display TIMER is displayed. TIMER This display shows no information. Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED TIMER displays. This display Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL can be used as a timer. USED displays. This display shows To start the timer, press the set/ the number of gallons (gal) or reset button while TIMER is liters (L) of fuel used since the last displayed. The display will show the reset of this menu item. To reset the amount of time that has passed fuel used information, press and since the timer was last reset, not hold the set/reset button while FUEL including time the ignition is off. USED is displayed. Instruments and Controls 5-31

Vehicle Messages The following are the possible SERVICE BATTERY messages that can be displayed CHARGING SYSTEM Messages are displayed on the DIC and some information about them. to notify the driver that the status of On some vehicles, this message the vehicle has changed and that Battery Voltage and displays if there is a problem with some action may be needed by the the battery charging system. Under driver to correct the condition. Charging Messages certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in Multiple messages may appear BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE one after another. the instrument panel cluster. This message displays when the See Charging System Light on Some messages may not require system detects that the battery page 5‑18. Driving with this immediate action, but you can press voltage is dropping below expected problem could drain the battery. any of the DIC buttons on the levels. The battery saver system Turn off all unnecessary instrument panel to acknowledge starts reducing certain features of accessories. Have the electrical that you received the messages and the vehicle that you may be able to system checked as soon as to clear them from the display. notice. At the point that the features possible. See your dealer/retailer. Some messages cannot be cleared are disabled, this message is from the DIC display because they displayed. It means that the vehicle are more urgent. These messages is trying to save the charge in the require action before they can be battery. cleared. You should take any Turn off all unnecessary messages that appear on the accessories to allow the battery to display seriously and remember recharge. that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear, The normal battery voltage range is not correct the problem. 11.5 to 15.5 volts. 5-32 Instruments and Controls

Brake System Messages Door Ajar Messages shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM DRIVER DOOR OPEN obstructions, and close the door This message displays along with This message displays and a chime again. Check to see if the message the brake system warning light if sounds if the driver door is not fully still appears on the DIC. there is a problem with the brake closed and the vehicle is shifted out LIFTGATE OPEN system. See Brake System Warning of P (Park). Stop and turn off the Light on page 5‑21. If this message vehicle, check the door for This message displays and a chime appears, stop as soon as possible obstructions, and close the door sounds if the liftgate is open while and turn off the vehicle. Restart the again. Check to see if the message the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off vehicle and check for the message still appears on the DIC. the vehicle and check the liftgate. on the DIC display. If the message Restart the vehicle and check for is still displayed or appears again HOOD OPEN the message on the DIC display. when you begin driving, the brake On some models, this message PASSENGER DOOR OPEN system needs service as soon as displays and a chime sounds if the possible. See your dealer/retailer. hood is not fully closed. Stop and This message displays and a chime turn off the vehicle, check the hood sounds if the passenger door is not Cruise Control Messages for obstructions, and close the hood fully closed and the vehicle is again. Check to see if the message shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn CRUISE SET TO XXX still appears on the DIC. off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door This message displays whenever LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN again. Check to see if the message the cruise control is set. See Cruise still appears on the DIC. Control on page 9‑32 for more This message displays and a chime information. sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is Instruments and Controls 5-33

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN If this message continues to appear, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP have the system repaired by your This message displays and a chime ENGINE dealer/retailer as soon as possible sounds if the passenger side rear to avoid damage to the engine. Notice: If you drive your vehicle door is not fully closed and the while the engine is overheating, vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE severe engine damage may Stop and turn off the vehicle, check ENGINE occur. If an overheat warning the door for obstructions, and close appears on the instrument panel the door again. Check to see if the Notice: If you drive your vehicle cluster and/or DIC, stop the message still appears on the DIC. while the engine is overheating, vehicle as soon as possible. severe engine damage may Do not increase the engine speed Engine Cooling System occur. If an overheat warning above normal idling speed. See appears on the instrument panel Messages Engine Overheating on page 10‑17 cluster and/or DIC, stop the for more information. ENGINE HOT A/C (Air vehicle as soon as possible. Do not increase the engine speed This message displays and a Conditioning) OFF above normal idling speed. See continuous chime sounds if the This message displays when the Engine Overheating on page 10‑17 engine cooling system reaches engine coolant becomes hotter than for more information. unsafe temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as the normal operating temperature. This message displays when the See Engine Coolant Temperature soon as it is safe to do so to avoid engine coolant temperature is too severe damage. This message Gauge on page 5‑15. To avoid hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to added strain on a hot engine, clears when the engine has cooled idle until it cools down. See Engine to a safe operating temperature. the air conditioning compressor Coolant Temperature Gauge on automatically turns off. When the page 5‑15. coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning See Overheated Engine Protection compressor turns back on. You can Operating Mode on page 10‑19 for continue to drive your vehicle. information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. 5-34 Instruments and Controls

Engine Oil Messages pressure is corrected. See Engine accelerate. If this message is on, Oil on page 10‑8 for more but there is no reduction in CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON information. performance, proceed to your This message displays when the This message displays if low oil destination. The performance may engine oil needs to be changed. pressure levels occur. Stop the be reduced the next time the vehicle When you change the engine oil, be vehicle as soon as safely possible is driven. The vehicle may be driven sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE and do not operate it until the cause at a reduced speed while this OIL SOON message. See Engine of the low oil pressure has been message is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime Oil Life System on page 10‑10 for corrected. Check the oil as soon information on how to reset the as possible and have your vehicle this message stays on, the vehicle message. See Engine Oil on serviced by your dealer/retailer. should be taken to your dealer/ retailer for service as soon as page 10‑8 and Scheduled See Engine Oil on page 10‑8. possible. Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more information. Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED ENGINE FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and a chime Notice: If you drive your vehicle sounds when the cooling system This message displays and a chime while the engine oil pressure is temperature gets too hot and the sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel low, severe engine damage may engine further enters the engine as soon as possible. See Fuel occur. If a low oil pressure coolant protection mode. See Gauge on page 5‑14 and Fuel on page 9 42 for more information. warning appears on the Engine Overheating on page 10‑17 ‑ instrument panel cluster and/or for further information. DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle This message also displays when until the cause of the low oil the vehicle's engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's ability to Instruments and Controls 5-35

TIGHTEN GAS CAP Key and Lock Messages Lamp Messages This message may display along REMOTE KEY LEARNING AUTOMATIC LIGHT with the check engine light on the ACTIVE CONTROL OFF instrument panel cluster if the vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened This message displays while This message displays when the properly. See Malfunction Indicator you are matching a Remote automatic headlamps are turned off. Lamp on page 5‑19. Reinstall the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter This message clears itself after fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank to your vehicle. See “Matching 10 seconds. on page 9‑45. The diagnostic Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” system can determine if the fuel cap under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) AUTOMATIC LIGHT has been left off or improperly System Operation on page 2‑3 CONTROL ON installed. A loose or missing fuel and Driver Information Center (DIC) This message displays when the cap allows fuel to evaporate into the on page 5‑25 for more information. automatic headlamps are turned on. atmosphere. A few driving trips with REPLACE BATTERY IN This message clears itself after the cap properly installed should 10 seconds. turn this light and message off. REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote TURN SIGNAL ON Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter This message displays and a chime battery is low. The battery needs sounds if a turn signal is left on for to be replaced in the transmitter. 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn See “Battery Replacement” under signal/multifunction lever to the off Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) position. System Operation on page 2‑3. 5-36 Instruments and Controls

Object Detection System Ride Control System retailer for service. See StabiliTrak System on page 9‑30 for more Messages Messages information. PARK ASSIST OFF SERVICE STABILITRAK TRACTION CONTROL OFF If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic This message displays if there is ® This message displays when the Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, a problem with the StabiliTrak Traction Control System (TCS) is after the vehicle has been started system. If this message appears, try turned off. Adjust your driving and shifted out of P (Park), this to reset the system. Stop; turn off accordingly. See StabiliTrak System message displays to remind the the engine for at least 15 seconds; on page 9‑30 for more information. driver that the URPA system has then start the engine again. If this This message clears itself after been turned off or to notify the driver message still comes on, it means 10 seconds. that the system has turned itself off. there is a problem. See your dealer/ Press the set/reset button or the retailer for service. The vehicle is trip odometer reset stem to safe to drive, however, you do not Airbag System Messages acknowledge this message and have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so SERVICE AIR BAG clear it from the DIC display. For reduce your speed and drive more information see Ultrasonic accordingly. This message displays if there is a Parking Assist on page 9‑35. problem with the airbag system. SERVICE TRACTION Have your dealer/retailer inspect the SERVICE PARK ASSIST CONTROL system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 16 and If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic This message displays when there ‑ Airbag System on page 3 29 for Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, is a problem with the Traction ‑ more information. this message displays if there is a Control System (TCS). When this problem with the URPA system. message is displayed, the system Do not use this system to help you will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist driving accordingly. See your dealer/ on page 9‑35 for more information. See your dealer/retailer for service. Instruments and Controls 5-37

Anti-Theft Alarm System Service Vehicle Messages SERVICE VEHICLE SOON Messages SERVICE A/C (Air This message displays when a Conditioning) SYSTEM non-emissions related malfunction SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT occurs. Have the vehicle serviced SYSTEM This message displays when the by your dealer/retailer as soon as This message displays when there electronic sensors that control the possible. is a problem with the theft-deterrent air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working. STARTING DISABLED system. The vehicle may or may SERVICE THROTTLE not restart so you may want to take Have the climate control system the vehicle to your dealer/retailer serviced by your dealer/retailer if This message displays when your before turning off the engine. you notice a drop in heating and air vehicle's throttle system is not See Immobilizer Operation on conditioning efficiency. functioning properly. Have your page 2‑13 for more information. SERVICE POWER STEERING vehicle serviced by your dealer/ retailer. THEFT ATTEMPTED This message displays when a This message displays if the content problem is detected with the power Tire Messages theft-deterrent system has detected steering system. When this a break-in attempt while you were message is displayed, you may TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE away from your vehicle. See notice that the effort required to On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Anti-Theft Alarm System on steer the vehicle increases or feels Monitor System (TPMS), this page 2‑12 for more information. heavier, but you will still be able to message displays when the steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle pressure in one or more of the serviced by your dealer/retailer vehicle's tires is low. immediately. 5-38 Instruments and Controls

This message also displays SERVICE TIRE MONITOR System on page 10‑44, and Tire LEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT SYSTEM Pressure on page 10‑44 for more (right front), LEFT RR (left rear), information. or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate On vehicles with the Tire Pressure the location of the low tire. Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays if a part on the Transmission Messages The low tire pressure warning TPMS is not working properly. The ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF light will also come on. See Tire tire pressure light also flashes and Pressure Light on page 5‑23. then remains on during the same If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system, this message If a tire pressure message appears ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure displays when there is a compact on the DIC, stop as soon as you Light on page 5‑23. Several spare tire on the vehicle, when the can. Inflate the tires by adding air conditions may cause this message Antilock Brake System (ABS) until the tire pressure is equal to the to appear. See Tire Pressure warning light comes on, or when the values shown on the Tire Loading Monitor Operation on page 10‑46 for rear differential fluid is overheating. Information label. See Tires on more information. If the warning This message turns off when the page 10 37, Vehicle Load Limits on comes on and stays on, there may ‑ differential fluid cools. page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure on be a problem with the TPMS. See page 10‑44. your dealer/retailer. The AWD system is disabled until the compact spare tire is replaced You can receive more than one tire TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE by a full-size tire. If the warning pressure message at a time. To This message displays when the message is still on after putting on read the other messages that may Tire Pressure Monitor System the full-size tire, you need to reset have been sent at the same time, (TPMS) is re-learning the tire the warning message. To reset the press the set/reset button or the trip positions on your vehicle. The tire warning message, turn the ignition odometer reset stem. The DIC also positions must be re-learned after off and then back on again after shows the tire pressure values. See rotating the tires or after replacing a 30 seconds. If the message stays Driver Information Center (DIC) on tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on on, see your dealer/retailer right page 5 25. ‑ page 10‑50, Tire Pressure Monitor away. See All-Wheel Drive on page 9‑28 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-39

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE costly repairs that would not Vehicle Speed Messages be covered by your warranty. If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Do not drive your vehicle with SPEED LIMITED TO Drive (AWD) system, this message overheated transmission fluid XXX MPH (KM/H) displays if there is a problem with or while the transmission this system. If this message This message displays when your temperature warning is displayed. appears, stop as soon as possible vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph and turn off the vehicle. Restart the This message displays and a chime (128 km/h) because the vehicle vehicle after 30 seconds and check sounds if the transmission fluid in detects a problem in the speed for the message on the DIC display. the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the variable assist steering system. If the message is still displayed or transmission fluid temperature high Have your vehicle serviced by your appears again when you begin can cause damage to the vehicle. dealer/retailer. driving, the AWD system needs Stop the vehicle and let it idle to service. See your dealer/retailer. allow the transmission to cool. Washer Fluid Messages This message clears when the fluid SERVICE TRANSMISSION temperature reaches a safe level. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD This message displays when there FLUID is a problem with the transmission. Vehicle Reminder This message displays when the See your dealer/retailer for service. Messages windshield washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE ENGINE as soon as possible. See Engine WITH CARE Compartment Overview on Notice: If you drive your vehicle This message displays when the page 10‑6 for the location of the while the transmission fluid is outside air temperature is cold windshield washer fluid reservoir. overheating and the transmission enough to create icy road Also, see Washer Fluid on temperature warning is displayed conditions. Adjust your driving page 10‑20 for more information. on the instrument panel cluster accordingly. and/or DIC, you can damage the transmission. This could lead to 5-40 Instruments and Controls

Entering the Feature Press the customization button until Vehicle V Personalization Settings Menu the PRESS TO DISPLAY IN 1. Turn the ignition on and place ENGLISH screen appears on the Your vehicle may have the vehicle in P (Park). DIC display. Press the set/reset customization capabilities that allow button once to display all DIC you to program certain features to To avoid excessive drain on the messages in English. battery, it is recommended that one preferred setting. Customization DISPLAY LANGUAGE features can only be programmed to the headlamps are turned off. one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press the customization button This feature allows you to select the cannot be programmed to a to enter the feature settings language in which the DIC preferred setting for two different menu. If the menu is not messages will appear. drivers. available, FEATURE SETTINGS Press the customization button until All of the customization options may AVAILABLE IN PARK will the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen not be available on your vehicle. display. Before entering the appears on the DIC display. Press Only the options available will be menu, make sure the vehicle is the set/reset button once to access displayed on the DIC. in P (Park). the settings for this feature. Then Feature Settings Menu Items press the customization button to The default settings for the scroll through the following settings: customization features were set The following are customization when your vehicle left the factory, features that allow you to program ENGLISH (default): All messages but may have been changed from settings to the vehicle: will appear in English. their default state since then. FRANCAIS: All messages will DISPLAY IN ENGLISH The customization preferences are appear in French. automatically recalled. This feature will only display if a ESPANOL: All messages will language other than English has appear in Spanish. To change customization been set. This feature allows you to preferences, use the following change the language in which the procedure. DIC messages appear to English. Instruments and Controls 5-41

NO CHANGE: No change will be AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors Press the customization button until made to this feature. The current will automatically lock when the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on setting will remain. vehicle speed is above 8 mph the DIC display. Press the set/reset To select a setting, press the set/ (13 km/h) for three seconds. button once to access the settings reset button while the desired NO CHANGE: No change will be for this feature. Then press the setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current customization button to scroll setting will remain. through the following settings: AUTO DOOR LOCK To select a setting, press the set/ OFF: None of the doors will This feature allows you to select reset button while the desired automatically unlock. when the vehicle's doors will setting is displayed on the DIC. DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the automatically lock. See Automatic driver's door will unlock when the Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more AUTO DOOR UNLOCK key is taken out of the ignition. information. This feature allows you to select DRIVER IN PARK: Only the Press the customization button until whether or not to turn off the driver's door will unlock when the AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the automatic door unlocking feature. vehicle is shifted into P (Park). DIC display. Press the set/reset It also allows you to select which button once to access the settings doors and when the doors will ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors for this feature. Then press the automatically unlock. See Automatic will unlock when the key is taken customization button to scroll Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more out of the ignition. through the following settings: information. ALL IN PARK (default): All of the SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): doors will unlock when the vehicle is The doors will automatically lock shifted into P (Park). when the vehicle is shifted out of NO CHANGE: No change will be P (Park). made to this feature. The current setting will remain. 5-42 Instruments and Controls

To select a setting, press the set/ LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps vehicle with the RKE transmitter if reset button while the desired will flash when you press the lock the doors are open. See Remote setting is displayed on the DIC. button on the RKE transmitter. Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2‑3 for more REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press of the lock information. This feature allows you to select the button on the RKE transmitter. Press the customization button until type of feedback you will receive HORN & LIGHTS (default): The REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears when locking the vehicle with the on the DIC display. Press the set/ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE reset button once to access the transmitter. You will not receive settings for this feature. Then press feedback when locking the vehicle transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed the customization button to scroll with the RKE transmitter if the doors through the following settings: are open. See Remote Keyless again within five seconds of the Entry (RKE) System Operation on previous command. LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps page 2‑3 for more information. NO CHANGE: No change will be will not flash when you press made to this feature. The current the unlock button on the RKE Press the customization button until transmitter. REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on setting will remain. the DIC display. Press the set/reset To select a setting, press the set/ LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior button once to access the settings reset button while the desired lamps will flash when you press for this feature. Then press the setting is displayed on the DIC. the unlock button on the RKE customization button to scroll transmitter. through the following settings: REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK NO CHANGE: No change will be OFF: There will be no feedback This feature allows you to select the made to this feature. The current when you press the lock button on type of feedback you will receive setting will remain. the RKE transmitter. when unlocking the vehicle with the To select a setting, press the set/ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) reset button while the desired transmitter. You will not receive setting is displayed on the DIC. feedback when unlocking the Instruments and Controls 5-43

DELAY DOOR LOCK Press the customization button until Press the customization button until This feature allows you to select DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC whether or not the locking of the the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button vehicle's doors and liftgate will be button once to access the settings once to access the settings for delayed. When locking the doors for this feature. Then press the this feature. Then press the and liftgate with the power door lock customization button to scroll customization button to scroll switch and a door or the liftgate is through the following settings: through the following settings: open, this feature will delay locking OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not the doors and liftgate until locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on. five seconds after the last door is ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The closed. You will hear three chimes lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for to signal that the delayed locking door or the liftgate is closed. 30 seconds. feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will work. You can temporarily override made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute. delayed locking by pressing the setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will power door lock switch twice or the To select a setting, press the set/ stay on for two minutes. lock button on the RKE transmitter reset button while the desired NO CHANGE: No change will be twice. See Delayed Locking on setting is displayed on the DIC. page 2‑7 for more information. made to this feature. The current EXIT LIGHTING setting will remain. This feature allows you to select To select a setting, press the set/ the amount of time you want the reset button while the desired exterior lamps to remain on when setting is displayed on the DIC. it is dark enough outside. This happens after the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. 5-44 Instruments and Controls

APPROACH LIGHTING Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NO CHANGE: No change will be This feature allows you to select System Operation on page 2‑3 for made to this feature. The current whether or not to have the exterior more information. setting will remain. lights turn on briefly during low light NO CHANGE : No change will be There is no default for chime periods after unlocking the vehicle made to this feature. The current volume. The volume will stay at using the Remote Keyless Entry setting will remain. the last known setting. (RKE) transmitter. To select a setting, press the set/ To select a setting, press the set/ Press the customization button until reset button while the desired reset button while the desired APPROACH LIGHTING appears on setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC. the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings CHIME VOLUME PARK TILT MIRRORS for this feature. Then press the This feature allows you to select the If your vehicle has this feature, it customization button to scroll volume level of the chime. allows you to select whether or through the following settings: Press the customization button until not the outside mirror(s) will OFF: The exterior lights will not CHIME VOLUME appears on the automatically tilt down when the turn on when you unlock the vehicle DIC display. Press the set/reset vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). with the RKE transmitter. button once to access the settings See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑17 for more information. ON (default): If it is dark enough for this feature. Then press the outside, the exterior lights will turn customization button to scroll Press the customization button until on briefly when you unlock the through the following settings: PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on vehicle with the RKE transmitter. NORMAL: The chime volume will the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings The lights will remain on for be set to a normal level. 20 seconds or until the lock button LOUD: The chime volume will be on the RKE transmitter is pressed, set to a loud level. or the vehicle is no longer off. See Instruments and Controls 5-45 for this feature. Then press the EASY EXIT SEAT ignition. If the automatic movement customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it has already occurred, and you put through the following settings: allows you to select your preference the key back in the ignition and OFF (default): Neither outside for the automatic easy exit seat remove it again, the seat and mirror will be tilted down when the feature. See Delayed Locking on steering column will stay in the original exit position, unless a vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). page 2‑7 for more information. memory recall took place prior to DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's Press the customization button until removing the key again. outside mirror will be tilted down EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the when the vehicle is shifted into DIC display. Press the set/reset NO CHANGE: No change will be R (Reverse). button once to access the settings made to this feature. The current setting will remain. PASSENGER MIRROR: The for this feature. Then press the passenger's outside mirror will be customization button to scroll To select a setting, press the set/ tilted down when the vehicle is through the following settings: reset button while the desired shifted into R (Reverse). OFF (default): No automatic seat setting is displayed on the DIC. BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and exit recall will occur. MEMORY SEAT RECALL passenger's outside mirrors will be ON: The driver's seat will move If your vehicle has this feature, it tilted down when the vehicle is back when the key is removed from allows you to select your preference shifted into R (Reverse). the ignition. The steering column will for the remote memory seat recall NO CHANGE: No change will be also move up and forward on feature. See Delayed Locking on made to this feature. The current vehicles with the power tilt and page 2‑7 for more information. setting will remain. telescopic steering feature. See Steering Wheel Adjustment on To select a setting, press the set/ page 5‑2 for more information. reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key is removed from the 5-46 Instruments and Controls

Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ NO CHANGE: No change will be MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears reset button while the desired made to this feature. The current on the DIC display. Press the set/ setting is displayed on the DIC. setting will remain. reset button once to access the REMOTE START To select a setting, press the set/ settings for this feature. Then press reset button while the desired the customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it setting is displayed on the DIC. through the following settings: allows you to turn the remote start OFF (default): No remote memory off or on. The remote start feature FACTORY SETTINGS seat recall will occur. allows you to start the engine from This feature allows you to set all of outside of the vehicle using the ON: The driver's seat and outside the customization features back to Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) their factory default settings. mirrors will automatically move to transmitter. See Remote Vehicle the stored driving position when the Start on page 2‑5 for more Press the customization button until unlock button on the Remote information. FACTORY SETTINGS appears on Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is the DIC display. Press the set/reset pressed. The steering column will Press the customization button until button once to access the settings also move on vehicles with the REMOTE START appears on the for this feature. Then press the power tilt and telescopic steering DIC display. Press the set/reset customization button to scroll feature. See Steering Wheel button once to access the settings through the following settings: for this feature. Then press the Adjustment on page 5‑2 for more customization button to scroll RESTORE ALL (default): The information. See “Relearn Remote through the following settings: customization features will be set to Key” under Driver Information their factory default settings. Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 for OFF: The remote start feature will more information on matching be disabled. DO NOT RESTORE: The transmitters to driver ID numbers. customization features will not be ON (default): The remote start set to their factory default settings. NO CHANGE: No change will be feature will be enabled. made to this feature. The current setting will remain. Instruments and Controls 5-47

To select a setting, press the set/ Exiting the Feature Universal Remote reset button while the desired Settings Menu setting is displayed on the DIC. System The feature settings menu will be EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS exited when any of the following See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 16 for information This feature allows you to exit the occurs: ‑ regarding Part 15 of the Federal feature settings menu. . The vehicle is shifted out of Communications Commission (FCC) Press the customization button until P (Park). Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V . The vehicle is no longer in Canada. TO EXIT appears in the DIC display. ON/RUN. Press the set/reset button once to . The trip/fuel or vehicle Universal Remote System exit the menu. information DIC buttons are Programming If you do not exit, pressing the pressed. customization button again will . The end of the feature settings return you to the beginning of the menu is reached and exited. feature settings menu. . A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made.

This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. 5-48 Instruments and Controls

Do not use the Universal Home When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices: Remote with any garage door park outside of the garage. Park opener that does not have the stop directly in line with and facing the and reverse feature. This includes garage door opener motor-head or any garage door opener model gate motor-head. Be sure that manufactured before April 1, 1982. people and objects are clear of the Read the instructions completely garage door or gate that is being before attempting to program the programmed. Universal Home Remote. Because It is recommended that a new of the steps involved, it may be battery be installed in your helpful to have another person hand-held transmitter for quicker available to assist you with and more accurate transmission of programming the Universal Home the radio-frequency signal. Remote. Programming the Universal 1. From inside the vehicle, press Keep the original hand-held Home Remote System and hold down the two outside transmitter for use in other vehicles buttons at the same time, as well as for future Universal Home For questions or help programming releasing only when the Remote programming. It is also the Universal Home Remote Universal Home Remote recommended that upon the sale System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go indicator light begins to flash, of the vehicle, the programmed to www.homelink.com. after 20 seconds. This step will Universal Home Remote buttons Programming a garage door opener erase the factory settings or all should be erased for security involves time-sensitive actions, so previously programmed buttons. purposes. See “Erasing Universal read the entire procedure before Home Remote Buttons” later in this starting. Otherwise, the device will Do not hold down the buttons for section. time out and the procedure will have longer than 30 seconds and do to be repeated. not repeat this step to program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons. Instruments and Controls 5-49

2. Hold the end of your hand-held 4. The indicator light on the continue with the transmitter about 3 to 8 cm Universal Home Remote will programming Steps 6 (1 to 3 inches) away from the flash slowly at first and then through 8. Universal Home Remote buttons rapidly after Universal Home It may be helpful to have while keeping the indicator Remote successfully receives another person assist with light in view. The hand-held the frequency signal from the the remaining steps. transmitter was supplied by the hand-held transmitter. Release manufacturer of your garage both buttons. door opener receiver (motor 5. Press and hold the newly-trained head unit). Universal Home Remote button 3. At the same time, press and and observe the indicator light. hold both the Universal Home . If the indicator light Remote button to be used to stays on continuously, the control the garage door and the programming is complete hand-held transmitter button. and the garage door should Do not release the Universal move when the Universal Home Remote button or the Home Remote button is hand-held transmitter button until pressed and released. Step 4 has been completed. There is no need to Some entry gates and garage continue programming 6. After Steps 1 through 5 have door openers may require Steps 6 through 8. been completed, locate inside substitution of Step 3 with the the garage the garage door . If the Universal Home opener receiver (motor-head procedure noted in “Gate Remote indicator light unit). Locate the Learn or Operator and Canadian blinks rapidly for “ ” Smart button. The name and Programming” later in this two seconds and then “ ” color of the button may vary by section. turns to a constant light, manufacturer. 5-50 Instruments and Controls

7. Firmly press and release the To program the remaining two If you live in Canada, or you are “Learn” or “Smart” button. After Universal Home Remote buttons, having difficulty programming a gate you press this button, you will begin with Step 2 of “Programming operator or garage door opener by have 30 seconds to complete the Universal Home Remote using the “Programming Universal Step 8. System.” Do not repeat Step 1, Home Remote” procedures, 8. Immediately return to the as this will erase all previous regardless of where you live, vehicle. Firmly press and hold programming from the Universal replace Step 3 under “Programming the Universal Home Remote Home Remote buttons. Universal Home Remote” with the following: button, selected in Step 3 to Gate Operator and Canadian control the garage door, for Programming Continue to press and hold the two seconds, and then release Universal Home Remote button it. If the garage door does not If you have questions or need while you press and release every move, press and hold the help programming the Universal two seconds (cycle) the hand-held same button a second time for Home Remote System, call transmitter button until the two seconds, and then release 1-800-355-3515 or go to frequency signal has been it. Again, if the door does not www.homelink.com. successfully accepted by the move, press and hold the Canadian radio-frequency laws Universal Home Remote. The same button a third time for require transmitter signals to time Universal Home Remote indicator two seconds, and then release. out or quit after several seconds of light will flash slowly at first and then The Universal Home Remote transmission. This may not be long rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under should now activate the enough for Universal Home Remote “Programming Universal Home garage door. to pick up the signal during Remote” to complete the training programming. Similarly, some U.S. procedure. gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner. Instruments and Controls 5-51

Universal Remote System To erase all programmed buttons on Reprogramming a Single Operation the Universal Remote device: Universal Remote Button To reprogram any of the three Using Universal Remote Universal Remote buttons, repeat Press and hold the appropriate the programming instructions earlier Universal Remote button for at least in this section, beginning with half of a second. The indicator light Step 2. will come on while the signal is For help or information on the being transmitted. Universal Home Remote System, Erasing Universal Remote call the customer assistance phone Buttons number under Customer Assistance Offices (US, Can) on page 13‑3. All programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. 5-52 Instruments and Controls

2 NOTES Lighting 6-1

Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control ...... 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls Exterior Lighting Dome Lamps ...... 6-5 Reading Lamps ...... 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Lighting Features Changer ...... 6-2 Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Daytime Running Lamps Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 6-6 (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp Parade Dimming ...... 6-7 System ...... 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7 Delayed Headlamps ...... 6-3 Battery Power Protection ...... 6-8 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) ...... 6-4 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...... 6-4 Fog Lamps ...... 6-5 The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. 6-2 Lighting

It controls the following systems: ;(Parking Lamps): Turns the Headlamp High/ parking lamps on together with . Headlamps the following: Low-Beam Changer . Taillamps 2 3 . Taillamps Headlamp High/Low Beam . Parking Lamps Changer: Push the turn signal/lane . License Plate Lamps change lever away from you to turn . License Plate Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights the high beams on. . Instrument Panel Lights 2(Headlamps): Turns the Pull the lever towards you to return . Fog Lamps headlamps on together with the to low beams. The exterior lamps control has following lamps listed below. four positions: A warning chime sounds if the driver's door is opened when the 9 (Off): Briefly turn to this position ignition switch is off and the to turn the automatic light control off headlamps are on. or on again. . Parking Lamps AUTO (Automatic): Turns the headlamps on automatically at . Taillamps This indicator light turns on in the instrument panel cluster when the normal brightness, together with . License Plate Lamps the following: high beam headlamps are on. . Instrument Panel Lights . Parking Lamps # (Fog Lamps): Push the fog . Taillamps lamps control in to turn on the . License Plate Lamps fog lamps. . Instrument Panel Lights See Fog Lamps on page 6‑5. Lighting 6-3

Flash-to-Pass The DRL system's automatic control Delayed Headlamps makes the DRL lights come on This feature is used to signal to the when the following conditions Delayed headlamps provide a vehicle ahead that you want are met: period of exterior lighting as you to pass. leave the area around the vehicle. . The ignition is in the ON/RUN If the headlamps are off or in the This feature is activated when the position. headlamps are on due to the low‐beam position, pull the turn signal lever toward you to . The exterior lamps control is automatic headlamps control feature, and when the ignition is momentarily switch to high‐beams. in AUTO. turned off. The headlamps remain . The engine is running. Release the lever to turn the on until the exterior lamps control is high-beam headlamps off. When the DRL are on, only the DRL moved to the parking lamps position lights will be on. The headlamps, or until the pre-selected delayed Daytime Running Lamps taillamps, sidemarker, and other headlamp lighting period has ended. lamps will not be on. The instrument (DRL)/Automatic If the ignition is turned off with the Headlamp System panel and cluster will also not be lit. exterior lamp control in the parking When it is dark enough outside, the lamps or headlamps position, the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can DRL lights will turn off and the delayed headlamps cycle will make it easier for others to see the headlamps and parking lamps will not occur. front of your vehicle during the day. turn on. The other lamps that come Fully functional daytime running To disable the delayed headlamps on with the headlamps will also feature or change the time of delay, lamps are required on all vehicles come on. first sold in Canada. see Vehicle Personalization on When it is bright enough outside, page 5‑40. A light sensor on top of the the headlamps will go off and the instrument panel makes the DRL DRL will come on. work, so do not cover the sensor. The regular headlamp system should be turned on when it is needed. 6-4 Lighting

Adaptive Forward turn signal lamps flash on and off. Move the lever all the way up or Lighting (AFL) This warns others that you are down to signal a turn. having trouble. Press again to turn Raise or lower the lever until the Vehicles with the Adaptive Forward the flashers off. arrow starts to flash to signal a lane Lighting System (AFS) have The turn signals do not work while change. Hold it there until the lane headlamps that swivel to the left or the hazard warning flashers are on. change is completed. If the lever is right when making a turn to provide briefly pressed and released, the better lighting. To enable AFS, set turn signal flashes three times. the exterior lamp switch to the Turn and Lane-Change AUTO position. Move the switch out Signals The lever returns to its starting of the AUTO position to turn off the position whenever it is released. system. See Exterior Lamp Controls If after signaling a turn or lane on page 6‑1. change the arrow flashes rapidly or AFS operates when the vehicle does not come on, a signal bulb speed is greater than 2 mph might be burned out. (3 km/h). AFS does not operate Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb when the transmission is in is not burned out, check the fuse. R (Reverse). AFS is not immediately See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on operable after starting the vehicle; page 10‑31. driving a short distance is required to calibrate the AFS. Turn Signal On Chime If either one of the turn signals are Hazard Warning Flashers left on and the vehicle has been An arrow on the instrument panel driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a | Hazard Warning Flasher: cluster flashes in the direction of the chime will sound. Press this button located on the turn or lane change. instrument panel below the audio system, to make the front and rear Lighting 6-5

Fog Lamps Interior Lighting The lamps can also be turned on and off by turning the instrument Use the fog lamps for better vision panel brightness control clockwise in foggy or misty conditions. Instrument Panel to the farthest position. Illumination Control The fog lamps button is on the Dome Lamp Override exterior lamps control to the left of D (Instrument Panel The dome lamp override button is the steering column. Brightness): The knob with this next to the exterior lamps control. # (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior symbol on it is next to the exterior lamps button to turn the fog lamps lamps control to the left of the E (Dome Lamp Override): Press on or off. A light comes on in the steering wheel. Push the knob in the button in and the dome lamps instrument panel cluster when the all the way until it extends out and remain off when a door is opened. fog lamps are in use. The ignition then turn the knob clockwise or Press the button again to return it to must be on for the fog lamps counterclockwise to brighten or dim the extended position so that the to work. the lights. Push the knob back in dome lamps come on when a door when finished. is opened. When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the fog lamps turn off. The fog lamps come back on again Dome Lamps Reading Lamps when the high-beam headlamps are The dome lamps are located in the Press the button near each lamp to turned off. overhead console and above the turn them on or off. Some localities have laws that rear seat passengers. require the headlamps to be on The dome lamps automatically along with the fog lamps. come on when a door is opened, unless the dome lamp override button is pressed in. 6-6 Lighting

Lighting Features When the ignition is on, illuminated Delayed Exit Lighting entry is inactive, which means the courtesy lamps will not come on Delayed exit lighting illuminates the Entry Lighting unless a door is opened. interior for a period of time after the For vehicles with courtesy lamps, key is removed from the ignition. they come on and stay on for a set Delayed Entry Lighting The ignition must be off for delayed time whenever the unlock symbol is exit lighting to work. When the key Delayed entry lighting illuminates pressed on the Remote Keyless is removed, interior illumination the interior for a period of time after Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the activates and remains on until one all the doors have been closed. vehicle has one. of the following occurs: The ignition must be off for delayed If a door is opened, the lamps stay . The ignition is in ON/RUN. entry lighting to work. Immediately on while it is open and then turn off after all the doors have been closed, . The power door locks are automatically about 20 seconds the delayed entry lighting feature activated. after the door is closed. If the unlock continues to work until one of the symbol is pressed and no door is . An illumination period of following occurs: opened, the lamps turn off after 20 seconds has elapsed. about 20 seconds. . The ignition is in ON/RUN. If during the illumination period Entry lighting includes a feature . The doors are locked. a door is opened, the timed illumination period will be canceled called theater dimming. With theater . An illumination period of about and the interior lamps will remain on dimming, the lamps do not turn off 25 seconds has elapsed. at the end of the delay time. because a door is open. Instead, they slowly dim and then If during the illumination period go out. The delay time is canceled if a door is opened, the timed the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN illumination period is canceled or the power door lock switch is and the interior lamps remain on. pressed. The lamps will dim right away. Lighting 6-7

Parade Dimming voltage move up or down. This is It can increase engine idle speed to normal. If there is a problem, an generate more power, whenever This feature automatically prohibits alert will be displayed. needed. It can temporarily reduce the dimming of the instrument panel The battery can be discharged at the power demands of some displays in daylight while the accessories. headlamps are on so that the idle if the electrical loads are very displays are still able to be seen. high. This is true for all vehicles. Normally, these actions occur in This is because the generator steps or levels, without being Battery Load (alternator) may not be spinning fast noticeable. In rare cases at the enough at idle to produce all the highest levels of corrective action, Management power that is needed for very high this action may be noticeable to the The vehicle has Electric Power electrical loads. driver. If so, a Driver Information Management (EPM) that estimates A high electrical load occurs when Center (DIC) message might be the battery's temperature and state several of the following are on, such displayed, such as BATTERY of charge. It then adjusts the voltage as: headlamps, high beams, fog SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY for best performance and extended lamps, rear window defogger, VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. life of the battery. climate control fan at high speed, If one of these messages displays, it heated seats, engine cooling fans, is recommended that the driver When the battery's state of charge reduce the electrical loads as much is low, the voltage is raised slightly trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets. as possible. See Driver Information to quickly bring the charge back up. Center (DIC) on page 5‑25. When the state of charge is high, EPM works to prevent excessive the voltage is lowered slightly to discharge of the battery. It does this prevent overcharging. If the vehicle by balancing the generator's output has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage and the vehicle's electrical needs. display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you may see the 6-8 Lighting

Battery Power Protection This feature helps prevent the battery from being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The lamps will not come back on again until one of the following occurs: . The ignition is turned on. . The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on again. The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are manually turned on while the ignition is on or off. Infotainment System 7-1

Audio Players Introduction Infotainment CD Player ...... 7-12 System CD/DVD Player ...... 7-14 Read the following pages to MP3 (Radio with CD and become familiar with the audio Radio with CD/USB) ...... 7-21 system's features. Introduction MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) . . . 7-27 Introduction ...... 7-1 Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-34 { WARNING Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 Rear Seat Infotainment Operation ...... 7-2 Taking your eyes off the road Rear Seat Entertainment for extended periods could cause Radio (RSE) System ...... 7-36 a crash resulting in injury or Rear Seat Audio (RSA) AM-FM Radio ...... 7-6 death to you or others. Do not System ...... 7-44 Satellite Radio ...... 7-8 give extended attention to Radio Reception ...... 7-11 Phone entertainment tasks while driving. Multi-Band Antenna ...... 7-12 Bluetooth ...... 7-46 This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings. To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked: . Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. . Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. 7-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see Defensive Operation Driving on page 9‑2. The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑19 for more information. Navigation/Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the separate Navigation System manual. Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB similar Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle. Infotainment System 7-3

See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7‑36 for more information on the vehicle's RSE system. The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Playing the Radio Radio with CD, DVD, and USB O (Power/Volume): Press to turn The vehicle may have one of these explained later in this section the system on and off. Turn to radios as its audio system. under, “Adjusting the Speakers increase or decrease the volume. (Balance/Fade)”. Radios with CD, DVD, and USB For vehicles with a Rear If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment System (RSE), Radios with CD, DVD, and USB press and hold for more than ® Entertainment (RSE) system, it have a Bose Surround Sound has a CD, DVD, and USB radio. two seconds to turn off the entire System. Some of its features are radio and RSE system and to start the parental control feature. 7-4 Infotainment System

Parental control prevents the rear information displays on the bottom Speed Compensated Volume seat occupant from operating the line. When information is not (SCV): The Speed Compensated Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or available, “NO INFO” is displayed. Volume (SCV) feature automatically remote control. Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, adjusts the radio volume to A lock symbol displays next to the CD, MP3, and WMA features): compensate for road and wind noise clock display while the parental If additional information is available as the vehicle speeds up or slows control feature is being used. for the current song being played, down, so that the volume level is consistent. The feature remains on until O is Auto Text will automatically pressed and held for more than page/scroll the information every To activate SCV: two seconds, or the driver turns the five seconds above the FAV presets 1. Set the radio volume. ignition off and exits the vehicle. on the radio display. 2. Press the MENU button to 4 (Information): Press to switch To activate Auto Text: display the radio setup menu. the display between the radio 1. Press MENU to display the radio 3. Press the softkey under the station frequency and the time. setup menu. When the ignition is in the OFF AUTO VOLUM (automatic 4 2. Press the softkey under AUTO volume) tab on the radio display. position, press to display the time. TXT tab on the radio display. For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA or 4. Press the softkey under the 3. Press the softkey under the ON Speed Compensated Volume RDS features, press 4 to display tab on the radio display. setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) additional text information related to 4 to select the level of radio the current FM-RDS or XM station; If is pressed and the song title or volume compensation. or CD, MP3 or WMA song. artist information is longer than Press the softkey located If information is available during XM, what can be displayed, the extra below the BACK tab on the CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the information will page every MENU SETUP display or song title information displays on five seconds when Auto Text is let the display time out after the top line of the display and artist activated. approximately 10 seconds. Infotainment System 7-5

Each higher setting allows To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Adjusting the Speakers for more radio volume or treble to the middle position, (Balance/Fade) compensation at faster press the softkey under the BASS, vehicle speeds. MID, or TREB tab for more than BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To two seconds. A beep sounds and adjust the balance or fade: Setting the Tone the level adjusts to the middle f (Bass/Midrange/Treble) 1. Press until the speaker control position. tabs display. BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, To quickly adjust all tone and f or Treble): To adjust bass, speaker controls to the middle 2. Continue pressing to highlight midrange, or treble: f the tab, or press the softkey position, press for more than under the tab. 1. Press f until the tone control two seconds until a beep sounds. tabs display. 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, EQ (Equalization): Press to do one of the following until the 2. Continue pressing f to highlight choose bass and treble equalization levels are obtained. settings designed for different types the tab, or press the softkey of music. The choices are pop, rock, . Turn f clockwise or under the tab. country, talk, jazz, and classical. counterclockwise. 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, Selecting MANUAL or changing do one of the following until the bass or treble, returns the EQ to the . Press \ FWD, levels are obtained. manual bass and treble settings. or s REV. . Turn f clockwise or Unique EQ settings can be saved To quickly adjust balance or fade counterclockwise. for each source. to the middle position, press the If the radio has a Bose® audio softkey under the BAL or FADE tab . Press \ FWD, system, the EQ settings are either for more than two seconds. A beep or s REV. MANUAL or TALK. sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. If a station's frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble. 7-6 Infotainment System

To quickly adjust all speaker and Radio Messages Radio tone controls to the middle position, f Calibration Error: The audio press for more than two seconds system has been calibrated AM-FM Radio until a beep sounds. for the vehicle from the factory. Radios with CD and DVD fade If Calibration Error displays, it Radio Data System (RDS) differently depending on the DVD means that the radio has not been The Radio Data System (RDS) Media type: configured properly for the vehicle feature is available for use only on and it must be returned to your FM stations that broadcast RDS . With DVD‐A 5.1 Surround dealer/retailer for service. media, the left front and right information. This system relies upon front speakers fade rearward, Locked: This message displays receiving specific information from ® leaving the center front speakers when the THEFTLOCK system these stations and only works when unaffected until the last has locked up the radio. Take the the information is available. While fade step, then all front vehicle to your dealer/retailer for the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS speakers mute. service. station, the station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio . With DVD‐V 5.1 Surround If any error occurs repeatedly or if station could broadcast incorrect media, surround sound is an error cannot be corrected, information that causes the radio maintained until Step 4 of the contact your dealer/retailer. features to work improperly. If this Fade control is reached while happens, contact the radio station. fading rearward. At that point the audio system output changes to Finding a Station Stereo to prevent the loss of BAND: Press to switch between Center channel output when the AM, FM, or XM. The selection full rearward fade position is displays. reached. f (Tune): Turn to select radio If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is stations. turned on, the radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers. Infotainment System 7-7

© SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To setup the number of favorites previous or to the next station and 36 stations can be programmed as pages: stay there. favorites using the six softkeys 1. Press MENU to display the radio below the radio station frequency setup menu. To scan stations, press and tabs and by using the radio favorites hold © or ¨ until a beep sounds. page button (FAV button). Press 2. Press the softkey below the The radio goes to a station, plays to go through up to six pages of FAV 1-6 tab. for a few seconds, then goes to the favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the desired number of next station. Press either arrow stations available per page. Each favorites pages by pressing the again to stop scanning. page of favorites can contain any softkey below the displayed The radio only seeks and scans combination of AM, FM, or XM page numbers. stations. stations with a strong signal that are 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time in the selected band. The balance/fade and tone settings out, to return to the original that were previously adjusted, are main radio screen showing the Storing a Radio Station as a stored with the favorite stations. Favorite radio station frequency tabs To store a station as a favorite: and to begin the process of Drivers are encouraged to set up programming favorites for the their radio station favorites while 1. Tune to the desired radio station. chosen amount of numbered the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to 2. Press FAV to display the page to pages. favorite stations using the presets, store the station. favorites button, and steering wheel controls. See Steering Wheel 3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds. Controls on page 5‑3. When that softkey is pressed and released, the station that was set, returns. 4. Repeat the steps for each radio station to be stored as a favorite. 7-8 Infotainment System

Satellite Radio To scan stations, press and 4. Press either of the two buttons hold © or ¨ until a beep sounds. below the desired category tab XM™ Satellite Radio Service The radio goes to a station, plays to immediately tune to the first XM is a satellite radio service for a few seconds, then goes to the XM station associated with that that is based in the 48 contiguous next station. Press either arrow category. United States and 10 Canadian again to stop scanning. 5. To go to the next or previous provinces. XM Satellite Radio The radio only seeks and scans XM station within the selected has a wide variety of programming stations with a strong signal that are category, do one of the and commercial-free music, in the selected band. following: coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality . f sound. For more information, Finding a Category (CAT) Turn . contact XM at www.xmradio.com Station . Press the buttons below the or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. CAT (Category): The CAT button is right or left arrows on the and www.xmradio.ca or call used to find XM stations when the display. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. ™ radio is in the XM mode. To find XM . Press either SEEK arrow. channels within a desired category: Finding a Station 6. To exit the category search BAND: Press to switch between 1. Press BAND until the XM mode, press the FAV button or AM, FM, or XM. The selection frequency displays. BAND button to display the displays. 2. Press CAT to display the favorites again. f (Tune): Turn to select radio category tabs. stations. 3. Continue pressing CAT until the © SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the desired category name displays. previous or to the next station and . Radios with CD and DVD stay there. can also navigate the category list by pressing s REV or \ FWD. Infotainment System 7-9

Undesired XM categories can be Storing a Radio Station as a To store a station as a favorite: removed through the setup menu. Favorite 1. Tune to the desired radio station. To remove an undesired category, perform the following: Drivers are encouraged to set up 2. Press FAV to display the page to their radio station favorites while store the station. 1. Press MENU to display the radio the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to setup menu. favorite stations using the presets, 3. Press and hold one of the favorites button, and steering wheel six softkeys until a beep sounds. 2. Press the softkey below the When that softkey is pressed XM CAT tab. controls. See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5‑3. and released, the station that 3. Turn f to display the category to was set, returns. FAV (Favorites): A maximum of be removed. 36 stations can be programmed as 4. Repeat the steps for each radio 4. Press the softkey under the favorites using the six softkeys station to be stored as a favorite. Remove tab until the category below the radio station frequency To setup the number of favorites name along with the word tabs and by using the radio favorites pages: Removed displays. page button (FAV button). Press 1. Press MENU to display the radio to go through up to six pages of 5. Repeat the steps to remove setup menu. more categories. favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each 2. Press the softkey below the Removed categories can be page of favorites can contain any FAV 1-6 tab. restored by pressing the softkey combination of AM, FM, or XM 3. Select the desired number of under the Add tab when a removed stations. category is displayed or by pressing favorites pages by pressing the the softkey under the Restore The balance/fade and tone settings softkey below the displayed All tab. that were previously adjusted, are page numbers. stored with the favorite stations. Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 8 km/h (5 mph). 7-10 Infotainment System

4. Press FAV, or let the menu time Loading XM: The audio system is No CAT Info: No category out, to return to the original acquiring and processing audio and information is available at this time main radio screen showing the text data. No action is needed. This on this channel. The system is radio station frequency tabs message should disappear shortly. working properly. and to begin the process of Channel Off Air: This channel is No Information: No text or programming favorites for the not currently in service. Tune in to informational messages are chosen amount of numbered another channel. available at this time on this pages. Channel Unauth : This channel is channel. The system is working XM™ Radio Messages blocked or cannot be received with properly. XL (Explicit Language your XM Subscription package. CAT Not Found: There are no Channels): These channels, or Channel Unavail: This previously channels available for the selected any others, can be blocked at a assigned channel is no longer category. The system is working customer's request, by calling assigned. Tune to another station. properly. 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). If this station was one of the XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver XM Updating: The encryption code presets, choose another station for in the vehicle could have previously in the receiver is being updated, and that preset button. been in another vehicle. For security no action is required. This process No Artist Info: No artist purposes, XM receivers cannot be should take no longer than information is available at this time swapped between vehicles. If this 30 seconds. on this channel. The system is message is received after having working properly. the vehicle serviced, check with No XM Signal: The system is your dealer/retailer. functioning correctly, but the vehicle No Title Info: No song title is in a location that is blocking the information is available at this time XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, XM™ signal. When the vehicle is on this channel. The system is this message alternates with the moved into an open area, the signal working properly. XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. should return. This label is needed to activate the service. Infotainment System 7-11

Unknown: If this message is FM XM™ Satellite Radio Service received when tuned to channel 0, FM signals only reach about 16 to XM Satellite Radio Service gives there could be a receiver fault. 65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the digital radio reception from Consult with your dealer/retailer. radio has a built-in electronic circuit coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous Check XM Receivr: If this that automatically works to reduce United States, and in Canada. Just message does not clear within a interference, some static can occur, as with FM, tall buildings or hills can short period of time, the receiver especially around tall buildings or interfere with satellite radio signals, could have a fault. Consult with your hills, causing the sound to fade in causing the sound to fade in and dealer/retailer. and out. out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, XM Not Available: If this message AM does not clear within a short period garages, or tunnels may cause loss of time, the receiver could have a The range for most AM stations is of the XM signal for a period of time. greater than for FM, especially at fault. Consult with your dealer/ Cellular Phone Usage retailer. night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere Cellular phone usage may cause Radio Reception with each other. For better radio interference with the vehicle's radio. reception, most AM radio stations This interference may occur when Frequency interference and static boost the power levels during the making or receiving phone calls, can occur during normal radio day, and then reduce these levels charging the phone's battery, reception if items such as cell phone during the night. Static can also or simply having the phone on. This chargers, vehicle convenience occur when things like storms and interference can cause an increased accessories, and external electronic power lines interfere with radio level of static while listening to the devices are plugged into the reception. When this happens, try radio. If static is received while accessory power outlet. If there is reducing the treble on the radio. listening to the radio, unplug the interference or static, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off. item from the accessory power outlet. 7-12 Infotainment System

Multi-Band Antenna Audio Players If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player continues The multi-band antenna is located moving backward or forward on the roof of the vehicle. This type CD Player through the tracks on the CD. of antenna is used with the AM/FM radio, as well as OnStar® and the Playing a CD s REV (Fast Reverse): Press XM™ Satellite Radio Service Insert a CD partway into the slot, and hold to reverse playback quickly System, if the vehicle has these label side up. The player pulls it in within a track. Sound will be heard features. Keep this antenna clear of and the CD should begin playing. at a reduced volume. Release to snow and ice build up for clear radio resume playing the track. The Z EJECT : Press and release reception. If the vehicle has a elapsed time of the track displays. to eject the disc that is currently sunroof, the performance of the \ playing. A beep sounds and FWD (Fast Forward): Press radio system may be affected if the Ejecting Disc displays. Once the and hold to advance playback sunroof is open. Loading items onto disc is ejected, Remove Disc quickly within a track. Sound will be the roof of the vehicle can interfere displays. The disc can be removed. heard at a reduced volume. Release with the performance of the radio If the disc is not removed, after to resume playing the track. The system and, if the vehicle has this several seconds, the disc elapsed time of the track displays. feature, OnStar®. Make sure the automatically pulls back into the RDM (Random): CD tracks can be multi-band antenna is not player. obstructed. listened to in random, rather than f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on sequential order with the random the CD that is currently playing. setting. To use random, press the softkey under the RDM label until © SEEK ¨ : Press © to go to Random Current Disc displays. the start of the current track, if more Press the softkey again to turn off than ten seconds on the CD have random play. played. Press ¨ to go to the next track. Infotainment System 7-13

BAND: Press to listen to the radio surface of a CD is damaged, such Notice: If a label is added to a when a CD is playing. The CD as cracked, broken, or scratched, CD, or more than one CD is remains inside the radio for future the CD does not play properly or not inserted into the slot at a time, listening. at all. Do not touch the bottom side or an attempt is made to play CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to of a CD while handling it; this could scratched or damaged CDs, the select between CD, or Auxiliary. damage the surface. Pick up CDs CD player could be damaged. by grasping the outer edges or the While using the CD player, use . When a CD is in the player edge of the hole and the outer edge. only CDs in good condition the CD icon and a message If the surface of a CD is soiled, take without any label, load one CD at showing the disc and/or track a time, and keep the CD player number displays. a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral and the loading slot free of . If an auxiliary input device is not detergent solution mixed with water, foreign materials, liquids, and connected, “No Input Device and clean it. Make sure the wiping debris. Found” displays. process starts from the center to If an error displays, see “CD Care of CDs the edge. Messages” later in this section. If playing a CD-R, the sound quality Care of the CD Player Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or can be reduced due to CD-R or Do not add any label to a CD, it CD-RW Disc CD-RW quality, the method of could get caught in the CD player. The radio has the capability of recording, the quality of the music If a CD is recorded on a personal playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or that has been recorded, and the computer and a description label is CD-RW disc. For more information way the CD-R or CD-RW has been needed, try labeling the top of the on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R handled. Handle them carefully. recorded CD with a marking pen. or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their with CD and Radio with CD/USB) original cases or other protective The use of CD lens cleaners for on page 7‑21 or MP3 (Radio with cases and away from direct sunlight CDs is not advised. CD/DVD) on page 7‑27. and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the 7-14 Infotainment System

CD Messages . There could have been a If the ignition or radio is turned off, problem while burning the CD. while a CD is in the player, it stays CHECK DISC: Radios with a . in the player. When the ignition or Single CD player display CHECK The label could be caught in the radio is turned on, the CD starts DISC and/or ejects the CD if an CD player. playing where it stopped, if it was error occurs. If the CD is not playing correctly for the last selected audio source. The Optical Error: The disc was any other reason, try a known CD is controlled by the buttons on inserted upside down. good CD. the radio faceplate or by the RSA Disk Read Error: A disc was If any error occurs repeatedly or if unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) inserted with an invalid or unknown an error cannot be corrected, System on page 7‑44 for more format. contact your dealer/retailer. If the information. The DVD/CD decks, radio displays an error message, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the Player Error: There are disc LOAD write it down and provide it to your lower slot is the CD deck) of the or disc EJECT problems. dealer/retailer when reporting the radio are compatible with most . It is very hot. When the problem. audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and temperature returns to normal, MP3/WMAs. the CD should play. CD/DVD Player When a CD is inserted, the text . The road is very rough. When Playing a CD (In Either the label DVD or CD symbol displays on the left side of the radio display. As the road becomes smoother, the DVD or CD Slot) CD should play. each new track starts to play, the Insert a CD partway into the slot, track number displays. . The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, label side up. The player pulls it in or upside down. Z CD (Eject): Press and release and the CD should begin playing to eject the disc that is currently . The air is very humid. If so, wait (loading a disc into the system, playing. The disc ejects from the about an hour and try again. depending on media type and bottom slot. A beep sounds and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Ejecting Disc displays. Once the for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a disc is ejected, Remove Disc DVD to begin playing). displays. The disc can be removed. Infotainment System 7-15

If the disc is not removed, after Press ¨ to go to the next track. BAND: Press to listen to the radio several seconds, the disc when a CD or DVD is playing. The automatically pulls back into the If either arrow is held, or pressed CD or DVD remains inside the radio player. multiple times, the player continues for future listening or for viewing moving backward or forward entertainment. Z DVD (Eject): Press and through the tracks on the CD. release to eject the disc that is DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to currently playing in the top slot. s REV (Fast Reverse): Press select between DVD, CD, A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc and hold to reverse playback quickly or Auxiliary. displays. within a track. Sound will be heard at a reduced volume. Release to . If an auxiliary input device is If loading and reading of a disc resume playing the track. The not connected, “No Aux Input cannot be completed, and the elapsed time of the track displays. Device” displays. disc fails to eject, press and \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press . When a disc is in either slot, the hold Z DVD for more than and hold to advance playback DVD/CD text tab and a message five seconds to force the disc to quickly within a track. Sound will be showing the track or chapter eject. heard at a reduced volume. Release number displays. f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on to resume playing the track. The . If an auxiliary input device is not the CD that is currently playing. elapsed time of the track displays. connected, and a disc is in both © SEEK ¨ : Press © to go RDM (Random): CD tracks can be the DVD slot and the CD slot the to the start of the current track if listened to in random, rather than DVD/CD AUX button only cycles the track has played more than sequential order with the random between the two sources and five seconds. If the track has played setting. To use random, press the does not indicate “No Aux Input less than five seconds the previous softkey under the RDM tab until Device”. track will play. Random Current Disc displays. . If a front auxiliary input device is Press the softkey again to turn off connected, the DVD/CD AUX random play. button cycles through all available options. 7-16 Infotainment System

If a disc is inserted into the top DVD or scratched, the CD does not play Notice: If a label is added to a slot, the rear seat operator can turn properly or not at all. Do not touch CD, or more than one CD is on the video screen and use the the bottom side of a CD while inserted into the slot at a time, remote control to only navigate the handling it; this could damage the or an attempt is made to play CD tracks through the remote surface. Pick up CDs by grasping scratched or damaged CDs, the control. the outer edges or the edge of the CD player could be damaged. hole and the outer edge. While using the CD player, use See “Using the Auxiliary Input only CDs in good condition Jack(s)” later in this section, If the surface of a CD is soiled, take without any label, load one CD at or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of System on page 7‑36 for more detergent solution mixed with water, information. and clean it. Make sure the wiping foreign materials, liquids, and process starts from the center to debris. Care of CDs and DVDs the edge. If an error displays, see “CD If playing a CD-R, the sound quality Messages” later in this section. can be reduced due to CD-R or Care of the CD and DVD Player CD-RW quality, the method of Do not add any label to a CD, it Radios with CD and DVD recording, the quality of the music could get caught in the CD or DVD Audio Output that has been recorded, and the player. If a CD is recorded on a Only one audio source can be heard way the CD-R or CD-RW has been personal computer and a description through the speakers at one time. handled. Handle them carefully. label is needed, try labeling the An audio source is defined as Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their top of the recorded CD with a DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, original cases or other protective marking pen. Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear cases and away from direct sunlight The use of CD lens cleaners for Auxiliary Jack. and dust. The CD or DVD player CDs is not advised. scans the bottom surface of the Press O to turn the radio on. The disc. If the surface of a CD is radio can be heard through all of the damaged, such as cracked, broken, vehicle speakers. Infotainment System 7-17

Front seat passengers can listen to Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or . The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by CD-RW Disc or upside down. pressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX to . The radio has the capability of The air is very humid. If so, wait select the CD slot, DVD slot, front or about an hour and try again. rear auxiliary input (if available). playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information . There could have been a If a playback device is plugged into on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R problem while burning the CD. the radio s front auxiliary input jack ’ or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio . or the rear auxiliary jack, the front The label could be caught in the with CD and Radio with CD/USB) CD player. seat passengers are able to listen to on page 7‑21 or MP3 (Radio with playback from this source through CD/DVD) on page 7‑27. If the CD is not playing correctly for the vehicle speakers. See “Using any other reason, try a known the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in CD Messages good CD. this section, or Audio/Video (A/V) “ Optical Error: The disc was If any error occurs repeatedly or Jacks under, Rear Seat ” inserted upside down. if an error cannot be corrected, Entertainment (RSE) System on contact your dealer/retailer. If the page 7‑36 for more information. Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown radio displays an error message, In some vehicles, depending on format. write it down and provide it to your audio options, the rear speakers dealer/retailer when reporting the can be muted when the RSA power Player Error: There are disc LOAD problem. is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio or disc EJECT problems. (RSA) System on page 7‑44 for . It is very hot. When the more information. temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. . The road is very rough. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. 7-18 Infotainment System

Using the DVD Player Playing a DVD s REV (Fast Reverse): Press The DVD player can be controlled f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on to quickly reverse the DVD at by the buttons on the remote a CD or DVD, to manually tune a five times the normal speed. The control, the RSA system, or by the radio station, or to change clock or radio displays the elapsed time buttons on the radio faceplate. See date settings, while in the clock while in fast reverse. To stop fast “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat or date setting mode. See the reversing, press again. This button Entertainment (RSE) System on information given earlier in this may not work when the DVD is page 7‑36 and Rear Seat Audio section specific to the radio, CD, playing the copyright information or (RSA) System on page 7‑44 for and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the the previews. more information. Clock” in the index, for setting the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to clock and date. The DVD player is only compatible fast forward the DVD. The radio with DVDs of the appropriate region © SEEK (Previous Track/ displays the elapsed time and fast code that is printed on the jacket of Chapter): Press to return to the forwards five times the normal most DVDs. start of the current track or chapter. speed. To stop fast forwarding, Press © again to go to the press again. This button may not The DVD slot of the radio is work when the DVD is playing the previous track or chapter. This compatible with most audio CDs, copyright information or the button may not work when the DVD CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, previews. DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, is playing the copyright information DVD+R/RW media along with or the previews. Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD. MP3 and WMA formats. If the DVD is ejected, but not SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): removed, the player automatically If an error message displays on the Press to go to the next track or pulls it back in after 15 seconds. video screen or the radio, see “DVD chapter. This button may not work Display Error Messages” under, when the DVD is playing the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) copyright information or the System on page 7‑36 and “DVD previews. Radio Error Messages” in this section for more information. Infotainment System 7-19

If loading and reading of a DVD r / j (Play/Pause): Press either c (Stop): Press to stop playing, cannot be completed, because of an the play or pause icon displayed on rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. unknown format, etc., and the disc the radio system, to toggle between r fails to eject, press and hold for (Enter): Press to select the pausing or restarting playback of choices that are highlighted in more than five seconds to force the a DVD. disc to eject. any menu. . If the forward arrow is showing y (Menu): Press to access the DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons on display, the system is in DVD menu. The DVD menu is Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio pause mode. different on every DVD. Use the display menu shows several icons. . If the pause icon is showing softkeys under the navigation Press the softkeys under any icon on display, the system is in arrows to navigate the cursor during DVD playback. See the icon playback mode. through the DVD menu. After list below for more information. making a selection press this . If the DVD screen is off, press The rear seat passenger can the play button to turn the button. This button only operates navigate the DVD-V menus and screen on. when using a DVD. controls through the remote control. Some DVDs begin playing after the Nav (Navigate): Press to display See Remote Control , under Rear “ ” previews have finished, although directional arrows for navigating Seat Entertainment (RSE) System there could be a delay of up to through the menus. on page 7 36 for more information. ‑ 30 seconds. If the DVD does q (Return): Press to exit the The Video Screen automatically not begin playing the movie current active menu and return to turns on when the DVD-V is automatically, press the softkey the previous menu. This button inserted into the DVD slot. under the play/pause icon displayed operates only when a DVD is on the radio. If the DVD still does playing and a menu is active. not play, refer to the on-screen instructions, if available. 7-20 Infotainment System

DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons . If the pause icon is showing discs automatically play the movie on display, the system is in while others default to the softkey Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio playback mode. display menu shows several icons. menu display, which requires the Press the softkeys under any icon q Group r : Press to cycle Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys during DVD playback. See the icon through musical groupings on the to be pressed; either by the softkey list below for more information. DVD-A disc. on the radio or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control. The rear seat operator can navigate Nav (Navigate): Press to display the DVD-A menus and controls directional arrows for navigating It may take up to 30 seconds for a through the remote control. See through the menus. DVD to begin playing. “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle Stopping and Resuming Playback Entertainment (RSE) System on through audio stream formats To stop playing a DVD without page 7‑36 for more information. located on the DVD-A disc. The The Video Screen does not turning off the system, do one of the video screen shows the audio following: automatically power on when the stream changing. DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. . Press c on the remote control. It must be manually turned on by Inserting a Disc . Press the softkey under the the rear seat occupant through the To play a disc, gently insert the stop or the play/pause icons remote control power button. disc, with the label side up, into the displayed on the radio. r / j (Play/Pause): Press either loading slot. The DVD player might the play or pause icon displayed on not accept some paper labeled . If the radio head is sourced to the radio system, to toggle between media. The player starts loading the something other than DVD-V, pausing or restarting playback of disc into the system and shows press the DVD/CD AUX button a DVD. “Loading Disc” on the radio display. to make DVD-V the active At the same time, the radio displays source. . If the forward arrow is showing a softkey menu of option(s). Some on display, the system is in pause mode. Infotainment System 7-21

To resume DVD playback, do one of movie is reloaded and the RSA MP3 (Radio with CD and the following: system is sourced to the DVD, the player begins to play again. Radio with CD/USB) . Press r / j on the remote If loading and reading a DVD or Format control. CD cannot be completed, and Radios that have the capability of . Press the softkey under the the disc fails to eject, press and playing MP3s can play.mp3 or play/pause icon displayed on the hold Z DVD for more than radio. .wma files that were recorded onto five seconds to force the disc to a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files The DVD should resume play from eject. can be recorded with the following where it last stopped if the disc has DVD Error Messages fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, not been ejected and the stop 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, button has not been pressed twice Player Error: This message 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, on the remote control. If the disc displays when there are disc load or 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and has been ejected or the stop button eject problems. 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. has been pressed twice on the Disc Format Error: This message Radios that have a USB port can remote control, the disc resumes displays, if the disc is inserted with playing at the beginning of the disc. play.mp3 and .wma files that are the disc label wrong side up, or if stored on a USB storage device as Ejecting a Disc the disc is damaged. well as AAC files that are stored on Disc Region Error: This message an iPod®. Press Z DVD on the radio to eject displays, if the disc is not from a the disc. If a disc is ejected from the correct region. radio, but not removed, the radio reloads the disc after a short period No Disc Inserted: This message of time. The disc is stored in the displays, if no disc is present radio. The radio does not resume when Z DVD or DVD/CD AUX is play of the disc automatically. If the pressed on the radio. 7-22 Infotainment System

Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode USB Supported File and Folder If a disc contains both Discs Structure uncompressed CD audio and The radio can play discs that The radio supports: MP3/WMA files, a folder under the contain both uncompressed CD root directory called CD accesses . Up to 700 folders. audio and MP3/WMA files. If both all of the CD audio tracks on formats are on the disc, the radio . Up to 8 folders in depth. the disc. plays both file formats in the order . Up to 65,535 files. Empty Folder in which they were recorded to the disc. . Folder and file names up to Folders that do not contain files are 64 bytes. skipped, and the player advances to CD R or CD RW Supported File the next folder that contains files. ‐ ‐ . and Folder Structure Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension. Order of Play The radio supports: . AAC files stored on an iPod. Compressed audio files are . Up to 50 folders. accessed in the following order: . FAT16 . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Playlists (Px). . FAT32 . Up to 15 playlists. . Files stored in the root directory. Root Directory . Up to 512 files and folders. . Files stored in folders in the root The root directory of the disc is directory. . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl treated as a folder. If the root extension. directory has compressed audio . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda files, the directory displays on the file extension. radio as the CD label. Infotainment System 7-23

Tracks are played in the following File System and Naming Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3 order: The song name that displays is the f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA . Play begins from the first track in song name that is contained in the files. the first playlist and continues ID3 tag. If the song name is not SEEK: Press to go to the sequentially through all tracks in present in the ID3 tag, then the © start of the track, if more than each playlist. When the last radio displays the file name without ten seconds have played. Press track of the last playlist has the extension (such as .mp3) as the and hold or press multiple times to played, play continues from the track name. continue moving backward through first track of the first playlist. Track names longer than tracks. . Play begins from the first track 32 characters or four pages are SEEK: Press to go to the next in the first folder and continues shortened. Parts of words on the ¨ track. Press and hold or press sequentially through all tracks in last page of text and the extension multiple times to continue moving each folder. When the last track of the filename does not display. forward through tracks. of the last folder has played, play continues from the first Preprogrammed Playlists s REV (Reverse): Press and track of the first folder. Preprogrammed playlists that hold to reverse playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume When play enters a new folder, the were created using WinAmp™, and the elapsed time of the file display does not automatically show MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ the new folder name unless the software can be accessed, however, displays. Release s REV to folder mode has been chosen as they cannot be edited using the resume playing. radio. These playlists are treated the default display. The new track \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press name displays. as special folders containing compressed audio song files. and hold to advance playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls volume and the elapsed time of the file extension and are stored on a file displays. Release \ FWD to USB device may be supported by the radio with a USB port. resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays. 7-24 Infotainment System

S c (Previous Folder): Press When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the begins playing files in order by second line between the arrows the softkey below S c to go to the artist. The current artist playing is and songs from the current album first track in the previous folder. shown on the second line of the begins to play. Once all songs from c T (Next Folder): Press the display. Once all songs by that artist that album have played, the player softkey below c T to go to the are played, the player moves to the moves to the next album in first track in the next folder. next artist in alphabetical order and alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing files by that artist. begins playing MP3 files from that RDM (Random): Files on the disc album. can be listened to in random, rather To listen to files by another artist, than sequential order. To use press the softkey located below To exit music navigator mode, press random, press the softkey under the either arrow tab. The disc goes to the softkey below the Back tab to RDM tab until Random Current Disc the next or previous artist in return to normal MP3 playback. displays to play songs in random alphabetical order. Continue pressing either softkey below the Connecting a USB Storage order. Press the same softkey again Device or iPod® to turn off random play. arrow tab until the artist displays. The USB Port can be used to h (Music Navigator): Press the To change from playback by artist to h playback by album: control an iPod or a USB storage softkey below to play files in device. order by artist or album. 1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab. To connect a USB storage device, The player scans the disc to sort the connect the device to the USB port files by artist and album ID3 tag 2. Press one of the softkeys below located in the center console. information. It can take several the album tab from the sort minutes to scan the disc depending screen. on the number of files on the disc. 3. Press the softkey below the The radio may begin playing while it back tab to return to the main is scanning in the background. music navigator screen. Infotainment System 7-25

To connect an iPod, connect one Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press end of the USB cable that came USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback with the iPod to the iPod’s dock The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced connector and connect the other volume. Release \ FWD to end to the USB port located in the storage device or an iPod using the resume playing. The elapsed time center console. If the vehicle is on radio buttons and knobs and display of the file displays. and the USB connection works, song information on the radio’s display. “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo 4 (Information): Press to display may appear on the iPod and iPod f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the appears on the radio's display. The selected track. SEEK: Press to go to the iPod music appears on the radio s © ’ start of the track, if more than ten display and begins playing. Using Softkeys to Control a seconds have played. Press and USB Storage Device or iPod The iPod charges while it is hold or press multiple times to connected to the vehicle if the continue moving backward through The five softkeys below the radio vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY tracks. display are used to control the or ON/RUN position. When the functions listed below. SEEK: Press to go to the next vehicle is turned off, the iPod ¨ track. Press and hold or press To use the softkeys: automatically powers off and will multiple times to continue moving not charge or draw power from the 1. Press the first or fifth softkey forward through tracks. vehicle's battery. below the radio display to s REV (Reverse): Press and display the functions listed If you have an older iPod model that hold to reverse playback quickly. below, or press the softkey is not supported, it can still be used Sound is heard at a reduced below the function if it is by connecting it to the Auxiliary currently displayed. Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm volume. Release s REV to 2. Press the softkey below the tab (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the resume playing. The elapsed time with the function on it to use that Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more of the file displays. information. function. 7-26 Infotainment System j (Pause): Press the softkey 4. Turn f to scroll through the files h (Music Navigator): Press the below j to pause the track. The in the selected folder. softkey below h to view and tab appears raised when pause is 5. Press f to select the file to be select a file on an iPod, using the being used. Press the softkey iPod's menu system. Files are played. below j again to resume playback. sorted by: To skip through large lists, the . Playlists Back: Press the softkey below the five softkeys can be used to back tab to go back to the main navigate in the following order: . Artists display screen on an iPod, or the . root directory on a USB storage . First softkey, first item in the list. Albums device. . Second softkey, 1% through the . Genres c (Folder View): Press the list each time the softkey is . Songs pressed. softkey below c to view the . Composers contents of the current folder on the . Third softkey, 5% through the list To select files: USB drive. To browse and select each time the softkey is pressed. files: . Fourth softkey, 10% through the 1. Press the softkey below h. list each time the softkey is 1. Press the softkey below c. f pressed. 2. Turn to scroll through the list f of menus. 2. Turn to scroll through the list . Fifth softkey, end of the list. of folders. 3. Press f to select the menu. 3. Press f to select the folder. 4. Turn f to scroll through the If there is more than one folder, folders or files in the repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the selected menu. folder is reached. 5. Press f to select the file to be played. Infotainment System 7-27

To skip through large lists, the five ' (Repeat Track): Press the MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) softkeys can be used to navigate in softkey below to repeat the following order: ' Format one track. The tab appears raised . First softkey, first item in the list. when Repeat Track is being used. The radio can play.mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a . Second softkey, 1% through the Shuffle Functionality list each time the softkey is CD-R or CD-RW disc. pressed. To use Shuffle: The USB port can play .mp3 and .wma files that are . Third softkey, 5% through the list Press the softkey below >, each time the softkey is pressed. 2, < or = to select stored on a USB storage device between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All as well as AAC files that are stored . Fourth softkey, 10% through the ® Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle on an iPod . list each time the softkey is Album, or Shuffle Folder. pressed. Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode (Shuffle Off): This is the Discs . Fifth softkey, end of the list. > default mode when a USB storage The radio plays discs that contain Repeat Functionality device or iPod is first connected. both uncompressed CD audio and To use Repeat: 2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle MP3/WMA files depending on which Songs): Shuffles all songs on the slot the disc is loaded into. Press the softkey below or " ' USB storage device or iPod. The DVD Player only reads to select between Repeat All and uncompressed audio and ignores Repeat Track. < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all songs in the current album on MP3/WMA files on a mixed " (Repeat All): Press the softkey an iPod. mode disc. below " to repeat all tracks. The = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all tab appears lowered when Repeat songs in the current folder on a USB All is being used. This is the default storage device. mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected. 7-28 Infotainment System

The CD Player reads both . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl If a disc contains both uncompressed audio and extension. uncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMA files on a mixed . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda MP3/WMA files, a folder under the mode disc. Uncompressd audio file extension. root directory called CD accesses is played before MP3/WMA files. all of the CD audio tracks on Press the CAT (category) button USB Supported File and Folder the disc. to toggle between uncompressed Structure Empty Folder audio and MP3/WMA files. The radio supports: Folders that do not contain files are . CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File Up to 700 folders. skipped, and the player advances to and Folder Structure . Up to 8 folders in depth. the next folder that contains files. The DVD Player supports: . Up to 65,535 files. No Folder . Up to 255 folders. . Folder and file names up to When the disc contains only . Up to 8 folders in depth. 64 bytes. compressed files, the files are . Up to 15 playlists. . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file located under the root folder. The extension. next and previous folder function . Up to 40 sessions. does not function on a disc that was . . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl AAC files stored on an iPod. recorded without folders or playlists. extension. . FAT16 When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda . FAT32 file extension. When the disc contains only Root Directory playlists and compressed audio The CD Player supports: The root directory of the disc is files, but no folders, all files are . Up to 512 files and folders. treated as a folder. If the root located under the root folder. . Up to 8 folders in depth. directory has compressed audio files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT on the radio. Infotainment System 7-29

The folder down and the folder up . Play begins from the first track Track names longer than buttons search playlists first and in the first folder and continues 32 characters or four pages are then goes to the root folder. When sequentially through all tracks in shortened. Parts of words on the the radio displays the name of the each folder. When the last track last page of text and the extension folder the radio displays ROOT. of the last folder has played, of the filename does not display. play continues from the first Order of Play track of the first folder. Preprogrammed Playlists Compressed audio files are When play enters a new folder, the Preprogrammed playlists that accessed in the following order: display does not automatically show were created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch , or Real Jukebox . Playlists. the new folder name unless the ™ ™ folder mode has been chosen as software can be accessed, however, . Files stored in the root directory. the default display. The new track they cannot be edited using the . Files stored in folders in the root name displays. radio. These playlists are treated directory. as special folders containing File System and Naming compressed audio song files. Tracks are played in the following The song name that displays is the order: Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls song name that is contained in the file extension and are stored on a . Play begins from the first track in ID3 tag. If the song name is not USB device may be supported by the first playlist and continues present in the ID3 tag, then the the radio with a USB port. sequentially through all tracks radio displays the file name without in each playlist. When the last the extension (such as .mp3) as the track of the last playlist has track name. played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist. 7-30 Infotainment System

Playing an MP3/WMA File s REV (Reverse): Press and RDM (Random): Files on the disc From a Disc (In Either the DVD hold to reverse playback quickly. can be listened to in random, rather or CD Slot) Sound is heard at a reduced volume than sequential order. To use and the elapsed time of the file random, press the softkey under the If a disc is inserted into the top DVD displays. Release s REV to RDM tab until Random Current Disc slot, the rear seat operator can turn displays to play songs in random resume playing. on the video screen and use the order. Press the same softkey again remote control to navigate the CD \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to turn off random play. (tracks only). and hold to advance playback h (Music Navigator): Press the f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced softkey below h to play files in files. volume and the elapsed time of the \ order by artist or album. © SEEK: Press to go to the file displays. Release FWD to start of the track, if more than resume playing. The elapsed time of The player scans the disc to sort the five seconds have played. Press to the file displays. files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It can take several go to the previous track if more then S c (Previous Folder): Press five seconds have played. Press minutes to scan the disc depending the softkey below S c to go to the on the number of files on the disc. and hold or press multiple times to first track in the previous folder. continue moving backward through The radio may begin playing while it tracks. c T (Next Folder): Press the is scanning in the background. c T ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next softkey below to go to the When the scan is finished, the disc track. Press and hold or press first track in the next folder. begins playing files in order by multiple times to continue moving artist. The current artist playing is forward through tracks. shown on the second line of the display. Once all songs by that artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist. Infotainment System 7-31

To listen to files by another artist, To exit music navigator mode, press The iPod charges while it is press the softkey located below the softkey below the Back tab to connected to the vehicle if the either arrow tab. The disc goes to return to normal MP3 playback. vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY the next or previous artist in or ON/RUN position. When the Connecting a USB Storage alphabetical order. Continue ® vehicle is turned off, the iPod pressing either softkey below the Device or iPod automatically powers off and will arrow tab until the artist displays. The USB Port can be used to not charge or draw power from the To change from playback by artist to control an iPod or a USB storage vehicle's battery. playback by album: device. If you have an older iPod model that 1. Press the softkey located below To connect a USB storage device, is not supported, it can still be used the Sort By tab. connect the device to the USB port by connecting it to the Auxiliary located in the center console. Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm 2. Press one of the softkeys below (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the To connect an iPod, connect one the album tab from the sort Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more screen. end of the USB cable that came information. with the iPod to the iPod’s dock 3. Press the softkey below the connector and connect the other back tab to return to the main end to the USB port located in the music navigator screen. center console. If the vehicle is on The album name displays on the and the USB connection works, second line between the arrows “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo and songs from the current album may appear on the iPod and iPod begins to play. Once all songs appears on the radio's display. The from that album have played, the iPod music appears on the radio’s player moves to the next album in display and begins playing. alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album. 7-32 Infotainment System

Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track. The The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced tab appears raised when pause storage device or an iPod using the volume. Release \ FWD to is being used. Press the softkey radio buttons and knobs and display resume playing. The elapsed time below j again to resume playback. song information on the radio’s of the file displays. display. Back: Press the softkey below the 4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the selected track. © SEEK: Press to go to the root directory on a USB storage start of the track, if more than Using Softkeys to Control a device. ten seconds have played. Press USB Storage Device or iPod c (Folder View): Press the and hold or press multiple times to softkey below c to view the continue moving backward through The five softkeys below the radio contents of the current folder on the tracks. display are used to control the functions listed below. USB drive. To browse and select ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next files: To use the softkeys: track. Press and hold or press c multiple times to continue moving 1. Press the first or fifth softkey 1. Press the softkey below . forward through tracks. below the radio display to 2. Turn f to scroll through the list s REV (Reverse): Press and display the functions listed of folders. hold to reverse playback quickly. below, or press the softkey Sound is heard at a reduced below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the folder. currently displayed. volume. Release s REV to If there is more than one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the resume playing. The elapsed time 2. Press the softkey below the tab folder is reached. of the file displays. with the function on it to use that function. Infotainment System 7-33

4. Turn f to scroll through the files h (Music Navigator): Press the To skip through large lists, the in the selected folder. softkey below h to view and five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: 5. Press f to select the file to be select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list. played. sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the To skip through large lists, the . Playlists list each time the softkey is five softkeys can be used to pressed. navigate in the following order: . Artists . Third softkey, 5% through the list . . Albums First softkey, first item in the list. each time the softkey is pressed. . . Genres Second softkey, 1% through the . Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the softkey is . Songs list each time the softkey is pressed. . Composers pressed. . Third softkey, 5% through the list . Fifth softkey, end of the list. each time the softkey is pressed. To select files: Repeat Functionality . Fourth softkey, 10% through the 1. Press the softkey below h. list each time the softkey is f To use Repeat: pressed. 2. Turn to scroll through the list of menus. Press the softkey below " or ' . Fifth softkey, end of the list. to select between Repeat All and 3. Press f to select the menu. Repeat Track. 4. Turn f to scroll through the " (Repeat All): Press the softkey folders or files in the below " to repeat all tracks. The selected menu. tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default 5. Press f to select the file to be mode when a USB storage device played. or iPod is first connected. 7-34 Infotainment System

' (Repeat Track): Press the Auxiliary Devices To use an auxiliary input device, softkey below to repeat one connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to ' The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm the radio's front auxiliary input jack. track. The tab appears raised when (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack located Repeat Track is being used. on the lower right side of the O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to Shuffle Functionality faceplate and for vehicles with a USB port, it is located in the center increase or decrease the volume To use Shuffle: console. of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments might have to Press the softkey below >, 2, Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) be made from the portable device if < or = to select between Auxiliary Input Jack the volume is not loud or soft Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ enough. Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, The auxiliary input jack is located on or Shuffle Folder. the lower right side of the faceplate. BAND: Press to listen to the radio This is not an audio output; do not when a portable audio device is > (Shuffle Off): This is the plug a headphone set into the front playing. The portable audio device default mode when a USB storage auxiliary input jack. Connect an continues playing, so you might device or iPod is first connected. auxiliary input device such as an want to stop it or turn it off. ® 2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle iPod , laptop computer, MP3 player, CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to Songs): Shuffles all songs on the CD player, or cassette tape player, select between CD, or Auxiliary. USB storage device or iPod. etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio . When a CD is in the player < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles listening. the CD icon and a message all songs in the current album on showing the disc and/or track an iPod. Drivers are encouraged to set up number displays. any auxiliary device while the = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all vehicle is in P (Park). See . If an auxiliary input device is not songs in the current folder on a USB Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 connected, “No Input Device storage device. for more information on driver Found” displays. distraction. Infotainment System 7-35

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): remote control to only navigate the USB Supported Devices Press to select between DVD, CD tracks through the remote . USB Flash Drives CD, or Auxiliary. control. . Portable USB Hard Drives . If an auxiliary input device is not See “Using the Auxiliary Input connected, “No Aux Input Jack(s)” later in this section, . Fifth generation or later iPod Device” displays. or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, . iPod nanos Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) . When a disc is in either slot, the . iPod touch DVD/CD text tab and a message System on page 7‑36 for more showing the track or chapter information. . iPod classic number displays. Using the USB Port Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the USB port. . If an auxiliary input device is not For vehicles with a USB port, the connected, and a disc is in both connector is located in the center Make sure the iPod has the latest the DVD slot and the CD slot the console. firmware from Apple® for proper DVD/CD AUX button only cycles operation. iPod firmware can be Radios with a USB port can control ® between the two sources and updated using the latest iTunes a USB storage device or an iPod® does not indicate “No Aux Input application. See www.apple.com/ using the radio buttons and knobs. Device”. itunes. See MP3 (Radio with CD and Radio . If a front auxiliary input device is with CD/USB) on page 7‑21 or For help with identifying your iPod, connected, the DVD/CD AUX MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) on go to www.apple.com/support. button cycles through all page 7‑27 for information about available options. how to connect and control a USB If a disc is inserted into top DVD storage device or an iPod. slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the 7-36 Infotainment System

Rear Seat In severe or extreme weather Headphones conditions the RSE system might or The RSE includes two 2-channel Infotainment might not work until the temperature wireless headphones that are is within the operating range. The dedicated to this system. Channel 1 operating range for the RSE system Rear Seat Entertainment is dedicated to the video screen, is above −4°F (−20°C) or below while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA (RSE) System 140°F (60°C). If the temperature of selections. These headphones are The vehicle may have a DVD Rear the vehicle is outside of this range, used to listen to media such as Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. heat or cool the vehicle until the CDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, The RSE system works with the temperature is within the operating radio, any auxiliary source vehicle's audio system. The DVD range of the RSE system. connected to A/V jacks, or the player is part of the front radio. The auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle RSE system includes a radio with a Parental Control has this feature. The wireless DVD player, a video display screen, The RSE system may have a headphones have an On/Off button, audio/video jacks, two wireless Parental Control feature, depending channel 1/2 switch, and a volume headphones, and a remote control. on the radio. To enable Parental control. Switch the headphones to See Operation on page 7 2 for ‑ Control, press and hold the radio Off when not in use. more information on the vehicle's power button for more than audio/DVD system. two seconds to stop all system Push the power button to turn on features such as: radio, video the headphones. An indicator light Before Driving screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While located on the headphones comes The RSE is designed for rear seat Parental Control is on, Q displays. on. If the light does not come on, passengers only. The driver cannot the batteries might need to be safely view the video screen while When the radio is turned back on, replaced. Intermittent sound or static driving and should not try to do so. Parental Control is unlocked. on the headphones can also be an indication of weak batteries. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for more information. Infotainment System 7-37

The headphones may automatically on the upper right side, above the Battery Replacement turn off after four hours of ear pad and should be positioned To change the batteries on the continuous use. on the right ear. headphones: To adjust the volume on the Notice: Do not store the 1. Turn the screw to loosen the headphones, use the volume control headphones in heat or direct battery door located on the left located on the right side. sunlight. This could damage the side of the headphones. Slide Infrared transmitters are located at headphones and repairs will not the battery door open. be covered by the warranty. the rear of the RSE overhead 2. Replace the two batteries in the console. The headphones shut off Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the compartment. Make sure that automatically to save the battery they are installed correctly, using power if the RSE system and RSA headphones stored in a cool, dry place. the diagram on the inside of the are shut off or if the headphones are battery compartment. out of range of the transmitters for If the foam ear pads attached to more than three minutes. Moving too the headphones become worn or 3. Replace the battery door and far forward or stepping out of the damaged, the pads can be replaced tighten the door screw. vehicle, can cause the headphones separately from the headphone set. If the headphones are to be stored to lose the audio signal. See your dealer/retailer for more for a long period of time, remove the For optimal audio performance, the information. batteries and keep them in a cool, headphones must be worn correctly. Headphones should be stored in the dry place. Headphones should be worn with front floor console and not in the the headband over the top of the front seat back pocket. Headphone head for best audio reception. damage can occur when the second The symbol L (Left) appears on the row seats are folded forward. upper left side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears 7-38 Infotainment System

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks are color coded to How to Change the RSE Video match typical home entertainment Screen Settings system equipment. The yellow The screen display mode (normal, jack (A) is for the video input. The full, and zoom), screen brightness, white jack (B) is for the left audio and setup menu language can be input. The red jack (C) is for the changed from the on screen setup right audio input. menu by using the remote control. Power for auxiliary devices is not To change a setting: supplied by the radio system. 1. Press z. To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external 2. Use n, q, p, o and r to auxiliary device to the color-coded navigate and use the A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary setup menu. device and the video screen power z The A/V jacks, located on the rear on. If the video screen is in the DVD 3. Press again to remove the of the floor console, allow audio player mode, pressing the AUX setup menu from the screen. or video signals to be connected (auxiliary) button on the remote Audio Output from an auxiliary device such as a control, switches the video screen camcorder or a video game unit from the DVD player mode to the Audio from the DVD player or to the RSE system. Adapter auxiliary device. The radio can listen auxiliary inputs can be heard connectors or cables (not supplied) to the audio of the connected through the following sources: might be required to connect the auxiliary device by sourcing to . Wireless Headphones auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. auxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices on Refer to the manufacturer s . ’ page 7‑34 for more information. Vehicle Speakers instructions for proper usage. . Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system, if the vehicle has this feature. Infotainment System 7-39

The RSE system always transmits Video Screen Notice: Avoid directly touching the audio signal to the wireless the video screen, as damage may The video screen is located in the headphones, if there is audio occur. See Cleaning the Video overhead console. When the video “ available. See Headphones earlier Screen later in this section for “ ” screen is not in use, push it up into ” in this section for more information. more information. its locked position. The DVD player is capable of To use the video screen: Remote Control outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA 1. Push the release button located To use the remote control, aim it at system, if the vehicle has this on the overhead console. the transmitter window at the rear of feature. The DVD player can be the overhead console and press the 2. Move the screen to the desired desired button. Direct sunlight or selected as an audio source on the position. RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio very bright light could affect the (RSA) System on page 7‑44 for If a DVD is playing and the screen ability of the RSE transmitter to more information. is raised to its locked position, the receive signals from the remote screen remains on; this is normal, control. If the remote control does When a device is connected to the and the DVD continues to play not seem to be working, the A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary through the previous audio source. batteries might need to be replaced. input jack, if the vehicle has this P See “Battery Replacement” later in feature, the rear seat passengers Press on the remote control or eject the disc to turn off the screen. this section. Objects blocking the are able to hear audio from the line of sight could also affect the auxiliary device through the wireless The infrared receivers for the function of the remote control. or wired headphones. The front seat wireless headphones and the passengers are able to listen to remote control are located at the playback from this device through rear of the overhead console. the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio. 7-40 Infotainment System

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD v (Title): Press to return the DVD c (Stop): Press to stop playing, slot, the remote control O button to the main menu of the DVD. This rewinding, or fast forwarding a can be used to turn on the video function could vary for each disc. DVD. Press twice to return to the screen display and start the disc. y (Main Menu): Press to access beginning of the DVD. The radio can also turn on the video the DVD menu. The DVD menu is s (Play/Pause): Press to start screen display. See Operation on different on every DVD. Use the playing a DVD. Press while a DVD page 7‑2 for more information. navigation arrows to move the is playing to pause it. Press again to Notice: Storing the remote cursor around the DVD menu. After continue playing the DVD. control in a hot area or in direct making a selection press the enter When the DVD is playing, sunlight can damage it, and the button. This button only operates depending on the radio, play repairs will not be covered by the when using a DVD. may be slowed down by warranty. Storage in extreme cold n , q, p, o (Menu Navigation s [ can weaken the batteries. Keep pressing then . The DVD Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to continues playing in a slow play the remote control stored in a navigate through a menu. cool, dry place. mode. Depending on the radio, r (Enter): Press to select perform reverse slow play by Remote Control Buttons the choice that is highlighted in pressing s then r . To cancel O (Power): Press to turn the any menu. slow play mode, press s again. video screen on and off. z (Display Menu): Press to adjust t (Previous Track/Chapter): the brightness, screen display mode P (Illumination): Press to turn the Press to return to the start of the (normal, full, or zoom), and display remote control backlight on. The current track or chapter. Press the language menu. backlight automatically times out again to go to the previous track after seven to ten seconds if no q (Return): Press to exit the or chapter. This button might not other button is pressed while the current active menu and return to work when the DVD is playing the backlight is on. the previous menu. This button copyright information or the operates only when the display previews. menu or a DVD menu is active. Infotainment System 7-41 u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to e (Audio): Press to change audio \ (Clear): Press within go to the beginning of the next tracks on DVDs that have this three seconds after entering a chapter or track. This button might feature when the DVD is playing. numeric selection, to clear all not work when the DVD is playing The format and content of this numerical inputs. the copyright information or the function vary for each disc. } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press previews. { (Subtitles): Press to turn to select chapter or track numbers r (Fast Reverse): Press to ON/OFF subtitles and to move greater than nine. Press this button quickly reverse the DVD or CD. through subtitle options when a before entering the number. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, DVD is playing. The format and If the remote control becomes lost press s. To stop fast reversing content of this function vary for or damaged, a new universal each disc. a DVD audio or CD, release r. remote control can be purchased. This button might not work when AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch If this happens, make sure the the DVD is playing the copyright the system between the DVD player universal remote control uses a ® information or the previews. and an auxiliary source. Toshiba code set. [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast d (Camera): Press to change forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast camera angles on DVDs that have forwarding a DVD video, press s. this feature when a DVD is playing. The format and content of this To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio function vary for each disc. or CD, release [. This button might not work when the DVD is playing 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): the copyright information or the The numeric keypad provides the previews. capability of direct chapter or track number selection. 7-42 Infotainment System

Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart To change the remote control Problem Recommended Action batteries: No power. The ignition might not be turned 1. Slide the rear cover back, on the ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY. remote control. The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in 2. Replace the two batteries in the There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the compartment. Make sure that and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote they are installed correctly, using looks stretched out. control. the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input or scrolls. connections at both devices. 3. Replace the battery cover. The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no If the remote control is to be stored obstruction between the remote for a long period of time, remove the control and the transmitter window. batteries and keep them in a cool, Check the batteries to make sure dry place. they are not dead or installed incorrectly. Infotainment System 7-43

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message depends on which radio the vehicle After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed has. The video screen might display Play but sometimes the DVD starts one time, the DVD player resumes one of the following: where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was beginning. stopped. If the stop button was Disc Load/Eject Error: This pressed two times the DVD player message displays when there are begins to play from the beginning of disc load or eject problems. the DVD. Disc Format Error: This message The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen displays if the disc is inserted with there is no picture or sound. is in the auxiliary source mode. the disc label wrong side up, or if Check the auxiliary input the disc is damaged. connections at both devices. Disc Region Error: This message Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low displays if the disc is not from a audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and correct region. interference from cellular telephone No Disc Inserted: This message towers or by using a cellular displays if no disc is present when telephone in the vehicle. the Z EJECT button is pressed on Check that the headphones are the radio. on correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones. I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for headphones. assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player. 7-44 Infotainment System

DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not included) plugged Video distortion can occur when System into the jacks on the RSA. If the operating cellular phones, scanners, For vehicles with Rear Seat Audio vehicle has this feature, audio can CB radios, Global Position Systems (RSA), rear seat passengers can also be heard on Channel 2 of the (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, listen to and control any of the wireless headphones. or walkie talkies. music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, The audio system mutes the rear It might be necessary to turn off the or other auxiliary sources. The rear speakers when the RSA audio is DVD player when operating one of seat passengers can only control active through the headphones. these devices in or near the vehicle. the music sources the front seat To listen to an iPod or portable *Excludes the OnStar® System. passengers are not listening to (except on some radios where dual audio device through the RSA, Cleaning the RSE Overhead control is allowed). For example, attach the iPod or portable audio Console rear seat passengers can control a device to the front auxiliary input CD and listen to it through the (if available), located on the front When cleaning the RSE overhead headphones, while the driver listens audio system. Turn the iPod on, console surface, use only a clean to the radio through the front then choose the front auxiliary input cloth dampened with clean water. speakers. The rear seat passengers with the RSA SRCE button. Cleaning the Video Screen have control of the volume for each set of headphones. Use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when The RSA functions operate even directly touching or cleaning the when the main radio is off. The front screen, as damage could result. audio system displays X when the RSA is on, and disappears from the display when it is off. Infotainment System 7-45

While listening to a disc, press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press © to go back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played). This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press © or ¨ to perform a cursor up or down on the P (Power): Press to turn the RSA © ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the menu. Hold © or ¨ to perform a on or off. previous or to the next station and cursor left or right on the menu. stay there. This function is inactive, Volume: Turn to increase or to PROG (Program): Press to go to with some radios, if the front seat decrease the volume of the wired the next preset radio station or passengers are listening to the headphones. The left knob controls channel set on the main radio. radio. the left headphones and the right This function is inactive, with some knob controls the right headphones. Press and hold © or ¨ until radios, if the front seat passengers SRCE (Source): Press to select the display flashes to tune to an are listening to the radio. between the radio (AM/FM/XM™), individual station. The display stops CD, and if the vehicle has these flashing after the buttons have features, DVD, front auxiliary, and not been pushed for more than rear auxiliary. two seconds. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. 7-46 Infotainment System

When a CD or DVD audio disc is Phone Noise: Keep interior noise levels to playing, press PROG to go to the a minimum. The system may not beginning of the CD or DVD audio. recognize voice commands if there This function is inactive, with some Bluetooth is too much background noise. radios, if the front seat passengers Vehicles with a Bluetooth system When to Speak: A short tone are listening to the disc. can use a Bluetooth capable cell sounds after the system responds When a disc is playing in the CD or phone with a Hands Free Profile to indicating when it is waiting for a DVD changer, press PROG to make and receive phone calls. The voice command. Wait until the tone select the next disc, if multiple discs system can be used while the key is and then speak. are loaded. This function is inactive, in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The range of the Bluetooth How to Speak: Speak clearly in a with some radios, if the front seat calm and natural voice. passengers are listening to the disc. system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft.). Not all phones support all functions, Audio System When a DVD video menu is being and not all phones are guaranteed displayed, press PROG to perform to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth the ENTER menu function. system. See gm.com/bluetooth for system, sound comes through the more information on compatible vehicle's front audio system phones. speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system Voice Recognition volume knob, during a call, to The Bluetooth system uses voice change the volume level. The recognition to interpret voice adjusted volume level remains in commands to dial phone numbers memory for later calls. To prevent and name tags. missed calls, a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low. Infotainment System 7-47

Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information: Pairing a Phone Use the buttons located on the . Up to five cell phones can be 1. Press and hold b g for steering wheel to operate the paired to the in‐vehicle Bluetooth two seconds. The system in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. system. responds with “Ready” followed See Steering Wheel Controls on . The pairing process is disabled by a tone. page 5‑3 for more information. when the vehicle is moving. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system b g (Push To Talk): Press to . The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system responds with “Bluetooth ready” answer incoming calls, to confirm automatically links with the followed by a tone. system information, and to start first available paired cell phone speech recognition. 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds in the order the phone was with instructions and a four digit c x (Phone On Hook): Press to paired. PIN number. The PIN number end a call, reject a call, or to cancel . Only one paired cell phone can will be used in Step 4. an operation. be connected to the in‐vehicle 4. Start the Pairing process on the Pairing Bluetooth system at a time. cell phone that will be paired to . the vehicle. Reference the cell A Bluetooth enabled cell phone Pairing should only need to be phone manufacturers user guide must be paired to the in vehicle completed once, unless changes ‐ for information on this process. Bluetooth system first and then to the pairing information have connected to the vehicle before it been made or the phone is Locate the device named can be used. See the cell phone deleted. “General Motors” in the list on manufacturers user guide for To link to a different paired phone, the cellular phone and follow the Bluetooth functions before pairing see Linking to a Different Phone instructions on the cell phone to the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone later in this section. enter the four digit PIN number is not connected, calls will be made that was provided in Step 3. using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner's guide for more information. 7-48 Infotainment System

5. The system prompts for a name 3. Say “List”. The system lists all 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. for the phone. Use a name that the paired Bluetooth devices. The system responds with “OK, best describes the phone. This If a phone is connected to the deleting ”. name will be used to indicate vehicle, the system will say “Is Linking to a Different Phone which phone is connected. The connected” after the connected system then confirms the name phone. 1. Press and hold b g for provided. Deleting a Paired Phone two seconds. The system 6. The system responds with responds with “Ready” followed “ has been 1. Press and hold b g for by a tone. two seconds. The system successfully paired” after the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with Ready followed pairing process is complete. “ ” responds with “Bluetooth ready” by a tone. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for followed by a tone. 2. Say Bluetooth . The system additional phones to be paired. “ ” 3. Say “Change phone”. The responds with Bluetooth ready “ ” system responds with “Please Listing All Paired and Connected followed by a tone. Phones wait while I search for other 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks phones”. 1. Press and hold g for which phone to delete followed b . If another phone is found, two seconds. The system by a tone. the response will be responds with Ready followed “ ” 4. Say the name of the phone to “ is now by a tone. be deleted. If the phone name connected”. 2. Say Bluetooth . The system is unknown, use the List “ ” “ ” . If another phone is not responds with “Bluetooth ready” command for a list of all paired found, the original phone followed by a tone. phones. The system responds remains connected. with “Would you like to delete ? Yes or No” followed by a tone. Infotainment System 7-49

Storing Name Tags 3. Say the complete phone number 5. Say a name tag for the phone to be stored at once with no number. The name tag is The system can store up to thirty pauses. recorded and the system phone numbers as name tags that responds with About to store are shared between the Bluetooth . If the system recognizes “ . Does that and OnStar systems. the number it responds with OK, Storing and repeats sound OK?”. The system uses the following “ ” the phone number. . If the name tag does not commands to store and retrieve sound correct, say No and phone numbers: . If the system is unsure it “ ” recognizes the phone repeat Step 5. . Store number, it responds with . If the name tag sounds . Digit Store “Store” and repeats the correct, say “Yes” and the . Directory number followed by “Please name tag is stored. After say yes or no”. If the the number is stored the Using the Store Command number is correct, say system returns to the The store command allows a phone “Yes”. If the number is not main menu. number to be stored without correct, say “No”. The entering the digits individually. system will ask for the number to be re‐entered. 1. Press and hold b g for 4. After the system stores the two seconds. The system phone number, it responds with responds with “Ready” followed “Please say the name tag” by a tone. followed by a tone. 2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store, number please” followed by a tone. 7-50 Infotainment System

Using the Digit Store Command 4. After the complete number has Using the Directory Command The digit store command allows a been entered, say “Store”. The The directory command lists all of phone number to be stored by system responds with “Please the name tags stored by the system. entering the digits individually. say the name tag” followed by To use the directory command: a tone. 1. Press and hold b g for 5. Say a name tag for the phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system number. The name tag is two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed recorded and the system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. responds with “About to store by a tone. 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system . Does that 2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with “Please say the sound OK?”. responds with “Directory” and first digit to store” followed by . If the name tag does not then plays back all of the stored a tone. sound correct, say “No” and name tags. When the list is 3. Say the first digit to be stored. repeat Step 5. complete, the system returns to the main menu. The system will repeat back the . If the name tag sounds digit it heard followed by a tone. correct, say “Yes” and the Deleting Name Tags Continue entering digits until the name tag is stored. After number to be stored is complete. The system uses the following the number is stored the commands to delete name tags: . If an unwanted number is system returns to the recognized by the system, main menu. . Delete say “Clear” at any time to . Delete all name tags clear the last number. Using the Delete Command . To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted. say “Verify” at any time and the system will repeat them. Infotainment System 7-51

To use the delete command: Using the Delete All Name Tags Making a Call Command 1. Press and hold b g for Calls can be made using the two seconds. The system The delete all name tags command following commands: deletes all stored phone book name responds with “Ready” followed . Dial by a tone. tags and route name tags for OnStar (if present). . Digit Dial 2. Say “Delete”. The system . responds with “Delete, please To use the delete all name tags Call command: say the name tag” followed by . Re‐dial a tone. 1. Press and hold b g for Using the Dial Command 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. two seconds. The system The system responds with responds with “Ready” followed 1. Press and hold b g for “Would you like to delete, ? Please say yes or no”. 2. Say Delete all name tags . The “ ” “ ” by a tone. . If the name tag is correct, system responds with “You are say “Yes” to delete the about to delete all name tags 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds name tag. The system stored in your phone directory with “Dial using ”. responds with “OK, deleting and your route destination “Number please” followed by , returning to directory. Are you sure you want a tone. the main menu.” to do this? Please say yes or no. . If the name tag is incorrect, ” say “No”. The system . Say “Yes” to delete all responds with “No. OK, let's name tags. try again, please say the . Say “No” to cancel the name tag.” function and return to the main menu. 7-52 Infotainment System

3. Say the entire number without Using the Digit Dial Command 4. Continue entering digits until the pausing. number to be dialed is complete. 1. Press and hold b g for After the whole number has . If the system recognizes two seconds. The system the number, it responds been entered, say “Dial”. The responds with “Ready” followed system responds with “OK, with “OK, Dialing” and dials by a tone. the number. Dialing” and dials the number. 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system . If an unwanted number is . If the system does not responds with “Digit dial using recognized by the system, recognize the number, it , please say the confirms the numbers say “Clear” at any time to first digit to dial” followed by clear the last number. followed by a tone. If the a tone. number is correct, say . To hear all of the numbers “Yes”. The system responds 3. Say the digit to be dialed one at recognized by the system, with “OK, Dialing” and dials a time. Following each digit, the say “Verify” at any time and the number. If the number system will repeat back the digit the system will repeat them. is not correct, say “No”. it heard followed by a tone. The system will ask for the Using the Call Command number to be re‐entered. 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using . Please say the name tag” followed by a tone. Infotainment System 7-53

3. Say the name tag of the person Using the Re‐dial Command Call Waiting to call. 1. Press and hold b g for Call waiting must be supported on . If the system clearly two seconds. The system the Bluetooth phone and enabled by recognizes the name tag it responds with “Ready” followed the wireless service carrier to work. responds with “OK, calling, by a tone. ” and dials the . Press b g to answer an number. 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The incoming call when another call system responds with “Re‐dial is active. The original call is . If the system is unsure it using ” and dials placed on hold. recognizes the right name the last number called from the tag, it confirms the name connected Bluetooth phone. . Press b g again to return to the tag followed by a tone. original call. If the name tag is correct, Once connected, the person called . To ignore the incoming call, say “Yes”. The system will be heard through the audio responds with OK, calling, speakers. continue with the original call “ with no action. ” and dials the Receiving a Call number. If the name tag is . Press c x to disconnect the When an incoming call is received, not correct, say “No”. The current call and switch to the call the audio system mutes and a ring system will ask for the on hold. name tag to be re‐entered. tone is heard in the vehicle. Once connected, the person called . Press b g and begin speaking will be heard through the audio to answer the call. speakers. . Press c x to ignore a call. 7-54 Infotainment System

Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone Three‐Way Calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the and enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call vehicle: carrier to work. cannot hear them. 1. Press b g . The system 1. While on a call press b g. The To Mute a call responds with “Ready” followed system responds with Ready by a tone. “ ” 1. Press . The system followed by a tone. b g responds with “Ready” followed 2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system 2. Say “Three‐way call”. by a tone. responds with “Transferring call” The system responds with and the audio will switch from 2. Say Mute Call . The system “Three‐way call, please say dial “ ” the vehicle to the cell phone. or call . responds with “Call muted”. ” To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle 3. Use the dial or call command to To Cancel Mute Bluetooth System dial the number of the third party 1. Press b g . The system The cellular phone must be paired to be called. responds with “Ready” followed and connected with the Bluetooth 4. Once the call is connected, by a tone. system before a call can be transferred. The connection process press b g to link all the callers 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. together. The system responds with can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or “Resuming call”. Ending a Call ACC/ACCESSORY position. Transferring a Call Press c x to end a call. During a call with the audio on the Audio can be transferred between cell phone, press b g for more than the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and two seconds. The audio switches the cell phone. from the cell phone to the vehicle. Infotainment System 7-55

Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency 3. Say the number to send. Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to (DTMF) Tones . If the system clearly the voice recognition commands on The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can recognizes the number it the cell phone. See the cell phone send numbers and numbers stored responds with “OK, Sending manufacturers user guide to see if as name tags during a call. This is Number” and the dial tones the cell phone supports this feature. used when calling a menu driven are sent and the call This feature can be used to verbally phone system. Account numbers continues. access contacts stored in the cell can be programmed into the . If the system is not sure it phone. phonebook for retrieval during menu recognized the number driven calls. 1. Press and hold b g for properly, it responds “Dial two seconds. The system Sending a Number During a Call Number, Please say yes or no? followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed ” by a tone. 1. Press b g . The system If the number is correct, say responds with “Ready” followed “Yes”. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system by a tone. with “OK, Sending Number” responds with “Bluetooth ready” and the dial tones are sent 2. Say Dial . The system responds followed by a tone. “ ” and the call continues. with “Say a number to send 3. Say “Voice”. The system tones” followed by a tone. responds with “OK, accessing ”. . The cell phone's normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone's operating instructions. 7-56 Infotainment System

Sending a Stored Name Tag . If the system is not sure it Other Information During a Call recognized the name tag The Bluetooth® word mark and properly, it responds “Dial ® 1. Press b g. The system , Please say logos are owned by the Bluetooth responds with “Ready” followed yes or no?” followed by a SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by a tone. tone. If the name tag is by General Motors is under license. correct, say Yes . The Other trademarks and trade names 2. Say “Send name tag.” The “ ” system responds with OK, are those of their respective owners. system responds with “Say a “ Sending and name tag to send tones” ” See Radio Frequency Statement on followed by a tone. the dial tones are sent and page 13‑16 for FCC information. the call continues. 3. Say the name tag to send. Clearing the System . If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it Unless information is deleted out of responds with “OK, Sending the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it ” and the dial will be retained indefinitely. This tones are sent and the call includes all saved name tags in the continues. phonebook and phone pairing information. For information on how to delete this information, see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags. Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic Climate Control System Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with Dual Automatic Climate Control this system. System ...... 8-1 Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) ...... 8-7 Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) ...... 8-8 Air Vents Air Vents ...... 8-9

A. Fan Control H. Display B. AUTO I. Power (On/Off) C. Defrost J. Rear Window Defogger D. Recirculation K. Air Conditioning E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) L. PASS (Passenger) F. Air Delivery Mode Control M. Passenger Side Temperature G. Driver Side Temperature Control Control 8-2 Climate Controls

Display Function Automatic Operation quickly cool the vehicle. The recirculation indicator Each time the temperature, mode, AUTO (Automatic): The system light will come on. or fan control buttons are pressed, automatically controls the inside the climate control display shows temperature, the air delivery, and 2. Set the temperature for the that function along with the inside the fan speed. driver and passenger. temperature setting. The outside To use automatic mode: To find a comfortable setting, temperature is displayed on the start with a 22°C (73°F) 1. Press the AUTO button. instrument panel cluster. temperature setting and allow O (On/Off): Press to turn the When AUTO is selected, the about 20 minutes for the climate control system on or off. current temperature(s) selected system to regulate. Use the While the system is off, outside air and AUTO is shown on the driver's side or passenger side still enters through the floor outlets, display. The current air delivery temperature buttons to adjust but the air delivery mode can be mode and fan speed also the temperature setting as adjusted. appear for approximately necessary. The system will five seconds. The climate control system will also remain at the selected setting. turn on if either the fan control, When AUTO is selected, the air Choosing the warmest or coolest defrost, AUTO, or air conditioning conditioning and air inlet are temperatures does not cause the buttons are pressed. automatically controlled. The air vehicle to heat or cool more conditioning runs when the quickly. outside temperature is over To avoid blowing cold air in cold 4°C (40°F). The system is weather, the system delays automatically set to outside air, turning on the fan until warm unless it is hot outside and air is available. Press the fan then the air inlet changes to control to override this delay and recirculation mode to help select the fan speed. Climate Controls 8-3

Temperature Control PASS (Passenger): Press to set H / G (Air Delivery Mode The driver and passenger side the passenger temperature to match Control): Press to change the temperature buttons are used to the driver temperature setting. The direction of the airflow in the vehicle. PASS indicator will turn off. When adjust the temperature of the air Repeatedly press H or G until the the passenger temperature setting coming through the system. The desired mode appears on the is different than the driver setting, temperature can be adjusted even display. Pressing a mode button the PASS indicator comes on. if the system is turned off since while the system is off changes the outside air still enters the vehicle, Manual Operation air delivery mode without turning the unless the recirculation mode is system on. Press a mode button selected. See “Recirculation” later in The air delivery mode or fan speed while in automatic control to place this section. can be manually adjusted. the system into manual control. D C Driver Side Temperature / (Fan Control): Press to The air delivery mode setting still Control: Press the + or − buttons increase or decrease the fan speed. displays, but the word AUTO no to increase or decrease the driver Pressing D or C while in automatic longer displays, and the AUTO side temperature. The driver side control places the fan speed under button indicator light turns off. temperature display will show the manual control. (Vent): Air is directed to the temperature setting. H The air delivery mode remains in instrument panel outlets. Passenger Side Temperature automatic control. The fan setting (Bi-Level): Air is divided Control: Press the + or − buttons ) still displays, but the word AUTO between the instrument panel and to increase or decrease the no longer displays, and the AUTO floor outlets. Some air is directed passenger side temperature. button indicator light turns off. towards the windshield and side The passenger side display will window outlets. Cooler air is show the temperature setting. directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. 8-4 Climate Controls

6 (Floor): Air is directed to the the vehicle. The air conditioning Air Conditioning system runs automatically in this floor outlets, with some of the air (Air Conditioning): Press to setting, unless the outside # directed to the windshield, side turn the air conditioning (A/C) on temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). window, and second row floor and off. An indicator light comes on outlets. In this mode, the system Do not drive the vehicle until all the when A/C is on. uses outside air. windows are clear. The A/C does not work when the - (Defog): This mode clears the While in defrost mode, if the PASS outside temperature is below 4°C windows of fog or moisture. Air is button is pressed, the PASS button (40°F). If # is pressed the indicator directed to the windshield, floor indicator flashes three times to outlets, and side window vents. flashes three times and turns off to show that the passenger climate show that the A/C mode is not When this mode is selected, the control system cannot be activated. system turns off recirculation and available. If the A/C is on and the If the passenger temperature outside temperature drops below a runs the air conditioning compressor buttons are adjusted while in unless the outside temperature is temperature which is too cool for air defrost mode, the driver conditioning to be effective, the A/C less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive temperature indicator will change. the vehicle until all the windows are indicator turns off to show that the The passenger temperature will A/C mode has been canceled. clear. not be displayed. On hot days, open the windows 0 (Defrost): Press to turn the When returning to bi-level, vent, defrost on or off. This mode quickly briefly to let hot inside air escape. or floor mode, the previous This helps reduce the time it takes clears the windshield of fog or frost. temperature settings displays in Air is directed to the windshield, for the interior of the vehicle to place of any change made while in cool down. side window, and floor vents. In this defrost mode. mode, outside air is pulled inside The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal. Climate Controls 8-5

@ (Recirculation): Press to turn REAR: Press to turn the rear For vehicles with heated outside the recirculation mode on or off. heating and air conditioning on or rearview mirrors, fog or frost is An indicator light comes on when off. See Rear Climate Control cleared from the surface of the recirculation is on. When the engine System (Rear Climate Control Only) mirror when the rear window defog is turned off, the recirculation mode on page 8‑7 or Rear Climate button is pressed. automatically turns off and must be Control System (Rear Climate with Notice: Do not use a razor blade re‐selected when the engine is Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑8. or sharp object to clear the inside turned on again. Rear Window Defogger rear window. Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid This mode recirculates and helps The rear window defogger uses a to quickly cool the air inside the lines in the rear glass. These warming grid to remove fog from the actions may damage the rear vehicle. It can be used to prevent rear window. outside air and odors from entering defogger. Repairs would not be the vehicle. < (Rear Window Defogger): covered by your warranty. Press to turn the rear window The recirculation mode cannot be defogger on or off. The rear window used with floor, defog, or defrosting defogger stays on for about modes. If recirculation is selected in 10 minutes, before turning off. these modes, the indicator flashes The defogger also turns off when three times and turns off. The air the engine is turned off. Do not drive conditioning compressor also comes the vehicle until all the windows are on when this mode is activated. clear. While in recirculation mode the windows can fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed. 8-6 Climate Controls

Sensors There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by The interior temperature sensor adjusting the temperature, fan located on the instrument panel to speed, and the air delivery mode. The solar sensor, located in the the right of the steering column, The system may also supply cooler defrost grille in the middle of the measures the temperature of the air air to the side of the vehicle facing instrument panel, monitors the solar inside the vehicle. the sun. The recirculation mode will heat. Do not cover the solar sensor also be used as needed to maintain or the system will not work properly. cool outlet temperatures. Climate Controls 8-7

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airflow Control Only) according to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted. Fan Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob to 9 to turn the fan off. Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airflow temperature. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front to the desired mode to change the airflow direction. B. Temperature Control climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or H (Vent): Air is directed through C. Air Delivery Mode Control off. An indicator comes on when the the overhead outlets. rear system is on. The system also For vehicles with the rear climate ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed control system, the controls are turns on if any of the rear controls are adjusted. through the rear floor outlets, as located on the rear of the center well as the overhead outlets. console. The system can also be Mimic Mode: This mode matches controlled with the front controls. the rear climate control to the front 6 (Floor): Air is directed through climate control settings. It comes on the floor outlets. The rear system when REAR is pressed. floor outlets are located under the third row seats. 8-8 Climate Controls

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate control to the front Seat Audio) climate control settings. It comes on when REAR is pressed. Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airflow according to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted. DC (Fan Control): Press the fan up or down buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Temperature Control: Press + or − to increase or decrease the air temperature. The temperature A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front settings will display in climate control system to turn the B. Air Delivery Mode Control 0 12 increments, going from the rear climate control system on or ‐ coolest (0) to the warmest (12) C. Temperature Control off. The system also turns on if any C setting. For vehicles with the rear climate of the rear controls, except for the N control system, the controls are are pressed. An indicator comes on (Air Delivery Mode Control): located on the rear of the center when the rear system is on. Press to manually change the console. direction of the airflow. Repeatedly The system can also be turned off, press the button until the desired by pressing and holding the C mode appears on the display. button. Climate Controls 8-9

. Keep the path under all seats (Vent): Air is directed through H Air Vents clear of objects to help circulate the overhead outlets. Use the slider switch in the center of the air inside the vehicle more ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed the outlet, to change the direction of effectively. through the rear floor outlets, as the air flow. Use the thumbwheel . If fogging reoccurs while in vent well as the overhead outlets. near the outlet to control the amount or bi-level modes with mild 6 (Floor): Air is directed through of air flow or to shut off the airflow. temperature throughout the the floor outlets. The rear system Keep all outlets open whenever vehicle, turn on the air floor outlets are located under the possible for best system conditioner to reduce windshield third row seats. performance. fogging. Operation Tips . Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that can block the flow of air into the vehicle. . Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. 8-10 Climate Controls

2 NOTES Driving and Operating 9-1

Shifting Into Park ...... 9-21 Object Detection Systems Driving and Shifting Out of Park ...... 9-22 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-35 Operating Parking Over Things Rear Vision That Burn ...... 9-23 Camera (RVC) ...... 9-36 Engine Exhaust Fuel Driving Information Engine Exhaust ...... 9-23 Fuel ...... 9-42 Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 Running the Vehicle While Recommended Fuel ...... 9-42 Drunk Driving ...... 9-2 Parked ...... 9-24 Gasoline Specifications ...... 9-42 Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 California Fuel Braking ...... 9-3 Automatic Transmission Requirements ...... 9-43 Steering ...... 9-4 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-24 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-43 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Manual Mode ...... 9-26 Fuel Additives ...... 9-43 Loss of Control ...... 9-6 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-27 Filling the Tank ...... 9-45 Driving on Wet Roads ...... 9-7 Drive Systems Filling a Portable Fuel Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-8 Container ...... 9-46 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-8 All-Wheel Drive ...... 9-28 Winter Driving ...... 9-9 Brakes Towing If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-11 Antilock Brake General Towing Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-12 System (ABS) ...... 9-28 Information ...... 9-47 Starting and Operating Parking Brake ...... 9-29 Driving Characteristics and Brake Assist ...... 9-30 Towing Tips ...... 9-47 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-17 Trailer Towing ...... 9-52 Ignition Positions ...... 9-18 Ride Control Systems Towing Equipment ...... 9-56 Retained Accessory StabiliTrak System ...... 9-30 Power (RAP) ...... 9-19 Conversions and Add-Ons Starting the Engine ...... 9-19 Cruise Control Add-On Electrical Engine Heater ...... 9-20 Cruise Control ...... 9-32 Equipment ...... 9-58 9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information Death and injury associated with WARNING (Continued) drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or Alcohol affects four things that Defensive driving means always “ possible death. These simple anyone needs to drive a vehicle: expect the unexpected.” The first defensive driving techniques judgment, muscular coordination, step in driving defensively is to wear vision, and attentiveness. your safety belt, see Safety Belts on could save your life. page 3‑13. Police records show that Drunk Driving almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve { WARNING { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these Assume that other road users deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is In recent years, more than drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes, 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and deaths have been associated with judgment can be affected by even what they might do and be ready. the use of alcohol, with about a small amount of alcohol. You In addition: 250,000 people injured. can have a serious — or even . Allow enough following fatal collision if you drive after distance between you and — the driver in front of you. drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been . Focus on the task of driving. drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if (Continued) you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. Driving and Operating 9-3

For persons under 21, it is against Control of a Vehicle Braking the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, The following three systems See Brake System Warning Light psychological, and developmental help to control the vehicle while on page 5‑21. reasons for these laws. driving — brakes, steering, and Braking action involves perception accelerator. At times, as when The obvious way to eliminate the time and reaction time. Deciding to driving on snow or ice, it is easy to push the brake pedal is perception leading highway safety problem is ask more of those control systems for people never to drink alcohol time. Actually doing it is than the tires and road can provide. reaction time. and then drive. Meaning, you can lose control of the Medical research shows that vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on Average reaction time is about alcohol in a person's system can page 9‑30. three‐fourths of a second. But that is make crash injuries worse, only an average. It might be less Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer with one driver and as long as especially injuries to the brain, accessories can affect vehicle spinal cord, or heart. This means two or three seconds or more with performance. See Accessories and another. Age, physical condition, that when anyone who has been Modifications on page 10‑3. drinking — driver or passenger — is alertness, coordination, and in a crash, that person's chance of eyesight all play a part. So do being killed or permanently disabled alcohol, drugs, and frustration. is higher than if the person had not been drinking. 9-4 Driving and Operating

But even in three‐fourths of a much faster with a lot of heavy Steering second, a vehicle moving at braking. Keeping pace with the 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m traffic and allowing realistic following Power Steering (66 ft). That could be a lot of distances eliminates a lot of If power steering assist is lost distance in an emergency, so unnecessary braking. That means because the engine stops or the keeping enough space between the better braking and longer brake life. power steering system is not vehicle and others is important. If the engine ever stops while the functioning, the vehicle can be And, of course, actual stopping vehicle is being driven, brake steered but it will take more effort. distances vary greatly with the normally but do not pump the surface of the road, whether it is brakes. If the brakes are pumped, Variable Effort Steering pavement or gravel; the condition the pedal could get harder to push The vehicle has a steering system of the road, whether it is wet, dry, down. If the engine stops, there will that continuously adjusts the effort or icy; tire tread; the condition of the still be some power brake assist but felt when steering at all vehicle brakes; the weight of the vehicle; it will be used when the brake is speeds. It provides ease when and the amount of brake force applied. Once the power assist is parking, yet a firm, solid feel at applied. used up, it can take longer to stop highway speeds. and the brake pedal will be harder Avoid needless heavy Steering Tips braking. Some people drive in to push. spurts — heavy acceleration Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer It is important to take curves at a followed by heavy braking — rather accessories can affect vehicle reasonable speed. than keeping pace with traffic. This performance. See Accessories and Traction in a curve depends on the is a mistake. The brakes might not Modifications on page 10‑3. condition of the tires and the road have time to cool between hard surface, the angle at which the stops. The brakes will wear out curve is banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is the one factor that can be controlled. Driving and Operating 9-5

If there is a need to reduce speed, page 9‑3. It is better to remove as The fact that such emergency do it before entering the curve, while much speed as possible from a situations are always possible is a the front wheels are straight. collision. Then steer around the good reason to practice defensive Try to adjust the speed so you can problem, to the left or right driving at all times and wear safety drive through the curve. Maintain a depending on the space available. belts properly. reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until out of the curve, Off-Road Recovery and then accelerate gently into the The vehicle's right wheels can drop straightaway. off the edge of a road onto the Steering in Emergencies shoulder while driving. There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can An emergency like this requires be avoided by braking — if you can close attention and a quick decision. stop in time. But sometimes you If holding the steering wheel at the cannot stop in time because there recommended 9 and 3 o'clock is no room. That is the time for positions, it can be turned a full evasive action steering around 180 degrees very quickly without — If the level of the shoulder is only the problem. removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement, The vehicle can perform very well in quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. emergencies like these. First apply you have avoided the object. Ease off the accelerator and then, the brakes. See Braking on 9-6 Driving and Operating if there is nothing in the way, Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when steer so that the vehicle straddles water, snow, ice, gravel, or other In a skid, a driver can lose control of the edge of the pavement. Turn material is on the road. For safety, the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm slow down and adjust your driving to most skids by taking reasonable (3 to 5 inches), about one-eighth these conditions. It is important to care suited to existing conditions, turn, until the right front tire contacts slow down on slippery surfaces and by not overdriving those the pavement edge. Then turn the because stopping distance is longer conditions. But skids are always steering wheel to go straight down and vehicle control more limited. possible. the roadway. While driving on a surface with The three types of skids correspond reduced traction, try your best to to the vehicle's three control Loss of Control avoid sudden steering, acceleration, systems. In the braking skid, the or braking, including reducing Let us review what driving experts wheels are not rolling. In the vehicle speed by shifting to a lower say about what happens when the steering or cornering skid, too much gear. Any sudden changes could three control systems — brakes, speed or steering in a curve causes cause the tires to slide. You might steering, and acceleration — do not tires to slip and lose cornering force. not realize the surface is slippery have enough friction where the tires And in the acceleration skid, too until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to meet the road to do what the driver much throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues such as has asked. wheels to spin. — enough water, ice, or packed snow In any emergency, do not give up. If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored Keep trying to steer and constantly your foot off the accelerator pedal surface — and slow down when you seek an escape route or area of and quickly steer the way you want have any doubt. less danger. the vehicle to go. If you start Remember: Antilock brakes help steering quickly enough, the vehicle avoid only the braking skid. may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Driving and Operating 9-7

Driving on Wet Roads There is no hard and fast rule about WARNING (Continued) hydroplaning. The best advice is to Rain and wet roads can reduce slow down when the road is wet. vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through Other Rainy Weather Tips Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause your Besides slowing down, other wet of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this weather driving tips include: driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle . Allow extra following distance. deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be . Pass with caution. { WARNING very cautious about trying to drive . Keep windshield wiping through flowing water. equipment in good shape. Wet brakes can cause crashes. . They might not work as well in a Hydroplaning Keep the windshield washer fluid quick stop and could cause reservoir filled. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water pulling to one side. You could . Have good tires with proper can build up under your vehicle's lose control of the vehicle. tread depth. See Tires on tires so they actually ride on the page 10 37. After driving through a large water. This can happen if the road is ‑ puddle of water or a car/vehicle wet enough and you are going fast . Turn off cruise control. wash, lightly apply the brake enough. When your vehicle is pedal until the brakes work hydroplaning, it has little or no normally. contact with the road. (Continued) 9-8 Driving and Operating

Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads { WARNING Always be alert and pay attention to Driving on steep hills or through your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving If you do not shift down, the If you become tired or sleepy, find a on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for brakes could get so hot that they safe place to park your vehicle driving in these conditions include: would not work well. You would and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in then have poor braking or even Other driving tips include: good shape. none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, assist the brakes on a steep tires, cooling system, and . Keep interior temperature cool. downhill slope. transmission. . Keep your eyes moving scan — . the road ahead and to the sides. Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear. { WARNING . Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often. Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well. (Continued) Driving and Operating 9-9

Winter Driving Try not to break the fragile traction. WARNING (Continued) If you accelerate too fast, the drive Driving on Snow or Ice wheels will spin and polish the You would then have poor braking Drive carefully when there is snow surface under the tires even more. or even none going down a hill. or ice between the tires and the The Antilock Brake System (ABS) You could crash. Always have the road, creating less traction or on page 9‑28 improves vehicle engine running and the vehicle in grip. Wet ice can occur at about stability during hard stops on gear when going downhill. 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain slippery roads, but apply the brakes begins to fall, resulting in even less sooner than when on dry pavement. . Stay in your own lane. traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or Allow greater following distance on Do not swing wide or cut in freezing rain until roads can be any slippery road and watch for across the center of the road. treated with salt or sand. Drive at speeds that let you stay slippery spots. Icy patches can in your own lane. Drive with caution, whatever the occur on otherwise clear roads in condition. Accelerate gently so shaded areas. The surface of a . Top of hills: Be alert — traction is not lost. Accelerating too curve or an overpass can remain icy something could be in your lane quickly causes the wheels to spin when the surrounding roads are (stalled car, accident). and makes the surface under the clear. Avoid sudden steering . Pay attention to special road tires slick, so there is even less maneuvers and braking while signs (falling rocks area, winding traction. on ice. roads, long grades, passing or Turn off cruise control, if equipped, no-passing zones) and take on slippery surfaces. appropriate action. 9-10 Driving and Operating

Blizzard Conditions { WARNING WARNING (Continued) Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the Snow can trap engine exhaust . Open a window about vehicle unless there is help nearby. under the vehicle. This may 5 cm (two inches) on the side If possible, use the Roadside cause exhaust gases to get of the vehicle that is away Assistance Program on page 13 6. ‑ inside. Engine exhaust contains from the wind to bring in To get help and keep everyone in carbon monoxide (CO) which fresh air. the vehicle safe: cannot be seen or smelled. . . Turn on the hazard warning It can cause unconsciousness Fully open the air outlets on flashers. and even death. or under the instrument panel. . Tie a red cloth to an outside If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: . mirror. Adjust the Climate Control . Clear away snow from around system to a setting that the base of your vehicle, circulates the air inside the especially any that is blocking vehicle and set the fan speed the exhaust pipe. to the highest setting. . Check again from time to See Climate Control System time to be sure snow does in the Index. not collect there. For more information about (Continued) carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust on page 9‑23. (Continued) Driving and Operating 9-11

If it takes some time for help to WARNING (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run { WARNING the engine, push the accelerator Snow can trap exhaust gases pedal slightly so the engine runs If the vehicle's tires spin at high under your vehicle. This can faster than the idle speed. This speed, they can explode, and you cause deadly CO (carbon keeps the battery charged to restart or others could be injured. The monoxide) gas to get inside. the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle can overheat, causing an CO could overcome you and kill with the headlamps. Do this as little engine compartment fire or other you. You cannot see it or smell it, as possible to save fuel. damage. Spin the wheels as little so you might not know it is in your as possible and avoid going vehicle. Clear away snow from If the Vehicle is Stuck above 55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer. around the base of your vehicle, Slowly and cautiously spin the especially any that is blocking the wheels to free the vehicle when For information about using tire exhaust. stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. chains on the vehicle, see Tire Run the engine for short periods If the vehicle has a traction system, Chains on page 10‑57. only as needed to keep warm, but it can often help to free a stuck be careful. vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction system in the Index. If stuck To save fuel, run the engine for only too severely for the traction system short periods as needed to warm to free the vehicle, turn the traction the vehicle and then shut the engine system off and use the rocking off and close the window most of method. the way to save heat. Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm also helps. 9-12 Driving and Operating

Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits it Out { WARNING It is very important to know how Turn the steering wheel left and much weight your vehicle can Do not load the vehicle any right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the heavier than the Gross front wheels. Turn off any traction or vehicle capacity weight and Vehicle Weight Rating stability system. Shift back and forth (GVWR), or either the between R (Reverse) and a forward includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all maximum front or rear Gross gear, spinning the wheels as little as Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). possible. To prevent transmission nonfactory-installed options. wear, wait until the wheels stop Two labels on your vehicle If you do, parts on the vehicle spinning before shifting gears. show how much weight it may can break, and it can change Release the accelerator pedal while properly carry, the Tire and the way the vehicle handles. shifting, and press lightly on the Loading Information label and These could cause you to accelerator pedal when the the Certification/Tire label. lose control and crash. Also, transmission is in gear. Slowly overloading can shorten the spinning the wheels in the forward life of the vehicle. and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑84. Driving and Operating 9-13

Tire and Loading Information maximum vehicle capacity Steps for Determining Correct Label weight (B) in kilograms and Load Limit pounds. 1. Locate the statement The Tire and Loading “The combined weight of Information label also shows the occupants and cargo should size of the original equipment never exceed XXX kg or tires (C) and the recommended XXX lbs” on your vehicle's cold tire inflation pressures (D). placard. For more information on tires 2. Determine the combined and inflation see Tires on weight of the driver and page 10‑37 and Tire Pressure on passengers that will be riding page 10‑44 . in your vehicle. There is also important loading Example Label 3. Subtract the combined information on the vehicle weight of the driver and A vehicle specific Tire and Certification/Tire label. It tells passengers from XXX kg or Loading Information label is you the Gross Vehicle Weight XXX lbs. attached to the center pillar Rating (GVWR) and the Gross (B-pillar) of your vehicle. With Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the driver's door open, you will the front and rear axle. See find the label attached below the “Certification/Tire Label” later in door lock post (striker). The tire this section. and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the 9-14 Driving and Operating

4. The resulting figure equals 6. If your vehicle will be towing the available amount of cargo a trailer, the load from your and luggage load capacity. trailer will be transferred to For example, if the “XXX” your vehicle. Consult this amount equals 1400 lbs and manual to determine how this there will be five 150 lb reduces the available cargo passengers in your vehicle, and luggage load capacity for the amount of available cargo your vehicle. and luggage load capacity See Trailer Towing on page 9‑52 is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 for important information on (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). towing a trailer, towing safety 5. Determine the combined rules and trailering tips. Example 1 weight of luggage and cargo A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for being loaded on the vehicle. Example 1 = 453 kg That weight may not safely (1,000 lbs). exceed the available cargo B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ and luggage load capacity 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg calculated in Step 4. (300 lbs). C. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs). Driving and Operating 9-15

seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label

Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example (750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification/ C. Available Cargo C. Available Cargo Tire label is attached to the rear Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs). Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs). edge of the driver's door. Refer to your vehicle's tire and The label shows the gross loading information label for weight capacity of your vehicle. specific information about your This is called the Gross Vehicle vehicle's capacity weight and Weight Rating (GVWR). 9-16 Driving and Operating

The GVWR includes the weight If you put things inside your { WARNING of the vehicle, all occupants, vehicle — like suitcases, tools, fuel, and cargo. Do not load the vehicle any packages, or anything else, they The Certification/Tire label also heavier than the Gross will go as fast as the vehicle tells you the maximum weights Vehicle Weight Rating goes. If you have to stop or turn for the front and rear axles, (GVWR), or either the quickly, or if there is a crash, called the Gross Axle Weight maximum front or rear Gross they will keep going. Rating (GAWR). To find out the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). actual loads on your front and If you do, parts on the vehicle { WARNING rear axles, you need to go to a can break, and it can change Things you put inside your weigh station and weigh your the way the vehicle handles. vehicle can strike and injure vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can These could cause you to people in a sudden stop or help you with this. Be sure to lose control and crash. Also, turn, or in a crash. spread out your load equally on overloading can shorten the both sides of the centerline. life of the vehicle. . Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to Never exceed the GVWR for Notice : Overloading the spread the weight evenly. your vehicle or the GAWR for vehicle may cause damage. either the front or rear axle. . Never stack heavier Repairs would not be covered things, like suitcases, by the vehicle warranty. inside the vehicle so that Do not overload the vehicle. some of them are above the tops of the seats. (Continued) Driving and Operating 9-17

. Avoid making hard stops for WARNING (Continued) Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles) or Operating so. During this time the new . Do not leave an brake linings are not yet unsecured child restraint New Vehicle Break-In broken in. Hard stops with in your vehicle. new linings can mean Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier . When you carry something need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this inside the vehicle, secure will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every it whenever you can. if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake . Do not leave a seat folded . If you have all-wheel drive, linings. down unless you need to. keep your speed at 88 km/h . Do not tow a trailer during (55 mph) or less for the break-in. See Driving first 805 km (500 miles). Characteristics and Towing . Do not drive at any one Tips on page 9‑47 for the constant speed, fast or trailer towing capabilities slow, for the first 805 km of your vehicle and more (500 miles). Do not make information. full-throttle starts. Avoid Following break‐in, engine speed downshifting to brake or and load can be gradually slow the vehicle. increased. 9-18 Driving and Operating

Ignition Positions and turn it only with your hand. the ignition and steering wheel. Use If the key cannot be turned by this position if the vehicle must be hand, see your dealer/retailer. pushed or towed. ( (LOCK/OFF): This position locks R (ON/RUN): This position can be the ignition and transmission. The used to operate the electrical key can be removed in LOCK/OFF. accessories and to display some The shift lever must be in P (Park) instrument panel warning and to turn the ignition switch to indicator lights. The switch stays in LOCK/OFF. this position when the engine is running. The transmission is also The steering can bind with the unlocked in this position. If you wheels turned off center. If this leave the key in the ACC/ happens, move the steering wheel ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position from right to left while turning the with the engine off, the battery could The ignition switch has four different key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this be drained. You may not be able to positions. doesn't work, then the vehicle start the vehicle if the battery is needs service. allowed to drain for an extended In order to shift out of P (Park), the period of time. ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake the position in which you can / (START): This is the position pedal must be applied. operate the electrical accessories or that starts the engine. When the items plugged into the accessory engine starts, release the key. The Notice: Using a tool to force the power outlets. This position unlocks ignition switch will return to ON/RUN key to turn in the ignition could for driving. cause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, Driving and Operating 9-19

Retained Accessory Starting the Engine components. If the ignition key is turned to the START position, Power (RAP) Move the shift lever to P (Park) or and then released when the These vehicle accessories can be N (Neutral). The engine will not start engine begins cranking, the used for up to 10 minutes after the in any other position. To restart the engine will continue cranking ignition key is turned off: engine when the vehicle is already for a few seconds or until the moving, use N (Neutral) only. vehicle starts. If the engine does . Audio System Notice: Do not try to shift to not start and the key is held in . Power Windows P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. START, cranking will be stopped . Sunroof (if equipped) If you do, you could damage the after 15 seconds to prevent transmission. Shift to P (Park) cranking motor damage. Power to the windows and sunroof only when the vehicle is stopped. To prevent gear damage, this will work up to 10 minutes or until a system also prevents cranking if door is opened. Starting Procedure the engine is already running. The radio continues to work for 1. With your foot off the accelerator Engine cranking can be stopped 10 minutes or until the driver's door pedal, turn the ignition to START. by turning the ignition switch to is opened. When the engine starts, let go of the ACC/ACCESSORY or the key. The idle speed will slow LOCK/OFF position. For an additional 10 minutes of down as the engine warms. Do operation, close all the doors and Notice: Cranking the engine for not race the engine immediately turn the key to ON/RUN and then long periods of time, by returning after starting it. Operate the back to LOCK/OFF. the key to the START position engine and transmission gently immediately after cranking has All these features will work when to allow the oil to warm up and ended, can overheat and damage the key is in the ON/RUN or lubricate all moving parts. the cranking motor, and drain the ACC/ACCESSORY positions. The vehicle has a battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Computer-Controlled Cranking between each try, to let the System. This feature assists in cranking motor cool down. starting the engine and protects 9-20 Driving and Operating

2. If the engine does not start after Notice: The engine is designed to should be plugged in at least 5‐10 seconds, especially in work with the electronics in the four hours before starting. Some very cold weather (below 0°F vehicle. If you add electrical parts models may have an internal or −18°C), it could be flooded or accessories, you could change thermostat in the cord which will with too much gasoline. Try the way the engine operates. prevent engine coolant heater pushing the accelerator pedal all Before adding electrical operation at temperatures above the way to the floor and holding equipment, check with your 0°F (−18°C). it there as you hold the key in dealer/retailer. If you do not, START for up to a maximum the engine might not perform To Use the Engine Coolant of 15 seconds. Wait at least properly. Any resulting damage Heater 15 seconds between each try, to would not be covered by the 1. Turn off the engine. allow the cranking motor to cool vehicle warranty. down. When the engine starts, 2. Open the hood and unwrap let go of the key and accelerator. Engine Heater the electrical cord. The cord is If the vehicle starts briefly but located on the driver side of the then stops again, repeat these The engine coolant heater can engine compartment. It is routed steps. This clears the extra provide easier starting and better around the windshield washer gasoline from the engine. Do not fuel economy during engine fluid reservoir. race the engine immediately warm-up in cold weather conditions 3. Plug the cord into a normal, after starting it. Operate the at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles grounded 110-volt AC outlet. engine and transmission gently with an engine coolant heater until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts. Driving and Operating 9-21

Shifting Into Park 3. Turn the ignition key to { WARNING LOCK/OFF. Plugging the cord into an { WARNING 4. Remove the key and take it with ungrounded outlet could cause an you. If you can leave the vehicle electrical shock. Also, the wrong It can be dangerous to get out of with the ignition key in your kind of extension cord could the vehicle if the shift lever is not hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). fully in P (Park) with the parking overheat and cause a fire. You Leaving the Vehicle with the brake firmly set. The vehicle can could be seriously injured. Plug Engine Running the cord into a properly grounded roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. { WARNING If the cord will not reach, use a suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will heavy-duty three-prong extension It can be dangerous to leave the not move, even when you are on cord rated for at least 15 amps. vehicle with the engine running. fairly level ground, use the steps The vehicle could move suddenly that follow. If you are pulling a 4. Before starting the engine, be if the shift lever is not fully in sure to unplug and store the trailer, see Driving Characteristics P (Park) with the parking brake cord as it was before to keep it and Towing Tips on page 9 47. ‑ firmly set. And, if you leave the away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be 1. Hold the brake pedal down and vehicle with the engine running, it damaged. set the parking brake. See could overheat and even catch Parking Brake on page 9 29 for fire. You or others could be The length of time the heater should ‑ more information. injured. Do not leave the vehicle remain plugged in depends on with the engine running. several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) in the area where you will be by holding in the button on the If you have to leave the vehicle with parking the vehicle for the best shift lever and pushing the shift the engine running, be sure the advice on this. lever all the way toward the front vehicle is in P (Park) and the of the vehicle. parking brake is firmly set before 9-22 Driving and Operating you leave it. After you have moved Shifting Out of Park To shift out of P (Park): the shift lever into P (Park), hold the 1. Apply the brake pedal. regular brake pedal down. Then, The vehicle is equipped with an see if you can move the shift lever electronic shift lock release system. 2. Press the shift lever button. away from P (Park) without first The shift lock release is designed to: 3. Move the shift lever to the pushing the button. desired position. . Prevent ignition key removal If you can, it means that the shift If you still are unable to shift out of unless the shift lever is in lever was not fully locked in P (Park): P (Park). P (Park) with the shift lever button fully released, and 1. Fully release the shift lever Torque Lock button. . Prevent movement of the shift Torque lock is when the weight lever out of P (Park), unless the 2. While holding down the brake of the vehicle puts too much ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ pedal, press the shift lever force on the parking pawl in the ACCESSORY and the regular button again. transmission. This happens when brake pedal is applied. 3. Move the shift lever to the parking on a hill and shifting the The shift lock release is always desired position. transmission into P (Park) is not functional except in the case of an done properly and then it is difficult If you still cannot move the shift uncharged or low voltage (less than to shift out of P (Park). To prevent lever from P (Park), see your 9 volt) battery. torque lock, set the parking brake dealer/retailer. and then shift into P (Park). To find If the vehicle has an uncharged out how, see “Shifting Into Park” battery or a battery with low voltage, listed previously. try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting on If torque lock does occur, your page 10 80 for more information. vehicle may need to be pushed ‑ uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park). Driving and Operating 9-23

Parking Over Things Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued) That Burn { WARNING . The vehicle’s exhaust system { WARNING has been modified, damaged Engine exhaust contains Carbon or improperly repaired. Things that can burn could touch Monoxide (CO) which cannot be hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to . There are holes or openings vehicle and ignite. Do not park CO can cause unconsciousness in the vehicle body from over papers, leaves, dry grass, and even death. damage or after-market modifications that are not or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: completely sealed. . The vehicle idles in areas If unusual fumes are detected or with poor ventilation (parking if it is suspected that exhaust is garages, tunnels, deep snow coming into the vehicle: that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). . Drive it only with the windows completely down. . The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different. . Have the vehicle repaired immediately. . The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage. Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed (Continued) area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation. 9-24 Driving and Operating

Running the Vehicle { WARNING Automatic While Parked Transmission It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic The automatic transmission has a engine running. But if you ever have shift lever located on the console to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake between the seats. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. { WARNING Do not leave the vehicle when the Idling a vehicle in an enclosed engine is running unless you area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground, and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and engine in an enclosed area that move the shift lever to P (Park). has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be sure P (Park): This position locks the the vehicle will not move. See Exhaust on page 9‑23. front wheels. It is the best position Shifting Into Park on page 9‑21. to use when starting the engine If parking on a hill and pulling a because the vehicle cannot trailer, see Driving Characteristics move easily. and Towing Tips on page 9‑47. Driving and Operating 9-25

system. You must fully apply the N (Neutral): In this position, the { WARNING regular brake first and then press engine does not connect with the the shift lever button before shifting wheels. To restart the engine when It is dangerous to get out of the from P (Park) when the ignition key the vehicle is already moving, use vehicle if the shift lever is not fully is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out N (Neutral) only. Also, use in P (Park) with the parking brake of P (Park), ease pressure on the N (Neutral) when the vehicle is firmly set. The vehicle can roll. shift lever, then push the shift lever being towed. Do not leave the vehicle when the all the way into P (Park) as you engine is running unless you maintain brake application. Then { WARNING have to. If you have left the press the shift lever button and engine running, the vehicle can move the shift lever into another Shifting into a drive gear while the move suddenly. You or others gear. See Shifting Out of Park on engine is running at high speed is page 9 22. could be injured. To be sure the ‑ dangerous. Unless your foot is vehicle will not move, even when R (Reverse): Use this gear to firmly on the brake pedal, the you are on fairly level ground, back up. vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit always set the parking brake and Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) people or objects. Do not shift move the shift lever to P (Park). while the vehicle is moving See Shifting Into Park on forward could damage the into a drive gear while the engine page 9‑21. If you are pulling a transmission. The repairs would is running at high speed. trailer, see Driving Characteristics not be covered by the vehicle Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or and Towing Tips on page 9‑47. warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped. N (Neutral) with the engine Make sure the shift lever is fully in running at high speed may To rock the vehicle back and forth to P (Park) before starting the engine. damage the transmission. The get out of snow, ice or sand without The vehicle has an automatic repairs would not be covered by damaging the transmission, see If transmission shift lock control the vehicle warranty. Be sure the the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11. engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle. 9-26 Driving and Operating

D (Drive): This position is for designed to improve fuel economy To use this feature: normal driving. It provides the best and performance. Use the brake to 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). fuel economy. If you need more hold the vehicle on a hill. Do not use power for passing, and you are: the accelerator pedal. 2. Press the plus/minus button located on the shift lever, to . Going less than 56 km/h L (Low): This position gives you increase or decrease the gear (35 mph), push the accelerator access to gear ranges. This range available. pedal about halfway down. provides more engine braking but When you shift from D (Drive) to . lower fuel economy than D (Drive). Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or L (Low), the transmission will shift to more, push the accelerator all You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. a pre-determined lower gear range. the way down. The highest gear available for this Notice: If the vehicle seems to Manual Mode pre-determined range is displayed accelerate slowly or not shift next to the L in the DIC. See Driver gears when you go faster, and Electronic Range Select Information Center (DIC) on you continue to drive the vehicle (ERS) Mode page 5‑25 for more information. that way, you could damage the The number displayed in the transmission. Have the vehicle ERS mode allows you to choose the DIC is the highest gear that the serviced right away. You can top-gear limit of the transmission transmission will be allowed to drive in L (Low) when you are and the vehicle's speed while operate in. This means that all driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph) driving down hill or towing a trailer. gears below that number are and D (Drive) for higher speeds The vehicle has an electronic shift available. For example, when until then. position indicator within the 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L, instrument panel cluster. When 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are If the vehicle is stopped on a hill, using the ERS Mode a number will with your foot off the brake pedal, automatically shifted by the vehicle. display next to the L, indicating the The transmission will not shift into the vehicle may roll. This is normal current gear that has been selected. and is due to the torque converter 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is used or you shift back into D (Drive). Driving and Operating 9-27

While in L (Low), the transmission Tow/Haul Mode Automatic Engine Grade will prevent shifting to a lower gear Braking range if the engine speed is too _ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may high. You have a brief period of time have a Tow/Haul mode. Automatic Engine Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill to slow the vehicle. If vehicle speed The button is located on the grade. It maintains vehicle speed by is not reduced within the time instrument panel under the climate automatically implementing a shift allowed, the lower gear range shift controls. will not be completed. You must schedule that uses the engine and further slow the vehicle, then press Push the button to activate the the transmission to slow the vehicle. the − (Minus) button to the desired system. Push it again to deactivate The system will automatically lower gear range. the system. You can use this feature command downshifts to reduce to assist when towing or hauling a vehicle speed, until the brake pedal Automatic Engine Grade braking is heavy load. is no longer being pressed. not available when the ERS is active. It is available in D (Drive) for When Tow/Haul is activated the While in the Electronic Range both normal and Tow/Haul mode. Tow/Haul symbol will come on Select (ERS) mode, grade braking While using the ERS, cruise control the instrument panel cluster. See is deactivated, allowing the driver to and the tow/haul mode can be used. “Tow/Haul Mode” under Driving select a range and limiting the See Tow/Haul Mode following. Characteristics and Towing Tips on highest gear available. Grade page 9‑47 for more information. braking is available for normal driving and in Tow/Haul mode. See Automatic Transmission on page 9‑24. 9-28 Driving and Operating

Drive Systems Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it becomes necessary to slam on the brakes and continue braking to All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a With this feature, engine power is System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If one of the always sent to all four wheels. It is This vehicle has the Antilock Brake wheels is about to stop rolling, the fully automatic, and adjusts itself as System (ABS), an advanced computer will separately work the needed for road conditions. electronic braking system that helps brakes at each wheel. When using a compact spare tire prevent a braking skid. ABS can change the brake pressure on an AWD vehicle, the system When the engine is started and the to each wheel, as required, faster automatically detects the compact vehicle begins to drive away, ABS than any driver could. This can help spare and disables AWD. To restore checks itself. A momentary motor or the driver steer around the obstacle AWD operation and prevent clicking noise might be heard while while braking hard. excessive wear on system, replace this test is going on, and it might the compact spare with a full-size even be noticed that the brake As the brakes are applied, the tire as soon as possible. See pedal moves a little. This is normal. computer keeps receiving updates Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑79 on wheel speed and controls for more information. braking pressure accordingly.

If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 5‑22. Driving and Operating 9-29

Remember: ABS does not change Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking the time needed to get a foot up to brake on can overheat the brake the brake pedal or always decrease system and cause premature stopping distance. If you get too wear or damage to brake system close to the vehicle in front of you, parts. Make sure that the parking there will not be enough time to brake is fully released and the apply the brakes if that vehicle brake warning light is off before suddenly slows or stops. Always driving. leave enough room up ahead to To release the parking brake, hold stop, even with ABS. the regular brake pedal down, then Using ABS push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the pedal release. Slowly pull your the brake pedal down firmly and let foot up off the park brake pedal. ABS work. The ABS pump or motor If the parking brake is not released might be heard operating, and the To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then when you begin to drive, the brake brake pedal might be felt to pulsate, push the parking brake pedal down. system warning light will be on and but this is normal. a chime will sound warning you that If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on. Braking in Emergencies system warning light will come on. ABS allows the driver to steer and See Brake System Warning Light If you are towing a trailer and are brake at the same time. In many on page 5‑21. parking on a hill, see Trailer Towing emergencies, steering can help on page 9‑52. more than even the very best braking. 9-30 Driving and Operating

Brake Assist Ride Control Systems will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC): This vehicle has a brake assist TRACTION CONTROL OFF, feature designed to assist the driver StabiliTrak System SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, in stopping or decreasing vehicle The vehicle has the StabiliTrak SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these speed in emergency driving system which combines antilock conditions are observed, turn the conditions. This feature uses the brake, traction and stability control vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, stability system hydraulic brake systems and helps the driver and then turn it back on again to control module to supplement maintain directional control of the reset the system. If any of these the power brake system under vehicle in most driving conditions. messages still appear on the conditions where the driver has Driver Information Center (DIC), quickly and forcefully applied the When you first start the vehicle and the vehicle should be taken in for brake pedal in an attempt to quickly begin to drive away, the system service. For more information on stop or slow down the vehicle. performs several diagnostic checks the DIC messages, see Driver The stability system hydraulic brake to ensure there are no problems. Information Center (DIC) on The system may be heard or felt control module increases brake page 5‑25. pressure at each corner of the while it is working. This is normal vehicle until the ABS activates. and does not mean there is a Minor brake pedal pulsations or problem with the vehicle. The pedal movement during this time system should initialize before the is normal and the driver should vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). continue to apply the brake pedal In some cases, it may take as the driving situation dictates. approximately 3.2 km (2 miles) of driving before the system initializes. The brake assist feature will The StabiliTrak light will flash on the automatically disengage when the If the system fails to turn on or instrument panel cluster when the brake pedal is released or brake activate, the StabiliTrak light along system is both on and activated. pedal pressure is quickly with one of the following messages decreased. The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this is normal. Driving and Operating 9-31

DIC to warn the driver. The vehicle Traction Control Operation will still have brake-traction control The traction control system is part of when traction control is off, but will the StabiliTrak system. Traction not be able to use the engine speed control limits wheel spin by reducing management system. See Traction “ engine power to the wheels (engine Control Operation next for more ” speed management) and by The traction control disable button is information. applying brakes to each individual located on the instrument panel When the traction control system wheel (brake-traction control) as below the climate controls. has been turned off, system noises necessary. The traction control part of may be heard and felt as a result of The traction control system is StabiliTrak can be turned off by the brake-traction control working. enabled automatically when the pressing and releasing the traction It is recommended to leave the vehicle is started. It will activate and control disable button. system on for normal driving the StabiliTrak light will flash if it Traction control can be turned on by conditions, but it may be necessary senses that any of the wheels are pressing and releasing the traction to turn the system off if the vehicle spinning or beginning to lose control disable button if not is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, traction while driving. If traction automatically shut off for any and you want to “rock” the vehicle to control is turned off, only the other reason. attempt to free it. It may also be brake-traction control portion necessary to turn off the system When the traction control system is of traction control will work. when driving in extreme off-road turned off, the StabiliTrak light and conditions where high wheel spin is the appropriate traction control off required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck message will be displayed on the on page 9‑11. 9-32 Driving and Operating

The engine speed management will acceleration while turning or Cruise Control be disabled. In this mode, engine abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the power is not reduced automatically transmission. When this happens, With cruise control, a speed of and the driven wheels can spin a reduction in acceleration may be about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can more freely. This can cause the noticed, or a noise or vibration may be maintained without keeping your brake-traction control to activate be heard. This is normal. foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds constantly. If cruise control is being used when below about 40 km/h (25 mph). Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle the system activates, the StabiliTrak is allowed to spin excessively light will flash and cruise control will When the brakes are applied, the while the StabiliTrak, ABS and automatically disengage. Cruise cruise control is disengaged. brake warning lights and any control may be reengaged when relevant DIC messages are road conditions allow. See Cruise { WARNING displayed, the transfer case could Control on page 9‑32. be damaged. The repairs would StabiliTrak may also turn off Cruise control can be dangerous not be covered by the vehicle automatically if it determines that a where you cannot drive safely at warranty. Reduce engine power problem exists with the system. a steady speed. So, do not use and do not spin the wheel(s) If the problem does not clear itself the cruise control on winding excessively while these lights and after restarting the vehicle, see your roads or in heavy traffic. messages are displayed. dealer/retailer for service. Cruise control can be dangerous The traction control system may on slippery roads. On such roads, activate on dry or rough roads or fast changes in tire traction can under conditions such as heavy cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Driving and Operating 9-33

[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise 1. Press the I button to turn the control without erasing the set cruise control system on. speed from memory. 2. Get up to the speed desired. Setting Cruise Control 3. Press and release the Cruise control will not work if the SET– button located on the parking brake is set, or if the master steering wheel. cylinder brake fluid level is low. 4. Take your foot off the The cruise control light on the accelerator. instrument panel cluster comes on Resuming a Set Speed after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed. If the cruise control is set at a The cruise control buttons are desired speed and then the located on left side of the steering { WARNING brakes are applied, the cruise wheel. control is disengaged without T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise If you leave your cruise control on erasing the set speed from memory. control on and off. The indicator when you are not using cruise, Once the vehicle speed is comes on when cruise control is on. you might hit a button and go into 40 km/h (25 mph) or greater, press + RES (Resume/Accelerate): cruise when you do not want to. the +RES button on the steering Press to make the vehicle You could be startled and even wheel. The vehicle returns to accelerate or resume to a previously lose control. Keep the cruise the previously set speed and set speed. control switch off until you want stays there. to use cruise control. SET– : Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or to make the vehicle decelerate. 9-34 Driving and Operating

Increasing Speed While Using . To slow down in very small Ending Cruise Control Cruise Control amounts, press the SET– button briefly. Each time this is done, There are three ways to end cruise If the cruise control is already the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h control: engaged, (1 mph) slower. . Step lightly on the brake pedal. . Press and hold the +RES button Passing Another Vehicle While . [ on the steering wheel until the Press the button. Using Cruise Control desired speed is reached, then . Press the T button. release it. Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle speed. When you . To increase vehicle speed in Erasing Speed Memory take your foot off the pedal, the small increments, press the vehicle will slow down to the The cruise control set speed +RES button briefly. Each time previously set cruise speed. memory is erased when the cruise this is done, the vehicle goes control or the ignition is turned off. about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. Using Cruise Control on Hills Reducing Speed While Using How well the cruise control will work Cruise Control on hills depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of If the cruise control system is the hills. When going up steep hills, already engaged, you might have to step on the . Press and hold the SET– button accelerator pedal to maintain the on the steering wheel until the vehicle speed. When going lower speed desired is reached, downhill, you might have to brake then release it. or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged. Driving and Operating 9-35

How the System Works Object Detection { WARNING Systems URPA comes on automatically The Ultrasonic Rear Parking when the shift lever is moved into Ultrasonic Parking Assist Assist (URPA) system does not R (Reverse). A single tone sounds replace driver vision. It cannot to indicate the system is working. For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect: URPA operates only at speeds less Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, . Objects that are below the than 5 mph (8 km/h). it operates at speeds less than bumper, underneath the 8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the An obstacle is indicated by audible vehicle, or if they are too driver with parking and avoiding beeps. The interval between the close or far from the vehicle objects while in R (Reverse). The beeps becomes shorter as the sensors on the rear bumper are . Children, pedestrians, vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. used to detect the distance to an bicyclists, or pets. When the distance is less than object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the 30 cm (12 in) the beeps are If you do not use proper care continuous. vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in) before and while backing; vehicle off the ground. damage, injury, or death could To be detected, objects must be at occur. Even with URPA, always least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground and below liftgate level. Objects check behind the vehicle before must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from backing up. While backing, be the rear bumper. This distance may sure to look for objects and check be less during warmer or humid the vehicle's mirrors. weather. The system can be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” under Vehicle Personalization on page 5‑40 for more information. 9-36 Driving and Operating

When the System Does Not . A tow bar is attached to the Rear Vision vehicle. Seem to Work Properly Camera (RVC) . The vehicle's bumper is If the URPA system does not The vehicle may have a Rear Vision activate due to a temporary damaged. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer to repair the Camera system. Read this entire condition, the message PARK section before using it. ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC system. when the shift lever is moved into . Other conditions may affect R (Reverse). This may occur under system performance, such as { WARNING the following conditions: vibrations from a jackhammer or The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) the compression of air brakes on . The driver disables the system. a very large truck. system does not replace driver . The ultrasonic sensors are not vision. RVC does not: If the system is still disabled, after clean. Keep the vehicle's rear . driving forward at least 25 km/h Detect objects that are bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, outside the camera's field of ice and slush. For cleaning (15 mph), take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer. view, below the bumper, instructions, see Exterior Care or underneath the vehicle. on page 10‑87. . Detect children, pedestrians, . A trailer was attached to the bicyclists, or pets. vehicle, or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of the liftgate Do not back the vehicle by only during the last drive cycle. Once looking at the RVC screen, or use the attached object is removed, the screen during longer, higher URPA will return to normal speed backing maneuvers or operation. where there could be cross-traffic. (Continued) Driving and Operating 9-37

Vehicles Without Navigation To turn the rear vision camera WARNING (Continued) System system on again, press and hold z Your judged distances using the The rear vision camera system is until the left indicator light screen will differ from actual designed to help the driver when illuminates. The rear vision camera distances. backing up by displaying a view of system display is now enabled the area behind the vehicle. When and the display will appear in the So if you do not use proper care the key is in the ON/RUN position mirror normally. before backing up, you could hit and the driver shifts the vehicle into a vehicle, child, pedestrian, Vehicles With Navigation R (Reverse), the video image System bicyclist, or pet, resulting in automatically appears on the inside vehicle damage, injury, or death. rear view mirror. Once the driver The rear vision camera system is Even though the vehicle has the shifts out of R (Reverse), the video designed to help the driver when RVC system, always check image automatically disappears backing up by displaying a view of carefully before backing up by from the inside rear view mirror. the area behind the vehicle. When checking behind and around the driver shifts the vehicle into the vehicle. Turning the Rear Vision Camera R (Reverse), the video image System Off or On automatically appears on the To turn off the rear vision camera navigation screen. Once the driver system, press and hold z , located shifts out of R (Reverse), the on the inside rearview mirror, until navigation screen will go back to the the left indicator light turns off. last screen that had been displayed, The rear camera vision display is after a delay. now disabled. 9-38 Driving and Operating

Turning the Rear Vision Camera There is a message on the rear System On or Off vision camera screen that states To turn the rear vision camera “Check Surroundings for Safety”. system on or off: Adjusting the Brightness and 1. Shift into P (Park). Contrast of the Screen 2. Press the MENU button to enter To adjust the brightness and the configure menu options, then contrast of the screen, press the press the MENU hard key to MENU button while the rear vision select Display or touch the camera image is on the display. Any Display screen button. adjustments made will only affect the rear vision camera screen. 3. Select the Rear Camera Options ] screen button. The Rear Camera 4. Select the Video screen button. (Brightness) : Touch the Options screen displays. When the Video screen button is + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons highlighted the RVC system to increase or decrease the is on. brightness of the screen. The delay that is received after _ (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus) shifting out of R (Reverse) is or – (minus) screen buttons to approximately 10 seconds. increase or decrease the contrast of The delay can be cancelled by the screen. performing one of the following: . Pressing a hard key on the navigation system. . Shifting in to P (Park). . Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). Driving and Operating 9-39

Symbols The symbols appear when an object Rear Vision Camera Error The navigation system may have a has been detected by the URPA Messages feature that lets the driver view system. The symbol may cover the Service Rear Vision Camera symbols on the navigation screen object when viewing the navigation System: This message can display while using the rear vision camera. screen. when the system is not receiving The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist To turn the symbols on or off: information it requires from other (URPA) system must not be 1. Make sure that URPA has not vehicle systems. disabled to use the caution symbols. been disabled. If any other problem occurs or If URPA has been disabled and the 2. Shift into P (Park). if a problem persists, see your symbols have been turned on, the dealer/retailer. Rear Parking Assist Symbols 3. Press the MENU hard key to Unavailable error message may enter the configure menu display. See Ultrasonic Parking options, then press the MENU Assist on page 9‑35. hard key repeatedly until Display is selected or touch the Display screen button. 4. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button. The Rear Camera Options screen will display. 5. Touch the Symbols screen button. The screen button will be highlighted when on. 9-40 Driving and Operating

Rear Vision Camera Location The area displayed by the camera is limited and does not display objects that are close to either corner or under the bumper. The area displayed can vary depending on vehicle orientation or road conditions. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides.

The camera is located above the license plate.

A. View displayed by the camera. B. Corner of the rear bumper. Driving and Operating 9-41

When the System Does Not . The back of the vehicle is in an . A fast flash may indicate that the Seem To Work Properly accident, the position and display has been on for the mounting angle of the camera maximum allowable time during The rear vision camera system can change or the camera can a reverse cycle, or the display might not work properly or display a be affected. Be sure to have the has reached an Over clear image if: camera and its position and Temperature limit. . The RVC is turned off. mounting angle checked at your The fast flash conditions are See “Turning the Rear Camera dealer/retailer. used to protect the video System On or Off” earlier in this . There are extreme temperature device from high temperature section. changes. conditions. Once conditions . It is dark. The rear vision camera system return to normal the device will display in the rearview mirror may reset and the green indicator will . The sun or the beam of stop flashing. headlights is shining directly into turn off or not appear as expected the camera lens. due to one of the following During any of these fault conditions, conditions. If this occurs the the display will be blank and the . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else left indicator light on the mirror indicator will continue to flash as builds up on the camera lens. will flash. long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) Clean the lens, rinse it with or until the conditions return to . A slow flash may indicate a loss water, and wipe it with a normal. soft cloth. of video signal, or no video signal present during the Pressing and holding z when the reverse cycle. left indicator light is flashing will turn off the video display along with the left indicator light. 9-42 Driving and Operating

Fuel Recommended Fuel Use of the recommended fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline with is an important part of the proper a posted octane rating of 87 or maintenance of this vehicle. To help higher. If the octane rating is less keep the engine clean and maintain than 87, an audible knocking noise, optimum vehicle performance, we commonly referred to as spark recommend the use of gasoline knock, might be heard when driving. advertised as TOP TIER Detergent If this occurs, use a gasoline rated Gasoline. at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard Look for the TOP TIER label on the when using gasoline rated at fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets 87 octane or higher, the engine enhanced detergency standards needs service. developed by auto companies. A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at Gasoline Specifications www.toptiergas.com. At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel Additives on page 9‑43 for additional information. Driving and Operating 9-43

California Fuel Fuels in Foreign Fuel Additives Requirements Countries To provide cleaner air, all gasolines If the vehicle is certified to meet If you plan on driving in another in the United States are now California Emissions Standards, it is country outside the United States or required to contain additives that designed to operate on fuels that Canada, the proper fuel might be help prevent engine and fuel system meet California specifications. hard to find. Never use leaded deposits from forming, allowing the See the underhood emission control gasoline or any other fuel not emission control system to work label. If this fuel is not available in recommended in the previous text properly. In most cases, nothing states adopting California emissions on fuel. Costly repairs caused by should have to be added to the fuel. standards, the vehicle will operate use of improper fuel would not be However, some gasolines contain satisfactorily on fuels meeting covered by the vehicle warranty. only the minimum amount of federal specifications, but emission additive required to meet U.S. To check the fuel availability, ask an Environmental Protection Agency control system performance might auto club, or contact a major oil be affected. The malfunction regulations. To help keep fuel company that does business in the injectors and intake valves clean, indicator lamp could turn on and the country where you will be driving. vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. or if the vehicle experiences See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on problems due to dirty injectors or page 5‑19. If this occurs, return to valves, look for gasoline that is your authorized dealer/retailer for advertised as TOP TIER Detergent diagnosis. If it is determined that the Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. 9-44 Driving and Operating label on the fuel pump to ensure We recommend that you use these methylcyclopentadienyl manganese gasoline meets enhanced gasolines, if they comply with the tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant detergency standards developed specifications described earlier. where you buy gasoline whether the by the auto companies. A list of However, E85 (85% ethanol) and fuel contains MMT. We recommend marketers providing TOP TIER other fuels containing more than against the use of such gasolines. Detergent Gasoline can be found at 10% ethanol must not be used in Fuels containing MMT can reduce www.toptiergas.com. vehicles that were not designed for the life of spark plugs and the For customers who do not use TOP those fuels. performance of the emission control TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, Notice: This vehicle was not system could be affected. The one bottle of GM Fuel System designed for fuel that contains malfunction indicator lamp might Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel methanol. Do not use fuel turn on. If this occurs, return to your tank at every engine oil change, containing methanol. It can dealer/retailer for service. can help clean deposits from fuel corrode metal parts in the fuel injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel system and also damage plastic System Treatment PLUS is the only and rubber parts. That damage gasoline additive recommended by would not be covered under the General Motors. It is available at vehicle warranty. your dealer/retailer. Some gasolines that are not Gasolines containing oxygenates, reformulated for low emissions such as ethers and ethanol, and can contain an octane- reformulated gasolines might enhancing additive called be available in your area. Driving and Operating 9-45

Filling the Tank The tethered fuel cap is located While refueling, hang the tethered behind a hinged fuel door on the fuel cap from the hook on the driver side of the vehicle. fuel door. { WARNING To open the fuel door, push the Fuel vapor burns violently and a rearward center edge in and release { WARNING fuel fire can cause bad injuries. and it will open. To help avoid injuries to you and Fuel can spray out on you if you others, read and follow all the open the fuel cap too quickly. instructions on the fuel pump If you spill fuel and then island. Turn off the engine when something ignites it, you could be refueling. Do not smoke near fuel badly burned. This spray can or when refueling the vehicle. happen if the tank is nearly full, Do not use cellular phones. and is more likely in hot weather. Keep sparks, flames, and Open the fuel cap slowly and wait smoking materials away from fuel. for any hiss noise to stop. Then Do not leave the fuel pump unscrew the cap all the way. unattended when refueling the Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not vehicle. This is against the law in top off or overfill the tank and wait a some places. Do not re-enter the To remove the fuel cap, turn it few seconds after you have finished vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep pumping before removing the children away from the fuel pump; slowly counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is nozzle. Clean fuel from painted never let children pump fuel. released too soon, it will spring back surfaces as soon as possible. to the right. See Exterior Care on page 10‑87. 9-46 Driving and Operating

When replacing the fuel cap, Notice: If a new fuel cap is turn it clockwise until it clicks. needed, be sure to get the right WARNING (Continued) Make sure the cap is fully installed. type of cap from your dealer/ The diagnostic system can retailer. The wrong type fuel cap and the vehicle damaged if this determine if the fuel cap has been might not fit properly, might occurs. To help avoid injury to left off or improperly installed. This cause the malfunction indicator you and others: would allow fuel to evaporate into lamp to light, and could damage . Dispense fuel only into the atmosphere. See Malfunction the fuel tank and emissions approved containers. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19. system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19. . Do not fill a container while it { WARNING is inside a vehicle, in a Filling a Portable Fuel vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, If a fire starts while you are Container or on any surface other than refueling, do not remove the the ground. nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by . { WARNING Bring the fill nozzle in contact shutting off the pump or by with the inside of the fill notifying the station attendant. Never fill a portable fuel container opening before operating the Leave the area immediately. while it is in the vehicle. Static nozzle. Contact should be electricity discharge from the maintained until the filling is complete. container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be badly burned . Do not smoke while (Continued) pumping fuel. . Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel. Driving and Operating 9-47

Towing vehicle — such as a motorhome, The vehicle can tow a trailer when see Recreational Vehicle Towing on equipped with the proper trailer page 10‑84. towing equipment. For trailering General Towing capacity, see Trailer Towing on Information Driving Characteristics page 9‑52. Trailering changes handling, acceleration, braking, Only use towing equipment that and Towing Tips durability and fuel economy. has been designed for the vehicle. With the added weight, the engine, Contact your dealer/retailer or { WARNING transmission, wheel assemblies and trailering retailer for assistance tires are forced to work harder and with preparing the vehicle for The driver can lose control when under greater loads. The trailer also towing a trailer. pulling a trailer if the correct adds wind resistance, increasing the See the following trailer towing equipment is not used or the pulling requirements. For safe information in this section: vehicle is not driven properly. trailering, correctly use the proper For example, if the trailer is too . For information on driving while trailering equipment. heavy, the brakes may not work towing a trailer, see “Driving The following information has well or even at all. The driver Characteristics and — important trailering tips and rules Towing Tips”. and passengers could be for your safety and that of your seriously injured. The vehicle may . For maximum vehicle and trailer passengers. Read this section also be damaged; the resulting carefully before pulling a trailer. weights, see “Trailer Towing”. repairs would not be covered by . For information on equipment to the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer tow a trailer, see “Towing only if all the steps in this section Equipment”. have been followed. Ask your For information on towing a disabled dealer/retailer for advice and vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on information about towing a trailer page 10‑84. For information on with the vehicle. towing the vehicle behind another 9-48 Driving and Operating

Pulling A Trailer . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Check all trailer hitch parts and Use a lower gear if the attachments, safety chains, Here are some important points: transmission shifts too often. electrical connectors, lamps, tires . There are many laws, including See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in and mirror adjustments. If the trailer speed limit restrictions that apply this section. has electric brakes, start the vehicle to trailering. Check for legal . Obey speed limit restrictions and trailer moving and then apply requirements with state or when towing a trailer. the trailer brake controller by hand provincial police. to be sure the brakes are working. . The vehicle is designed primarily . Consider using sway control. as a passenger and load During the trip, check regularly to be See Towing Equipment on carrying vehicle. If a trailer is sure that the load is secure, and the page 9‑56. towed, the vehicle will require lamps and trailer brakes are working . Do not tow a trailer at all during more frequent maintenance due properly. the first 800 km (500 miles) to the additional load. Towing with a Stability Control the new vehicle is driven. The Driving with a Trailer System engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. Towing a trailer requires experience. When towing, the sound of the Get familiar with handling and stability control system might be . During the first 800 km braking with the added trailer heard. The system is reacting to the (500 miles) that a trailer is weight. The vehicle is now longer vehicle movement caused by the towed, do not drive over 80 km/h and not as responsive as the trailer, which mainly occurs during (50 mph) and do not make starts vehicle is by itself. cornering. This is normal when at full throttle. This reduces wear towing heavier trailers. on the vehicle. Driving and Operating 9-49

Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and Tow/Haul assists when pulling a trailer combined weight is at least heavy trailer or a large or heavy 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross load. The purpose of the Tow/Haul Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). mode is to: See Trailer Towing on page 9‑52. . Reduce the frequency and Press this button located on the Tow/Haul is most useful when improve the predictability of console to turn on and turn off the pulling a heavy trailer or a large or transmission shifts. Tow/Haul mode. heavy load under the following driving conditions: . Provide the same solid shift feel The Tow/Haul light on the as when the vehicle is unloaded. instrument panel comes on to . Travelling through rolling terrain. . Improve control of vehicle speed indicate that Tow/Haul mode has . Travelling in stop and go traffic. while requiring less throttle pedal been selected. . Travelling in busy parking lots activity. Tow/Haul may be turned off by where improved low speed . Increase the charging system pressing the button again, at which control of the vehicle is desired. voltage to assist in recharging a time the indicator light on the Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul battery installed in a trailer. instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle will automatically turn off when lightly loaded or with no trailer Tow/Haul every time it is started. will not cause damage but there is no benefit. Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy. 9-50 Driving and Operating

Following Distance Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns Stay at least twice as far behind the Notice: Making very sharp turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are vehicle ahead as you would when while trailering could cause the burned out. Check occasionally to driving the vehicle without a trailer. trailer to come in contact with the be sure the trailer bulbs are still This can help to avoid situations vehicle. The vehicle could be working. that require heavy braking and damaged. Avoid making very sudden turns. sharp turns while trailering. Driving On Grades Passing When turning with a trailer, make Reduce speed and shift to a wider turns than normal so the lower gear before starting down a More passing distance is needed trailer will not strike soft shoulders, long or steep downgrade. If the when towing a trailer. Because the curbs, road signs, trees or other transmission is not shifted down, the rig is longer, it is necessary to go objects. Use the turn signal well in brakes might have to be used so farther beyond the passed vehicle advance and avoid jerky or sudden much that they would get hot and no before returning to the lane. maneuvers. longer work well. Backing Up Turn Signals When Towing a The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Hold the bottom of the steering Trailer Use a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often. wheel with one hand. To move the The turn signal indicators on the trailer to the left, move that hand to instrument panel flash whenever the left. To move the trailer to the signaling a turn or lane change. right, move your hand to the right. Properly hooked up, the trailer Always back up slowly and, lamps also flash, telling other if possible, have someone drivers the vehicle is turning, guide you. changing lanes or stopping. Driving and Operating 9-51

When towing at high altitude on Parking on Hills If parking the rig on a hill: steep uphill grades, engine coolant 1. Press the brake pedal, but do will boil at a lower temperature than { WARNING not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn at normal altitudes. If the engine is the wheels into the curb if facing turned off immediately after towing Parking the vehicle on a hill with downhill or into traffic if facing at high altitude on steep uphill the trailer attached can be uphill. grades, the vehicle may show signs dangerous. If something goes 2. Have someone place chocks similar to engine overheating. To wrong, the rig could start to move. under the trailer wheels. avoid this, let the engine run while People can be injured, and both parked, preferably on level ground, the vehicle and the trailer can be 3. When the wheel chocks are in with the transmission in P (Park) for damaged. When possible, always place, release the brake pedal a few minutes before turning the until the chocks absorb the load. engine off. If the overheat warning park the rig on a flat surface. comes on, see Engine Overheating 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then on page 10‑17. apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the vehicle speed to 5. Release the brake pedal. around 88 km/h (55 mph) to reduce the possibility of the engine and the transmission overheating. 9-52 Driving and Operating

Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all Weight of the Trailer hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal How heavy can a trailer safely be? while you: Engine Cooling When Trailer Speed, altitude, road grades, . Start the engine. Towing outside temperature, special equipment, and the amount of . Shift into a gear. The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating tongue weight the vehicle can carry . Release the parking brake. conditions. See Engine Overheating must be considered. See “Weight of 2. Let up on the brake pedal. on page 10‑17. the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more information. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Trailer Towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the Three important considerations 4. Stop and have someone pick up tow vehicle and it has all the have to do with weight: and store the chocks. required trailering equipment. . Maintenance When Trailer The weight of the trailer The weight of additional optional Towing . The weight of the trailer tongue equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted The vehicle needs service more . The total weight on the from the maximum trailer weight. often when pulling a trailer. See this vehicle's tires manual's Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake system. Inspect these before and during the trip. Driving and Operating 9-53

Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options. Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR Front‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) Front‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) All‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) All‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our Weight of the Trailer Tongue equipment, passengers or cargo in trailering information or advice. the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is See Customer Assistance Offices weight the vehicle can carry, which an important weight to measure (US, Can) on page 13 3 for more will also reduce the trailer weight the ‑ because it affects the total gross information. vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, weight of the vehicle. The Gross the tongue load must be added to Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the the GVW because the vehicle will curb weight of the vehicle, any be carrying that weight, too. See cargo carried in it, and the people Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 12 who will be riding in the vehicle. ‑ If there are a lot of options, 9-54 Driving and Operating

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight applied well behind the rear axle, Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross the effect on the rear axle is greater Axle Weight Rating). The effect of than just the weight itself, as much additional weight may reduce the as 1.5 times as much. The weight at trailering capacity more than the the rear axle could be 386 kg total of the additional weight. (850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs). Consider the following example: Since the rear axle already weighs 1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg A vehicle model base weight is (1,275 lbs) brings the total to 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg 1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is very (2,800 lbs) at the front axle and close to, but within the limit for 1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear axle. RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg If a weight-carrying hitch or a to trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs). (7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg weight-distributing hitch is being (4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (Gross If the vehicle has many options and used, the trailer tongue (A) should Combination Weight Rating) of there is a front seat passenger and weigh 10 15 percent of the total ‐ 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailer two rear seat passengers with some loaded trailer weight (B). rating should be: luggage and gear in the vehicle as After loading the trailer, weigh the well. 136 kg (300 lbs) could be trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer. Trailering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry tongue Expect tongue weight to be at least weight. Tongue weight cannot 10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg cause the vehicle to exceed the (850 lbs)) and because the weight is Driving and Operating 9-55 added to the front axle weight and considered. Because the rear axle Total Weight on the Vehicle's 181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axle now weighs 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs), Tires weight. The vehicle now weighs: 408 kg (900 lbs) can be put on the rear axle without exceeding Inflate the vehicle's tires to the RGAWR. The effect of tongue upper limit for cold tires. These weight is about 1.5 times the actual numbers can be found on the weight. Dividing the 408 kg (900 lbs) Certification label or see Vehicle by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg (600 lbs) Load Limits on page 9‑12 for more of tongue weight that can be information. Do not go over the handled. Since tongue weight is GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the Weight is still below 3 266 kg usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight, expect that the trailer tongue. If using a weight (7,200 lbs) and you might think distributing hitch, do not go over the 318 additional kilograms (700 lbs) largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is 2 722 kg rear axle limit before applying the should be subtracted from the weight distribution spring bars. trailering capacity to stay within (6,000 lbs). GCWR limits. The maximum trailer It is important that the vehicle would only be 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs). does not exceed any of its You may go further and think the ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, tongue weight should be limited to Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue less than 454 kg (1,000 lbs) to Weight. The only way to be sure it is avoid exceeding GVWR. But the not exceeding any of these ratings effect on the rear axle must still be is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. 9-56 Driving and Operating

Towing Equipment Weight-Distributing Hitches and Safety Chains Weight Carrying Hitches Hitches Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the It is important to have the correct safety chains under the tongue of hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large the trailer to help prevent the tongue trucks going by and rough roads are from contacting the road if it a few reasons why the right hitch becomes separated from the hitch. is needed. Always leave just enough slack so . The rear bumper on the vehicle the rig can turn. Never allow safety is not intended for hitches. Do chains to drag on the ground. not attach rental hitches or other Trailer Brakes bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that A loaded trailer that weighs more does not attach to the bumper. than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to have its own brake system that is . A. Body-to-Ground Distance Will any holes be made in the adequate for the weight of the body of the vehicle when the B. Front of Vehicle trailer. Be sure to read and follow trailer hitch is installed? If there the instructions for the trailer brakes are, then be sure to seal the When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so so they are installed, adjusted and holes when the hitch is removed. maintained properly. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, that the distance (A) remains the water, and deadly carbon same both before and after coupling Because the vehicle has antilock monoxide (CO) from the exhaust the trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the may get into the vehicle. See vehicle's hydraulic brake system. Engine Exhaust on page 9‑23. If you do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all. Driving and Operating 9-57

Trailer Wiring Harness They should be connected by your Electric Trailer Brake Control dealer/retailer or a qualified service Wiring Provisions Basic Trailer Wiring center. These wiring provisions for an The trailer wiring harness, with a If the back-up lamp circuit is not electric trailer brake controller are seven-pin connector, is located at functional, contact your dealer/ included with the vehicle as part of the rear of the vehicle and is tied to retailer. the trailer wiring package. The the vehicle's frame. The harness If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is instrument panel contains blunt cut connector can be plugged into a wires behind the steering column for seven-pin universal heavy-duty being charged, press the Tow/Haul mode switch located on the center the electric trailer brake controller. trailer connector available through The harness contains the following your dealer/retailer. console near the climate controls. This will boost the vehicle system wires: The seven-wire harness contains voltage and properly charge the . Red/Black: Power Supply the following trailer circuits: battery. If the trailer is too light for . White: Brake Switch Signal . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal Tow/Haul mode, turn on the headlamps (Non‐HID only) as a . Gray: Illumination . Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn second way to boost the vehicle Signal . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal system and charge the battery. . Brown: Taillamps . Black: Ground . Black: Ground The electric trailer brake controller should be installed by your dealer/ . Light Green: Back-up Lamps retailer or a qualified service center. . Red/Black: Battery Feed . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* *The fuse for this circuit is installed in the underhood electrical center, but the wires are not connected. 9-58 Driving and Operating

Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer/ retailer first. Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is not operating. The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑42 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑42. Vehicle Care 10-1

Overheated Engine Taillamps, Turn Signal, Vehicle Care Protection Sidemarker, and Operating Mode ...... 10-19 Stoplamps ...... 10-29 Power Steering Fluid ...... 10-19 License Plate Lamp ...... 10-29 General Information Washer Fluid ...... 10-20 Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-30 General Information ...... 10-2 Brakes ...... 10-21 California Proposition Brake Fluid ...... 10-22 Electrical System 65 Warning ...... 10-3 Battery ...... 10-23 High Voltage Devices and California Perchlorate All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-24 Wiring ...... 10-30 Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Starter Switch Check ...... 10-24 Electrical System Accessories and Automatic Transmission Shift Overload ...... 10-30 Modifications ...... 10-3 Lock Control System Fuses and Circuit Vehicle Checks Check ...... 10-25 Breakers ...... 10-31 Ignition Transmission Lock Engine Compartment Fuse Doing Your Own Block ...... 10-31 Service Work ...... 10-4 Check ...... 10-25 Park Brake and P (Park) Instrument Panel Fuse Hood ...... 10-5 Block ...... 10-34 Engine Compartment Mechanism Check ...... 10-26 Overview ...... 10-6 Wiper Blade Wheels and Tires Engine Cover ...... 10-7 Replacement ...... 10-26 Tires ...... 10-37 Engine Oil ...... 10-8 Windshield Replacement . . . 10-27 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-37 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Headlamp Aiming Tire Designations ...... 10-40 Automatic Transmission Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-28 Tire Terminology and Fluid ...... 10-11 Definitions ...... 10-40 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11 Bulb Replacement Tire Pressure ...... 10-44 Cooling System ...... 10-13 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Tire Pressure Monitor Engine Coolant ...... 10-13 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-28 System ...... 10-45 Engine Overheating ...... 10-17 High Intensity Discharge Tire Pressure Monitor (HID) Lighting ...... 10-28 Operation ...... 10-46 10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Inspection ...... 10-50 Jump Starting General Information Tire Rotation ...... 10-50 Jump Starting ...... 10-80 When It Is Time for New For service and parts needs, visit Tires ...... 10-51 Towing your dealer/retailer. You will receive Buying New Tires ...... 10-52 Towing the Vehicle ...... 10-84 genuine GM parts and GM-trained Different Size Tires and Recreational Vehicle and supported service people. Towing ...... 10-84 Wheels ...... 10-54 Genuine GM parts have one of Uniform Tire Quality Appearance Care these marks: Grading ...... 10-54 Exterior Care ...... 10-87 Wheel Alignment and Tire Interior Care ...... 10-91 Balance ...... 10-56 Floor Mats ...... 10-94 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-56 Tire Chains ...... 10-57 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-58 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 10-59 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 10-67 Tire Changing ...... 10-67 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-77 Compact Spare Tire ...... 10-79 Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and 65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag accessories to the vehicle can affect known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, vehicle performance and safety, cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained including such things as airbags, other reproductive harm. Engine in remote keyless transmitters, braking, stability, ride and handling, exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials. emissions systems, aerodynamics, many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. durability, and electronic systems wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see like antilock brakes, traction control, emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ and stability control. Some of these perchlorate. accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. 10-4 Vehicle Care

Damage to vehicle components Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service resulting from the installation or use work, use the proper service of non‐GM certified parts, including manual. It tells you much more control module modifications, is not Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle covered under the terms of the Service Work than this manual can. To order the vehicle warranty and may affect proper service manual, see Service remaining warranty coverage for { WARNING Publications Ordering Information on affected parts. page 13‑12. GM Accessories are designed to You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system. complement and function with other vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own systems on the vehicle. Your GM try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Airbag System dealer/retailer can accessorize the without knowing enough about it. Check on page 3‑43. vehicle using genuine GM . Be sure you have sufficient Keep a record with all parts receipts Accessories. When you go to your knowledge, experience, and list the mileage and the date GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM the proper replacement of any service work performed. Accessories, you will know that parts, and tools before See Maintenance Records on GM-trained and supported service attempting any vehicle page 11‑10. technicians will perform the work maintenance task. using genuine GM Accessories. . Be sure to use the proper Also, see Adding Equipment to the nuts, bolts, and other Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on fasteners. English and metric page 3‑42. fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are used, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Vehicle Care 10-5

Hood Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. To open the hood: Pull the hood down to close. Lower the hood until the lifting pressure of the strut is reduced. Then allow the hood to fall and latch into place under its own weight. Check to make sure the hood is closed. If the hood does not fully latch, gently 1. Pull the hood release handle push the hood down at the front and with this symbol on it. It is center until it is completely latched. located under the instrument 2. At the front of the vehicle, pull panel on the driver side of the up on the bottom center of the vehicle. grille, and push the secondary hood release to the left. 3. After the lid has been partially lifted, a gas strut automatically lifts and holds the hood in the fully open position. 10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Radiator Pressure Cap. See H. Engine Cover on page 10‑7. Engine Cover Cooling System on page 10‑13. I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. “Checking Engine Oil” under See Cooling System on Engine Oil on page 10‑8. page 10‑13. J. Automatic Transmission Fluid C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. Dipstick. See “Checking the See Jump Starting on Fluid Level” under Automatic page 10‑80. Transmission Fluid on D. Engine Compartment Fuse page 10‑11. Block on page 10‑31. K. Brake Master Cylinder E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” See Jump Starting on under Brakes on page 10‑21. page 10‑80. L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on A. Oil Fill Cap F. Power Steering Reservoir and page 10‑11. Cap (under engine cover). M. Windshield Washer Fluid B. Engine Cover See Power Steering Fluid on Reservoir. See “Adding Washer To remove: page 10 19. Fluid under Washer Fluid on ‑ ” 1. Remove the oil fill cap (A). G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When page 10‑20. “ 2. Raise the engine cover (B) to to Add Engine Oil under Engine ” release from the retainers. Oil on page 10‑8. 3. Lift and remove the engine cover. 4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall engine cover. 10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview must be on level ground. on page 10‑6 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. The engine oil dipstick handle If the oil is below the cross-hatched is a yellow loop. See Engine area at the tip of the dipstick, Add enough oil to put the level Compartment Overview on add at least one quart/liter of the somewhere in the proper operating recommended oil. This section range in the cross-hatched area. page 10‑6 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. explains what kind of oil to use. Push the dipstick all the way back For engine oil crankcase capacity, in when through. 1. Turn off the engine and give the see Capacities and Specifications oil several minutes to drain back on page 12‑2. into the oil pan. If this is not done, the oil dipstick might not Notice: Do not add too much oil. show the actual level. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean cross-hatched area that shows it with a paper towel or cloth, the proper operating range, the then push it back in all the way. engine could be damaged. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. Vehicle Care 10-9

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use This symbol indicates that the easier cold starting for the engine at oil has been certified by the extremely low temperatures. Always Look for three things: American Petroleum use an oil that meets the required . GM6094M Institute (API). specification, GM6094M. See “What Use only an oil that meets Notice: Use only engine oil Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for more GM Standard GM6094M. identified as meeting GM information. . SAE 5W-30 Standard GM6094M and showing Engine Oil Additives / Engine the American Petroleum Institute Oil Flushes SAE 5W-30 is best for the Certified For Gasoline Engines vehicle. These numbers on starburst symbol. Failure to use Do not add anything to the oil. an oil container show its the recommended oil can result The recommended oils with the viscosity, or thickness. Do not in engine damage not covered by starburst symbol that meet GM use other viscosity oils such as the vehicle warranty. standards are all that is needed SAE 20W-50. for good performance and engine Cold Temperature Operation protection. . American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol If in an area of extreme cold, Engine oil system flushes are not where the temperature falls recommended and could cause below −20°F (−29°C), use either engine damage not covered by the an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an vehicle warranty. SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide

Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container. 10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System However, the engine oil and filter where the oil is changed prior to a must be changed at least once a “Change Engine Oil Soon” message When to Change Engine Oil year and at this time the system being turned on, reset the system. This vehicle has a computer system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer To reset the Engine Oil Life System: that indicates when to change the has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, engine oil and filter. This is based with the engine off. on engine revolutions and engine parts and reset the system. It is also temperature, and not on mileage. important to check the oil regularly 2. Press the vehicle information Based on driving conditions, the and keep it at the proper level. button until “Oil Life Remaining” mileage at which an oil change is If the system is ever reset displays. indicated can vary considerably. accidentally, the oil must be 3. Press and hold the set/reset For the oil life system to work changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) button until “100%” is displayed. properly, the system must be reset since the last oil change. Three chimes sound and the every time the oil is changed. Remember to reset the oil life “Change Engine Oil Soon” When the system has calculated system whenever the oil is changed. message goes off. that oil life has been diminished, How to Reset the Engine Oil 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. it indicates that an oil change is Life System necessary. A “Change Engine Oil If the “Change Engine Oil Soon” Soon” message comes on. Change The Engine Oil Life System message comes back on when the the oil as soon as possible within calculates when to change the vehicle is started, the engine oil life the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is engine oil and filter based on system has not reset. Repeat the possible that, if driving under the vehicle use. Whenever the oil is procedure. best conditions, the oil life system changed, reset the system so it can might not indicate that an oil change calculate when the next oil change is necessary for over a year. is required. If a situation occurs Vehicle Care 10-11

What to Do with Used Oil Automatic Transmission The transmission fluid will not reach the end of the dipstick unless Used engine oil contains certain Fluid the transmission is at operating elements that can be unhealthy for It is not necessary to check temperature. If you need to check your skin and could even cause the transmission fluid level. the transmission fluid level, please cancer. Do not let used oil stay on A transmission fluid leak is the take the vehicle to your dealer/ your skin for very long. Clean your only reason for fluid loss. If a leak retailer. skin and nails with soap and water, occurs, take the vehicle to the or a good hand cleaner. Wash or dealer/retailer and have it repaired properly dispose of clothing or rags Engine Air Cleaner/Filter as soon as possible. containing used engine oil. See the When to Inspect the Engine Air manufacturer's warnings about the Change the fluid at the intervals Cleaner/Filter use and disposal of oil products. listed in Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2, and be sure to use Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Used oil can be a threat to the ‑ the transmission fluid listed in Maintenance II intervals and replace environment. If you change your Recommended Fluids and it at the first oil change after each own oil, be sure to drain all the oil Lubricants on page 11 7. 80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval. from the filter before disposal. Never ‑ See Scheduled Maintenance on dispose of oil by putting it in the Notice: Use of the incorrect page 11 2 for more information. trash, pouring it on the ground, into automatic transmission fluid may ‑ If you are driving in dusty/dirty sewers, or into streams or bodies of damage the vehicle, and the conditions, inspect the filter at water. Recycle it by taking it to a damages may not be covered by each engine oil change. place that collects used oil. the vehicle's warranty. Always use the automatic transmission See Engine Compartment Overview fluid listed in Recommended on page 10‑6 for the location of the Fluids and Lubricants on engine air cleaner/filter. page 11‑7. 10-12 Vehicle Care

How to Inspect the Engine Air 2. Disconnect the cover fitting from 6. Remove the housing cover (C) Cleaner/Filter the ventilation tube (A). with outlet duct. To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 3. Disconnect the wiring harness 7. Remove the filter (D) and any remove the filter from the vehicle connector from the sensor (B). loose debris that may be found and lightly shake the filter (away in the base (E). from vehicle) to release loose dust 8. Inspect or replace the filter (D). and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required. 9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to reinstall the housing cover To inspect or replace the engine air and reconnect the electrical cleaner/filter: connector to the sensor. 1. Remove the engine cover. See 10. Reinstall the engine cover. Engine Cover on page 10‑7. See Engine Cover on page 10‑7.

{ WARNING

A. Clamp Operating the engine with the air B. Screws cleaner/filter off can cause you C. Housing Cover or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it D. Filter helps to stop flames if the engine E. Base backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not 4. Loosen the outlet duct drive with the air cleaner/filter off. clamp (A). A. Ventilation Tube 5. Loosen the six housing B. Sensor cover (C) screws (B). Vehicle Care 10-13

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is Notice: Using coolant other off, dirt can easily get into the { WARNING than DEX-COOL® can cause engine, which could damage it. premature engine, heater core, Always have the air cleaner/filter An electric engine cooling fan or radiator corrosion. In addition, in place when you are driving. under the hood can start up even the engine coolant could require when the engine is not running changing sooner, at 50 000 km Cooling System and can cause injury. Keep (30,000 miles) or 24 months, hands, clothing, and tools away whichever occurs first. Any The cooling system allows the from any underhood electric fan. repairs would not be covered by engine to maintain the correct the vehicle warranty. Always use working temperature. DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant { WARNING in the vehicle. Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle hot. Do not touch them. If you do, ® you can be burned. is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. The coolant is designed to Do not run the engine if there is a remain in the vehicle for five years leak. If you run the engine, it or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), could lose all coolant. That could whichever occurs first. cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling could be burned. Get any leak system and how to check and add fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is a A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank problem with engine overheating, B. Radiator Pressure Cap see Engine Overheating on page 10 17. C. Engine Cooling Fans ‑ 10-14 Vehicle Care

What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If an improper coolant drinkable water and DEX-COOL mixture is used, the engine could { WARNING coolant. If using this mixture, overheat and be badly damaged. nothing else needs to be added. The repair cost would not be Adding only plain water to This mixture: covered by the vehicle warranty. Too much water in the mixture the cooling system can be . Gives freezing protection down dangerous. Plain water, or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside can freeze and crack the engine, other liquid such as alcohol, can temperature. radiator, heater core, and other boil before the proper coolant parts. . Gives boiling protection up mixture will. The vehicle's coolant to 129°C (265°F), engine Notice: If extra inhibitors warning system is set for the temperature. and/or additives are used in proper coolant mixture. With plain the vehicle's cooling system, water or the wrong mixture, the . Protects against rust and the vehicle could be damaged. engine could get too hot but you corrosion. Use only the proper mixture of would not get the overheat . Will not damage aluminum parts. the engine coolant listed in this warning. The engine could catch manual for the cooling system. . Helps keep the proper engine See Recommended Fluids and fire and you or others could be temperature. burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information. clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. Vehicle Care 10-15

Checking Coolant How to Add Coolant to the The vehicle must be on a level Recovery Tank surface when checking the coolant level. { WARNING Check to see if coolant is visible in You can be burned if you spill the coolant recovery tank. If the The coolant recovery tank cap has coolant on hot engine parts. coolant inside the coolant recovery this symbol on it. Coolant contains ethylene glycol tank is boiling, do not do anything When the engine is cold, the coolant and it will burn if the engine parts else until it cools down. If coolant is level should be at or above the are hot enough. Do not spill visible but the coolant level is not at FULL COLD line marked on the or above the FULL COLD mark, add coolant on a hot engine. recovery tank. a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Notice: This vehicle has a water and DEX-COOL coolant at the When the engine is hot, the level specific coolant fill procedure. coolant recovery tank, but be sure could be higher than the FULL Failure to follow this procedure the cooling system is cool before COLD line. If the coolant is below could cause the engine to this is done. See Cooling System on the FULL COLD line when the overheat and be severely page 10‑13 for more information. engine is hot, there could be a leak in the cooling system. damaged. If coolant is needed, add the proper If the coolant is low, add the coolant ® or take the vehicle to a dealer/ DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the retailer for service. coolant recovery tank. 10-16 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to the 2. Remove the radiator pressure Radiator WARNING (Continued) cap when the cooling system, including the upper radiator cooling system and surge tank hose, is no longer hot. { WARNING pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. Turn the pressure cap slowly An electric engine cooling fan counterclockwise about one full under the hood can start up even If coolant is needed, add the proper turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for when the engine is not running mixture directly to the radiator, but that to stop. A hiss means there and can cause injury. Keep be sure the cooling system is cool is still some pressure left in the hands, clothing, and tools away before this is done. system. from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are 3. Keep turning the pressure cap under pressure, and if you slowly and remove it. turn the surge tank pressure 4. Fill the radiator to the base of cap — even a little — they can the filler neck with the proper come out at high speed. Never DEX-COOL coolant mixture. turn the cap when the cooling 5. When coolant begins to flow out system, including the surge tank 1. Detach fasteners and lift off of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the the panel that covers the pressure cap. Be sure to secure (Continued) radiator cap. it tightly. Vehicle Care 10-17

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating. There is an engine coolant temperature gauge on the 6. Fill the coolant recovery tank to 8. Start the engine and let it run instrument panel cluster. the FULL COLD mark. until the upper radiator hose See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 5‑15. 7. Reinstall the cap on the coolant feels warm. Any time during this recovery tank but leave the procedure, watch out for the The vehicle may also display radiator pressure cap off. engine cooling fan(s). an ENGINE OVERHEATED 9. If the coolant level inside the IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE radiator filler neck is low, add OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE more of the proper DEX-COOL message in the Driver Information coolant mixture through the filler Center (DIC). See Warning Lights, neck until the level is back up Gauges, and Indicators on to the base of the filler neck. page 5‑12. Replace the pressure cap. You may decide not to lift the hood Be sure to secure it tightly. when this warning appears, but instead get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 13‑6. 10-18 Vehicle Care

If you do decide to lift the hood , If Steam Is Coming From The make sure the vehicle is parked on Engine Compartment WARNING (Continued) a level surface. See Overheated Engine Then check to see if the engine { WARNING Protection Operating Mode on cooling fans are running. If the page 10‑19 for information on Steam from an overheated engine engine is overheating, both fans driving to a safe place in an can burn you badly, even if you should be running. If they are not, emergency. do not continue to run the engine just open the hood. Stay away and have the vehicle serviced. from the engine if you see or hear If No Steam Is Coming From Notice: Engine damage from steam coming from it. Turn it off The Engine Compartment running the engine without and get everyone away from the If an engine overheat warning is coolant is not covered by the vehicle until it cools down. Wait displayed but no steam can be seen warranty. until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open or heard, the problem may not be Notice: If the engine catches fire the hood. too serious. Sometimes the engine while driving with no coolant, the can get a little too hot when the vehicle can be badly damaged. If you keep driving when the vehicle: The costly repairs would not vehicles engine is overheated, . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. be covered by the vehicle the liquids in it can catch fire. warranty. See Overheated Engine You or others could be badly . Stops after high-speed driving. Protection Operating Mode on burned. Stop the engine if it . Idles for long periods in traffic. page 10‑19 for information on overheats, and get out of the . Tows a trailer. driving to a safe place in an vehicle until the engine is cool. emergency. (Continued) Vehicle Care 10-19

If the overheat warning is displayed If there is no sign of steam, idle Notice: After driving in the with no sign of steam: the engine for three minutes while overheated engine protection 1. Turn the air conditioning off. parked. If the warning is still operating mode, to avoid engine displayed, turn off the engine until it damage, allow the engine to cool 2. Turn the heater on to the highest cools down. Also, see “Overheated before attempting any repair. temperature and to the highest Engine Protection Operating Mode” The engine oil will be severely fan speed. Open the windows as next in this section. degraded. Repair the cause of necessary. coolant loss, change the oil 3. If in a traffic jam, shift to Overheated Engine and reset the oil life system. N (Neutral), otherwise, shift Protection See Engine Oil on page 10‑8. to the highest gear while Operating Mode driving — D (Drive) or L (Low). Power Steering Fluid If the temperature overheat gauge This emergency operating mode lets is no longer in the overheat zone the vehicle be driven to a safe place or an overheat warning no longer in an emergency situation. If an displays, the vehicle can be driven. overheated engine condition exists, Continue to drive the vehicle slow an overheat protection mode which for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe alternates firing groups of cylinders vehicle distance from the car in front helps prevent engine damage. of you. If the warning does not come In this mode, there is a significant The power steering fluid reservoir is back on, continue to drive normally. loss in power and engine located under the engine cover on performance. The temperature the passenger side of the vehicle. If the warning continues, pull gauge indicates an overheat See Engine Compartment Overview over, stop, and park the vehicle condition exists. Driving extended on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. right away. distances and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided. 10-20 Vehicle Care

When to Check Power Steering 5. Replace the cap and completely Washer Fluid Fluid tighten it. What to Use It is not necessary to regularly 6. Remove the cap again and look check power steering fluid unless at the fluid level on the dipstick. When adding windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the you suspect there is a leak in the The fluid level should be system or you hear an unusual somewhere between MAX and manufacturer's instructions before use. If the vehicle will be operating noise. A fluid loss in this system MIN line on the dipstick in room in an area where the temperature could indicate a problem. Have the temperature. If the fluid is on or system inspected and repaired. below MIN line, you should add may fall below freezing, use a fluid fluid close to MAX Line. that has sufficient protection against How to Check Power Steering freezing. Fluid What to Use Adding Washer Fluid To check the power steering fluid: To determine what kind of fluid to When the windshield washer fluid use, see Recommended Fluids and 1. Turn the key off and let the reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID engine compartment cool down. Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always use the proper fluid. LOW ADD FLUID message will be 2. Remove the engine cover. displayed on the Driver Information See Engine Cover on Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid page 10‑7. may damage the vehicle and the Messages on page 5‑39 for more damages may not be covered by information. 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the the vehicle's warranty. Always reservoir clean. use the correct fluid listed in 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the Recommended Fluids and dipstick with a clean rag. Lubricants on page 11‑7. Vehicle Care 10-21

. Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is { WARNING very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing The brake wear warning sound occurs, which could means that soon the brakes will damage the tank if it is not work well. That could lead to Open the cap with the washer completely full. an accident. When the brake symbol on it. Add washer fluid . Do not use engine coolant wear warning sound is heard, until the tank is full. See Engine (antifreeze) in the windshield have the vehicle serviced. Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the page 10‑6 for reservoir location. vehicle's windshield washer Notice: Continuing to drive with system and paint. worn-out brake pads could result Notice: in costly brake repair. . When using concentrated Brakes Some driving conditions or climates washer fluid, follow the can cause a brake squeal when the manufacturer's instructions This vehicle has disc brakes. brakes are first applied or lightly for adding water. Disc brake pads have built-in wear applied. This does not mean indicators that make a high-pitched . Do not mix water with something is wrong with the brakes. warning sound when the brake pads ready-to-use washer fluid. are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are Water can cause the solution The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake to freeze and damage the heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, washer fluid tank and other moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and parts of the washer system. brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the Also, water does not clean proper sequence to torque as well as washer fluid. specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 12‑2. 10-22 Vehicle Care

Brake linings should always be new, approved replacement parts. There are only two reasons why the replaced as complete axle sets. If this is not done, the brakes might brake fluid level in the reservoir not work properly. For example, might go down: Brake Pedal Travel installing disc brake pads that are . The brake fluid level goes down See your dealer/retailer if the brake wrong for the vehicle, can change because of normal brake lining pedal does not return to normal the balance between the front wear. When new linings are height, or if there is a rapid increase and rear brakes — for the worse. installed, the fluid level goes in pedal travel. This could be a The braking performance expected back up. sign that brake service might be can change in many other ways if required. the wrong replacement brake parts . A fluid leak in the brake are installed. hydraulic system can also cause Brake Adjustment a low fluid level. Have the brake Every time the brakes are applied, Brake Fluid hydraulic system fixed, since a with or without the vehicle moving, leak means that sooner or later the brakes adjust for wear. the brakes will not work well. Do not top off the brake fluid. Replacing Brake System Parts Adding fluid does not correct a leak. The braking system on a vehicle is If fluid is added when the linings complex. Its many parts have to be are worn, there will be too much of top quality and work well together fluid when new brake linings are if the vehicle is to have really good The brake master cylinder reservoir installed. Add or remove brake fluid, braking. The vehicle was designed is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as as necessary, only when work is and tested with top-quality brake indicated on the reservoir cap. done on the brake hydraulic system. parts. When parts of the braking See Engine Compartment Overview system are replaced, be sure to get on page 10‑6 for the location of the reservoir. Vehicle Care 10-23

. If brake fluid is spilled { WARNING { WARNING on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can If too much brake fluid is added, it With the wrong kind of fluid in be damaged. Be careful not can spill on the engine and burn, the brake hydraulic system, to spill brake fluid on the if the engine is hot enough. You the brakes might not work well. vehicle. If you do, wash it off or others could be burned, and This could cause a crash. Always immediately. the vehicle could be damaged. use the proper brake fluid. Add brake fluid only when work Battery is done on the brake hydraulic Notice: Refer to the replacement number on system. . Using the wrong fluid the original battery label when a can badly damage brake new battery is needed. When the brake fluid falls to a low hydraulic system parts. level, the brake warning light comes For example, just a few { DANGER on. See Brake System Warning drops of mineral-based oil, Light on page 5‑21. such as engine oil, in the Battery posts, terminals, and What to Add brake hydraulic system can related accessories contain lead damage brake hydraulic and lead compounds, chemicals Use only new DOT 3 brake system parts so badly that known to the State of California to fluid from a sealed container. they will have to be replaced. cause cancer and reproductive See Recommended Fluids and Do not let someone put in Lubricants on page 11‑7. the wrong kind of fluid. harm. Wash hands after handling. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir. 10-24 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. It is not necessary to check the { WARNING See Parking Brake on all–wheel drive lubricant levels. page 9‑29. A fluid leak is the only reason for Batteries have acid that can burn fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the Do not use the accelerator you and gas that can explode. vehicle to the dealer/retailer as soon pedal, and be ready to turn off You can be badly hurt if you are as possible. the engine immediately if it not careful. See Jump Starting on starts. page 10 80 for tips on working ‑ Starter Switch Check 3. Try to start the engine in each around a battery without gear. The vehicle should start getting hurt. { WARNING only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other Infrequent Usage: Remove the When you are doing this position, contact your dealer/ black, negative (−) cable from the retailer for service. battery to keep the battery from inspection, the vehicle could running down. move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be Extended Storage: Remove the injured. black, negative (−) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle 1. Before starting this check, be charger. sure there is enough room around the vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-25

Automatic Transmission 2. Firmly apply the parking Ignition Transmission Shift Lock Control brake. See Parking Brake on Lock Check page 9‑29. System Check Be ready to apply the regular While parked, and with the parking brake immediately if the vehicle brake set, try to turn the ignition { WARNING begins to move. to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position. When you are doing this 3. With the engine off, turn the . The ignition should turn to inspection, the vehicle could ignition to ON/RUN, but do not start the engine. Without LOCK/OFF only when the move suddenly. If the vehicle shift lever is in P (Park). moves, you or others could be applying the regular brake, injured. try to move the shift lever out of . The ignition key should come P (Park) with normal effort. If the out only in LOCK/OFF. shift lever moves out of P (Park), 1. Before starting this check, be Contact your dealer/retailer if contact your dealer/retailer for sure there is enough room service is required. around the vehicle. It should service. be parked on a level surface. 10-26 Vehicle Care

Park Brake and P (Park) Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Wiper Blade Replacement vehicle facing downhill. Keeping Mechanism Check your foot on the regular brake, set Windshield wiper blades should the parking brake. be inspected for wear or cracking. { See Scheduled Maintenance on WARNING . To check the parking brake's page 11‑2 for more information. When you are doing this check, holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in Replacement blades come in the vehicle could begin to move. different types and are removed in You or others could be injured N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake different ways. To replace the wiper and property could be damaged. pedal. Do this until the vehicle is blade assembly: Make sure there is room in front held by the parking brake only. of the vehicle in case it begins to 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm roll. Be ready to apply the regular . To check the P (Park) away from the windshield. brake at once should the vehicle mechanism's holding ability: begin to move. With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake. Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. Vehicle Care 10-27

Backglass Wiper Blade 3. Replace the wiper blade. To replace the backglass wiper 4. Return the wiper arm and blade blade: assembly to the rest position on the glass. 1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass. Windshield Replacement The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position Your vehicle is equipped with an so care should be used when acoustic windshield. If you ever pulling it away from the vehicle. have to have your windshield replaced be sure to get an acoustic 2. Rotate the wiper blade windshield so you will continue to assembly, hold the wiper arm 2. Press the button in the middle of have the benefits an acoustic in position, and push the blade the wiper arm connector and pull windshield can provide. away from the wiper arm. the wiper blade away from the arm connector. 3. Install the new wiper blade and make sure the wiper blade locks into place. For the proper size and type see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 11‑9. 10-28 Vehicle Care

Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement High Intensity Discharge Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement (HID) Lighting the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on further adjustment. page 10‑30. { WARNING However, if your vehicle is damaged For any bulb changing procedure The low beam high intensity in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact discharge lighting system be affected. Aim adjustment to your dealer/retailer. operates at a very high voltage. the low-beam headlamps may be If you try to service any of the necessary if oncoming drivers flash Halogen Bulbs their high-beam headlamps at you system components, you could (for vertical aim). be seriously injured. Have your { WARNING dealer/retailer or a qualified If the headlamps need to be technician service them. re-aimed, it is recommended that Halogen bulbs have pressurized you take the vehicle to your dealer/ gas inside and can burst if you The up‐level vehicle has HID retailer for service. drop or scratch the bulb. You or headlamps. The park lamp function others could be injured. Be sure is also a function of the HID to read and follow the instructions headlamp. After an HID headlamp on the bulb package. bulb has been replaced, the beam might be a slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal. Vehicle Care 10-29

Taillamps, Turn Signal, 3. Remove the two hex nuts License Plate Lamp holding the taillamp assembly Sidemarker, and in place. To replace one of these bulbs: Stoplamps 4. Pull out the taillamp assembly. 1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license plate lamps 5. Turn the bulb socket to the liftgate trim. counterclockwise and pull it straight out to remove it. 6. Replace the bulb. 7. Reverse steps 3 through 5 to reinstall the taillamp assembly. When reinstalling the taillamp assembly, the pin on the taillamp assembly must line up and be inserted correctly into the opening. A. Taillamp 8. Replace the black cuff over the B. Sidemarker Lamp lamp assembly by pushing into To replace one of these bulbs: snap tabs. 2. Turn and pull the license plate 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate lamp forward through the lift gate trim opening. on page 2‑9. 2. Remove the black cuff from the lamp assembly by pulling rearward from top to unfasten from snap tabs. 10-30 Vehicle Care

3. Turn the bulb socket Electrical System Electrical System counterclockwise and pull the Overload bulb straight out of the socket. High Voltage Devices and 4. Install the new bulb. The vehicle has fuses and circuit Wiring breakers to protect against an 5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 to electrical system overload. reinstall the license plate lamp. { WARNING When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens Replacement Bulbs Exposure to high voltage can and closes, protecting the circuit cause shock, burns, and even Bulb until the current load returns to Exterior Lamp death. The high voltage systems Number normal or the problem is fixed. in your vehicle can only be This greatly reduces the chance of License Plate Lamp 194 serviced by technicians with circuit overload and fire caused by Rear Sidemarker special training. electrical problems. 194 Lamp High voltage devices are Fuses and circuit breakers protect Rear Turn Signal 7443 identified by labels. Do not the following in the vehicle: and Taillamps (W21/5W) remove, open, take apart, . Headlamp Wiring or modify these devices. High . For replacement bulbs not listed voltage cable or wiring has Windshield Wiper Motor here, contact your dealer/retailer. orange covering. Do not probe, . Power Windows and other tamper with, cut, or modify high Power Accessories voltage cable or wiring. Vehicle Care 10-31

Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit An electrical overload may cause Breakers the lamps to go on and off, or in The wiring circuits in your vehicle some cases to remain off. Have are protected from short circuits the headlamp wiring checked right by a combination of fuses, circuit away if the lamps go on and off or breakers and fusible thermal links. remain off. This greatly reduces the chance of Windshield Wipers fires caused by electrical problems. If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new Lift the cover for access to the fuse/ one of the identical size and rating. relay block. Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload Fuses of the same amperage can Notice: Spilling liquid on any due to heavy snow or ice, may be temporarily borrowed from electrical components on the cause wiper linkage damage. another fuse location, if a fuse goes vehicle may damage it. Always Always clear ice and heavy snow out. Replace the fuse as soon as keep the covers on any electrical from the windshield before using you can. component. the windshield wipers. To remove fuses, hold the end of If the overload is caused by an Engine Compartment the fuse between your thumb and electrical problem and not snow Fuse Block index finger and pull straight out. or ice, be sure to get it fixed. The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. 10-32 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage BATT 1 Battery 1 BATT 2 Battery 2 BATT 3 Battery 3 Engine Control ECM Module Engine Control ECM 1 Module 1 EMISSION 1 Emission 1 EMISSION 2 Emission 2 EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage FOG LAMP Fog Lamps Air Conditioning AIRBAG Airbag System A/C CLUTCH Fuel System Clutch FSCM AUX POWER Auxiliary Power Control Module Antilock Braking AUX Auxiliary ABS MTR System (ABS) HORN Horn VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump Motor Heated Outside All-Wheel-Drive HTD MIR Adaptive Forward AWD Rearview Mirror AFS System Lighting System Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Heating, Ventilation REAR S/ROOF/ Rear Camera Sunroof and Air CAMERA SUNSHADE HVAC BLWR Conditioning Rear Accessory SERVICE Service Repair Blower RR APO Power Outlet SPARE Spare Left High-Beam LT HI BEAM RR DEFOG Rear Defogger Headlamp Stop Lamps Stop Lamps Rear Climate (China Only) (China Only) Left Low Beam RR HVAC LT LO BEAM ‐ Control System Headlamp STRTR Starter Right High Beam LT PRK Left Parking Lamp RT HI BEAM ‐ Transmission Headlamp TCM Control Module Trailer Left LT TRLR Right Low Beam Stoplamp and Turn RT LO BEAM ‐ TRANS Transmission STOP/TRN Headlamp Signal TRLR Trailer Back up Right ‐ ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils RT PRK BCK/UP Lamps Parking Lamp Powertrain Control TRLR BRK Trailer Brake PCM IGN Trailer Right Module Ignition RT TRLR Stoplamp and Turn TRLR Trailer Parking STOP/TRN PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate Signal PRK LAMP Lamps PWR Regulated Voltage TRLR PWR Trailer Power Power Outlet RVC SNSR OUTLET Control Sensor Windshield Wiper/ WPR/WSW Washer 10-34 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage A/C HORN Horn TRLR Trailer Back-up Air Conditioning CMPRSR BCK/UP Lamps Compressor Clutch IGN Ignition Main CLTCH WPR Windshield Wiper Trailer Left AUX Auxiliary LT TRLR Stoplamp and Windshield Wiper VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump STOP/TRN WPR HI Turn Signal Lamp High Speed CRNK Switched Power PRK LAMP Park Lamp FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 Instrument Panel Fuse PWR/TRN Powertrain FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Block Rear Window RR DEFOG FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 Defogger The instrument panel fuse block is located under the instrument panel FOG LAMP Fog Lamps Trailer Right RT TRLR on the passenger side of the Stoplamp and High Beam STOP/TRN vehicle. Pull down on the cover HI BEAM ‐ Turn Signal Lamp Headlamps to access the fuse block. Stop Lamps Stop Lamps High Intensity (China Only) (China Only) HID/ Discharge (HID) LO BEAM Low‐Beam Headlamps Vehicle Care 10-35

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage AIRBAG Airbag Heating, HVAC Ventilation and AMP Amplifier Air Conditioning BCK/ Back up Lamp/ ‐ INADV/ Inadvertent UP/STOP Stoplamp PWR/LED Power LED Body Control BCM INFOTMNT Infotainment Module Driver Side Turn CNSTR/ LT/TRN/SIG Canister Vent Signal VENT Memory Seat CTSY Courtesy MSM Module DR/LCK Door Locks Power Mirrors, PDM Daytime Running Liftgate Release DRL Lamps PWR MODE Power Mode GMC HID PWR/MIR Power Mirrors DRL 2 Only/Rear Fog Lamps-China Only RDO Radio DSPLY Display REAR WPR Rear Wiper Front Windshield Passenger Side FRT/WSW RT/TRN/SIG Washer Turn Signal Fuse Side HTD/ Heated/ SPARE Spare COOL SEAT Cooling Seats STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel ILLUM Illumination 10-36 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage Relays Usage LT/ Driver Side Power Power Unlock UNLCK PWR/SEAT Seat Relay Relay RT/ Passenger Side Daytime Running DRL2 PWR/SEAT Power Seat Relay Lamps 2 Relay Power Windows Driver Side Unlock PWR/WNDW LT/UNLCK Relay Relay PWR/ Power Steering Daytime Running DRL COLUMN Column Relay Lamps Relay L/GATE Liftgate Relay SPARE Spare LCK Power Lock Relay Front Windshield FRT/WSW Washer Relay Rear Window REAR/WSW Washer Relay

Relay Side Vehicle Care 10-37

Tire Sidewall Labeling Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) Useful information about a Tires . Underinflated tires pose the tire is molded into its sidewall. same danger as overloaded The examples below show a Your new vehicle comes with tires. The resulting accident high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. typical passenger vehicle tire leading tire manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to and a compact spare tire If you ever have questions maintain the recommended sidewall. about your tire warranty and pressure. Tire pressure where to obtain service, see should be checked when your vehicle Warranty booklet your tires are cold. See Tire for details. For additional Pressure on page 10‑44. information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden { WARNING impact — such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at Poorly maintained and improperly the recommended pressure. used tires are dangerous. . Worn, old tires can cause . Overloading your tires can accidents. If your tread is Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example cause overheating as a result badly worn, or if your tires of too much flexing. You have been damaged, (A) Tire Size: The tire size is could have an air-out and a replace them. a combination of letters and serious accident. See Vehicle numbers used to define a Load Limits on page 9‑12. particular tire's width, height, (Continued) aspect ratio, construction type, 10-38 Vehicle Care and service description. See the (D) Tire Identification (G) Maximum Cold Inflation “Tire Size” illustration later in this Number (TIN): The letters and Load Limit: Maximum load section for more detail. numbers following the DOT that can be carried and the (B) TPC Spec (Tire (Department of Transportation) maximum pressure needed Performance Criteria code is the Tire Identification to support that load. Specification): Original Number (TIN). The TIN shows equipment tires designed to the manufacturer and plant GM's specific tire performance code, tire size, and date the tire criteria have a TPC specification was manufactured. The TIN is code molded onto the sidewall. molded onto both sides of the GM's TPC specifications meet tire, although only one side may or exceed all federal safety have the date of manufacture. guidelines. (E) Tire Ply Material: The type (C) DOT (Department of of cord and number of plies in Transportation): The the sidewall and under the tread. Department of Transportation (F) Uniform Tire Quality (DOT) code indicates that Grading (UTQG): Tire Compact Spare Tire Example the tire is in compliance manufacturers are required (A) Tire Ply Material: The type with the U.S. Department of to grade tires based on three of cord and number of plies in Transportation Motor Vehicle performance factors: treadwear, the sidewall and under the tread. Safety Standards. traction, and temperature resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 10‑54 . Vehicle Care 10-39

(B) Temporary Use Only: Number (TIN). The TIN shows (F) Tire Size: A combination of The compact spare tire or the manufacturer and plant letters and numbers define a temporary use tire has a tread code, tire size, and date the tire tire's width, height, aspect ratio, life of approximately 5 000 km was manufactured. The TIN is construction type, and service (3,000 miles) and should not be molded onto both sides of the description. The letter T as the driven at speeds over 105 km/h tire, although only one side may first character in the tire size (65 mph). The compact spare have the date of manufacture. means the tire is for temporary tire is for emergency use when (D) Maximum Cold Inflation use only. a regular road tire has lost air Load Limit: Maximum load (G) TPC Spec (Tire and gone flat. If your vehicle that can be carried and the Performance Criteria has a compact spare tire, maximum pressure needed Specification): Original see Compact Spare Tire on to support that load. equipment tires designed to page 10‑79 and If a Tire Goes GM's specific tire performance Flat on page 10‑58. (E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact criteria have a TPC specification (C) Tire Identification spare tire should be inflated code molded onto the sidewall. Number (TIN): The letters to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more GM's TPC specifications meet and numbers following the DOT information on tire pressure and or exceed all federal safety (Department of Transportation) inflation see Tire Pressure on guidelines. code is the Tire Identification page 10‑44. 10-40 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of number indicates the tire section the wheel in inches. Tire Size width in millimeters from (F) Service Description: These The following illustration sidewall to sidewall. characters represent the load shows an example of a typical (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit index and speed rating of the passenger vehicle tire size. number that indicates the tire tire. The load index represents height‐to‐width measurements. the load carry capacity a tire is For example, if the tire size certified to carry. The speed aspect ratio is 60, as shown in rating is the maximum speed a item C of the illustration, it would tire is certified to carry a load. mean that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide. Tire Terminology and (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: (D) Construction Code: A Definitions The United States version letter code is used to indicate Air Pressure: The amount of a metric tire sizing system. the type of ply construction in of air inside the tire pressing The letter P as the first the tire. The letter R means outward on each square inch character in the tire size radial ply construction; the of the tire. Air pressure is means a passenger vehicle letter D means diagonal or expressed in psi (pounds per tire engineered to standards bias ply construction; and the square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). set by the U.S. Tire and Rim letter B means belted‐bias ply Association. construction. Vehicle Care 10-41

Accessory Weight: This Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic DOT Markings: A code molded means the combined weight tire in which the plies are laid into the sidewall of a tire of optional accessories. at alternate angles less than signifying that the tire is in Some examples of optional 90 degrees to the centerline compliance with the U.S. accessories are, automatic of the tread. Department of Transportation transmission, power steering, Cold Tire Pressure: The (DOT) motor vehicle safety power brakes, power windows, amount of air pressure in a tire, standards. The DOT code power seats, and air measured in psi (pounds per includes the Tire Identification conditioning. square inch) or kPa (kilopascal) Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Aspect Ratio: The relationship before a tire has built up heat designator which can also of a tire's height to its width. from driving. See Tire Pressure identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and on page 10‑44 . Belt: A rubber coated layer of date of production. cords that is located between Curb Weight: The weight of a the plies and the tread. Cords motor vehicle with standard and GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight may be made from steel or other optional equipment including the Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits reinforcing materials. maximum capacity of fuel, oil, on page 9‑12. Bead: The tire bead contains and coolant, but without GAWR FRT: Gross Axle steel wires wrapped by steel passengers and cargo. Weight Rating for the front axle. cords that hold the tire onto See Vehicle Load Limits on the rim. page 9‑12. 10-42 Vehicle Care

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: The Weight Rating for the rear axle. The maximum air pressure to side of an asymmetrical tire that See Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. has a particular side that faces page 9‑12. The maximum air pressure is outward when mounted on a Intended Outboard Sidewall: molded onto the sidewall. vehicle. The side of the tire The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Load Rating: The that contains a whitewall, that must always face outward load rating for a tire at the bears white lettering, or bears when mounted on a vehicle. maximum permissible inflation manufacturer, brand, and/or pressure for that tire. model name molding that is Kilopascal (kPa): The metric higher or deeper than the same unit for air pressure. Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall Weight: The sum of curb Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A of the tire. weight, accessory weight, tire used on light duty trucks and Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: some multipurpose passenger vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight. A tire used on passenger cars vehicles. and some light duty trucks and Load Index: An assigned Normal Occupant Weight: The multipurpose vehicles. number of occupants a vehicle number ranging from 1 to 279 Recommended Inflation that corresponds to the load is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle Pressure: Vehicle carrying capacity of a tire. manufacturer's recommended Load Limits on page 9‑12 . tire inflation pressure as shown Occupant Distribution: on the tire placard. See Tire Designated seating positions. Pressure on page 10‑44 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 . Vehicle Care 10-43

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight: tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear The number of designated extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the seating positions multiplied by 90 degrees to the centerline of tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated the tread. (1/16 inch) of tread remains. cargo load. See Vehicle Load Rim: A metal support for a tire See When It Is Time for New Limits on page 9‑12. and upon which the tire beads Tires on page 10‑51. Vehicle Maximum Load on the are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Tire: Load on an individual tire Sidewall: The portion of a tire Quality Grading Standards): due to curb weight, accessory between the tread and the bead. A tire information system weight, occupant weight, and that provides consumers with cargo weight. Speed Rating: An ratings for a tire's traction, Vehicle Placard: A label alphanumeric code assigned temperature, and treadwear. to a tire indicating the maximum permanently attached to a Ratings are determined by vehicle showing the vehicle's speed at which a tire can tire manufacturers using operate. capacity weight and the original government testing procedures. equipment tire size and Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into recommended inflation pressure. the sidewall of the tire. See the tire and the road surface. See “Tire and Loading Uniform Tire Quality Grading on The amount of grip provided. Information Label” under Vehicle page 10‑54 . Tread: The portion of a tire Load Limits on page 9‑12. that comes into contact with the road. 10-44 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air For additional information (over‐inflation), you can get regarding how much weight Tires need the correct amount the following: your vehicle can carry, and an of air pressure to operate example of the Tire and Loading . Unusual wear effectively. Information label, see Vehicle Notice: Do not let anyone tell . Poor handling Load Limits on page 9‑12. you that under‐inflation or . Rough ride How you load your vehicle over inflation is all right. It is affects vehicle handling and ‐ . not. If your tires do not have Needless damage from ride comfort. Never load your road hazards enough air (under‐inflation), vehicle with more weight than it you can get the following: A vehicle specific Tire and was designed to carry. Loading Information label . Too much flexing is attached to your vehicle. When to Check . Too much heat This label shows your vehicle's Check your tires once a . Tire overloading original equipment tires and the month or more. Do not forget correct inflation pressures for to check the compact spare . Premature or your tires when they are cold. tire, if the vehicle has one. irregular wear The recommended cold tire The compact spare should be at . Poor handling inflation pressure, shown on the 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the . Reduced fuel economy label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support compact spare tire, see your vehicle's maximum load Compact Spare Tire on carrying capacity. page 10‑79. Vehicle Care 10-45

How to Check If you overfill the tire, release vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has Use a good quality pocket-type air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. tires of a different size than the size gauge to check tire pressure. indicated on the vehicle placard or You cannot tell if your tires are Re‐check the tire pressure with the tire gauge. tire inflation pressure label, you properly inflated simply by should determine the proper tire looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps inflation pressure for those tires.) look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. As an added safety feature, your they are under‐inflated. Check They help prevent leaks by vehicle has been equipped with a the tire's inflation pressure when keeping out dirt and moisture. tire pressure monitoring system the tires are cold. Cold means (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire your vehicle has been sitting for Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or at least three hours or driven no System more of your tires is significantly more than 1.6 km (1 mile). under‐inflated. The Tire Pressure Monitor Remove the valve cap from the System (TPMS) uses radio and Accordingly, when the low tire tire valve stem. Press the tire sensor technology to check tire pressure telltale illuminates, you pressure levels. The TPMS sensors should stop and check your tires as gauge firmly onto the valve to soon as possible, and inflate them get a pressure measurement. monitor the air pressure in your vehicle's tires and transmit tire to the proper pressure. Driving on If the cold tire inflation pressure a significantly under‐inflated tire matches the recommended pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. causes the tire to overheat and can pressure on the Tire and lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation Loading Information label, no Each tire, including the spare also reduces fuel efficiency and further adjustment is necessary. (if provided), should be checked tire tread life, and may affect the If the inflation pressure is low, monthly when cold and inflated to vehicle's handling and stopping add air until you reach the the inflation pressure recommended ability. by the vehicle manufacturer on the recommended amount. 10-46 Vehicle Care

Please note that the TPMS is When the malfunction indicator Federal Communications not a substitute for proper tire is illuminated, the system may Commission (FCC) and maintenance, and it is the driver's not be able to detect or signal Industry Canada responsibility to maintain correct low tire pressure as intended. TPMS tire pressure, even if under‐inflation malfunctions may occur for a variety See Radio Frequency Statement on has not reached the level to trigger of reasons, including the installation page 13‑16 for information illumination of the TPMS low tire of replacement or alternate tires or regarding Part 15 of the Federal pressure telltale. wheels on the vehicle that prevent Communications Commission (FCC) the TPMS from functioning properly. Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry Your vehicle has also been Canada. equipped with a TPMS malfunction Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more indicator to indicate when the Tire Pressure Monitor system is not operating properly. tires or wheels on your vehicle to The TPMS malfunction indicator is ensure that the replacement or Operation alternate tires and wheels allow combined with the low tire pressure This vehicle may have a Tire telltale. When the system detects a the TPMS to continue to function properly. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). malfunction, the telltale will flash for The TPMS is designed to warn approximately one minute and then See Tire Pressure Monitor the driver when a low tire pressure remain continuously illuminated. Operation on page 10‑46 for condition exists. TPMS sensors are This sequence will continue upon additional information. mounted onto each tire and wheel subsequent vehicle start‐ups as assembly, excluding the spare tire long as the malfunction exists. and wheel assembly, if the vehicle has one. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-47

the driver. For additional information Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you and details about the DIC operation about a low tire pressure condition and displays see Driver Information but it does not replace normal tire Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 and maintenance. See Tire Inspection Tire Messages on page 5‑37. on page 10‑50, Tire Rotation on The low tire pressure warning light page 10‑50 and Tires on When a low tire pressure condition may come on in cool weather when page 10‑37. is detected, the TPMS illuminates the vehicle is first started, and then Notice: Using non‐approved tire the low tire pressure warning light turn off as you start to drive. This sealants could damage the Tire located on the instrument panel could be an early indicator that the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) cluster. If the warning light comes air pressure in the tire(s) are getting sensors. TPMS sensor damage on, stop as soon as possible and low and need to be inflated to the caused by using an incorrect tire inflate the tires to the recommended proper pressure. sealant is not covered by the pressure shown on the tire loading A Tire and Loading Information vehicle warranty. Always use information label. See Vehicle Load the GM approved tire sealant Limits on page 9‑12. label, attached to your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle's available through your dealer/ At the same time a message to original equipment tires and the retailer. check the pressure in a specific tire correct inflation pressure for your Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits appears on the Driver Information vehicle's tires when they are cold. use a GM approved liquid tire Center (DIC) display. The low tire See Vehicle Load Limits on sealant. Using non-approved tire pressure warning light and the DIC page 9‑12, for an example of the sealants could damage the TPMS warning message come on at each Tire and Loading Information label sensors. See Tire Sealant and ignition cycle until the tires are and its location on your vehicle. Compressor Kit on page 10‑59 for inflated to the correct inflation Also see Tire Pressure on information regarding the inflator kit pressure. Using the DIC, tire page 10‑44. materials and instructions. pressure levels can be viewed by 10-48 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light and . The TPMS sensor matching . Replacement tires or wheels do Message process was started but not not match your vehicle's original completed or not completed equipment tires or wheels. Tires The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the and wheels other than those if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle's tires. The DIC message recommended for your vehicle are missing or inoperable. When and TPMS malfunction light could prevent the TPMS from the system detects a malfunction, should go off once the TPMS functioning properly. See Buying the low tire warning light flashes sensor matching process New Tires on page 10‑52. for about one minute and then stays is performed successfully. . on for the remainder of the ignition Operating electronic devices or See “TPMS Sensor Matching being near facilities using radio cycle. A DIC warning message is Process” later in this section. also displayed. The low tire warning wave frequencies similar to the . light and DIC warning message One or more TPMS sensors TPMS could cause the TPMS come on at each ignition cycle until are missing or damaged. sensors to malfunction. the problem is corrected. Some of The DIC message and the If the TPMS is not functioning it the conditions that can cause the TPMS malfunction light should cannot detect or signal a low tire malfunction light and DIC message go off when the TPMS sensors condition. See your dealer/retailer to come on are: are installed and the sensor for service if the TPMS malfunction matching process is performed light and DIC message comes on . One of the road tires has successfully. See your dealer/ and stays on. been replaced with the spare retailer for service. tire, if your vehicle has one. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re‐install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor. Vehicle Care 10-49

TPMS Sensor Matching You have two minutes to match 4. Start with the driver side Process the first tire/wheel position, and front tire. five minutes overall to match all 5. Remove the valve cap from the Each TPMS sensor has a unique four tire/wheel positions. If it takes identification code. Any time you valve cap stem. Activate the longer than two minutes, to match TPMS sensor by increasing rotate your vehicle's tires or replace the first tire and wheel, or more than one or more of the TPMS sensors, or decreasing the tire's air five minutes to match all four tire pressure for five seconds, the identification codes will need to and wheel positions the matching be matched to the new tire/wheel or until a horn chirp sounds. process stops and you need to The horn chirp, which may take position. The sensors are matched start over. to the tire/wheel positions in the up to 30 seconds to sound, following order: driver side front tire, The TPMS sensor matching process confirms that the sensor passenger side front tire, passenger is outlined below: identification code has been side rear tire, and driver side rear 1. Set the parking brake. matched to this tire and wheel tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. position. See your dealer/retailer for service. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off. 6. Proceed to the passenger side The TPMS sensors can also be front tire, and repeat the matched to each tire/wheel position 3. Press the Remote Keyless procedure in Step 5. Entry (RKE) transmitter's LOCK by increasing or decreasing the 7. Proceed to the passenger side tire's air pressure. If increasing the and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately rear tire, and repeat the tire's air pressure, do not exceed procedure in Step 5. the maximum inflation pressure five seconds. The horn sounds indicated on the tire's sidewall. twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE To decrease air-pressure out of a LEARNING ACTIVE message tire you can use the pointed end of displays on the DIC screen. the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gauge, or a key. 10-50 Vehicle Care

8. Proceed to the driver side rear Tire Inspection Any time you notice unusual tire, and repeat the procedure in wear, rotate the tires as soon Step 5. The horn sounds two We recommend that you as possible and check wheel times to indicate the sensor regularly inspect your vehicle's alignment. Also check for identification code has been tires, including the spare tire, damaged tires or wheels. matched to the driver side rear if the vehicle has one, for signs See When It Is Time for New tire, and the TPMS sensor of wear or damage. See When It Tires on page 10‑51 and Wheel matching process is no longer Is Time for New Tires on Replacement on page 10‑56 . active. The TIRE LEARNING page 10‑51 for more information. ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off. Tire Rotation 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 10. Set all four tires to the 13 000 km). See Scheduled recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire Maintenance on page 11‑2 . and Loading Information label. The purpose of a regular tire 11. Put the valve caps back on the rotation is to achieve a uniform valve stems. wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will ensure that the vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new. When rotating the vehicle's tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Vehicle Care 10-51

If the vehicle has a compact When It Is Time for New { WARNING spare tire, do not include it in Tires the tire rotation. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Various factors, such as After the tires have been parts to which it is fastened, can maintenance, temperatures, rotated, adjust the front and rear make wheel nuts become loose driving speeds, vehicle loading, inflation pressures as shown on after time. The wheel could come and road conditions influence the Tire and Loading Information off and cause an accident. When when you need new tires. label. See Tire Pressure on changing a wheel, remove any page 10‑44 and Vehicle Load rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Limits on page 9‑12. In an emergency, use a cloth or a Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor paper towel to do this; but be sure System. See Tire Pressure to use a scraper or wire brush Monitor Operation on page 10‑46. later, if needed, to get all the rust Make certain that all wheel or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat nuts are properly tightened. on page 10‑58. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Make sure the spare tire, if the Capacities and Specifications on vehicle has one, is stored page 12‑2. securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it One way to tell when it is time for moves, tighten the cable. See new tires is to check the treadwear Tire Changing on page 10‑67 . indicators, which appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or less of tread remaining. 10-52 Vehicle Care

The vehicle needs new tires if any wear out before they degrade due GM's exclusive TPC Spec of the following statements are true: to age. If you are unsure about the system considers over a dozen need to replace the tires as they get . You can see the indicators at critical specifications that impact three or more places around older, consult the tire manufacturer the overall performance of the tire. for more information. your vehicle, including brake . You can see cord or fabric Buying New Tires system performance, ride showing through the tire's and handling, traction control, rubber. GM has developed and matched and tire pressure monitoring specific tires for your vehicle. . The tread or sidewall is cracked, performance. GM's TPC Spec cut, or snagged deep enough to The original equipment tires number is molded onto the tire's show cord or fabric. installed on your vehicle, sidewall near the tire size. If the when it was new, were designed . tires have an all‐season tread The tire has a bump, bulge, to meet General Motors or split. design, the TPC Spec number Tire Performance Criteria will be followed by an MS for . The tire has a puncture, cut, Specification (TPC Spec) mud and snow. See Tire or other damage that cannot be system rating. If you need Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑37 repaired well because of the size replacement tires, GM strongly or location of the damage. for additional information. recommends that you get tires GM recommends replacing tires The rubber in tires degrades over with the same TPC Spec rating. time. This is also true for the spare in sets of four. This is because This way, your vehicle will uniform tread depth on all tires tire, if the vehicle has one, even continue to have tires that are if it is not being used. Multiple will help keep your vehicle designed to give the same conditions affect how fast this aging performing most like it did when takes place, including temperatures, performance and vehicle safety, the tires were new. Replacing loading conditions, and inflation during normal use, as the less than a full set of tires can pressure maintenance. With proper original tires. affect the braking and handling care and maintenance tires typically performance of your vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-53

See Tire Inspection on page 10‑50 Vehicles that have a tire { WARNING and Tire Rotation on page 10‑50 pressure monitoring system for information on proper tire If you use bias-ply tires on the could give an inaccurate rotation. vehicle, the wheel rim flanges low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC could develop cracks after Spec rated tires are installed { WARNING many miles of driving. A tire on your vehicle. Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may give a Mixing tires could cause you and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. low‐pressure warning that is to lose control while driving. higher or lower than the proper If you mix tires of different Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle. warning level you would get with sizes, brands, or types (radial TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire and bias-belted tires), the If you must replace your Pressure Monitor System on vehicle may not handle vehicle's tires with those that do page 10‑45. properly, and you could have not have a TPC Spec number, Your vehicle's original a crash. Using tires of different make sure they are the same sizes, brands, or types may equipment tires are listed on size, load range, speed rating, the Tire and Loading Information also cause damage to your and construction type (radial vehicle. Be sure to use the Label. See Vehicle Load Limits and bias‐belted tires) as your on page 9‑12, for more correct size, brand, and type vehicle's original tires. of tires on all wheels. It is information about the Tire and all right to drive with your Loading Information Label and compact spare temporarily, as its location on your vehicle. it was developed for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑79. 10-54 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires and Uniform Tire Quality { WARNING Wheels Grading If you add wheels or tires that are If you add different sized wheels, Quality grades can be found your vehicle may not provide an a different size than your original where applicable on the tire acceptable level of performance equipment wheels and tires, this sidewall between tread shoulder could affect the way your vehicle and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels and maximum section width. performs, including its braking, For example: ride and handling characteristics, are selected. You may increase stability, and resistance to rollover. the chance that you will crash and Treadwear 200 Traction AA Additionally, if your vehicle has suffer serious injury. Only use GM Temperature A electronic systems such as anti‐lock specific wheel and tire systems brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for your vehicle, and The following information relates control, and electronic stability have them properly installed by a to the system developed by the control, the performance of these GM certified technician. United States National Highway systems can be affected. Traffic Safety Administration See Buying New Tires on (NHTSA), which grades tires page 10‑52 and Accessories and by treadwear, traction, and Modifications on page 10‑3 for temperature performance. additional information. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. Vehicle Care 10-55

The grades are molded on the Treadwear Traction – AA, A, B, C sidewalls of most passenger The treadwear grade is a The traction grades, from car tires. The Uniform Tire comparative rating based highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, Quality Grading (UTQG) system on the wear rate of the tire and C. Those grades represent does not apply to deep tread, when tested under controlled the tire's ability to stop on wet winter-type snow tires, conditions on a specified pavement as measured under space-saver, or temporary use government test course. controlled conditions on spare tires, tires with nominal For example, a tire graded specified government test rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 150 would wear one and a surfaces of asphalt and (25 to 30 cm), or to some half (1½) times as well on the concrete. A tire marked C may limited-production tires. government course as a tire have poor traction performance. While the tires available on graded 100. The relative Warning: The traction grade General Motors passenger performance of tires depends assigned to this tire is based on cars and light trucks may vary upon the actual conditions of straight-ahead braking traction with respect to these grades, their use, however, and may tests, and does not include they must also conform to depart significantly from the acceleration, cornering, federal safety requirements and norm due to variations in hydroplaning, or peak traction additional General Motors Tire driving habits, service practices characteristics. Performance Criteria (TPC) and differences in road standards. characteristics and climate. All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades. 10-56 Vehicle Care

Temperature – A, B, C properly inflated and not Wheel Replacement overloaded. Excessive speed, The temperature grades Replace any wheel that is bent, are A (the highest), B, and C, underinflation, or excessive cracked, or badly rusted or representing the tire's resistance loading, either separately or in corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming to the generation of heat and combination, can cause heat loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and its ability to dissipate heat buildup and possible tire failure. wheel nuts should be replaced. when tested under controlled If the wheel leaks air, replace it conditions on a specified indoor Wheel Alignment and Tire (except some aluminum wheels, Balance which can sometimes be repaired). laboratory test wheel. Sustained See your dealer/retailer if any of high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels on the vehicle these conditions exist. material of the tire to degenerate were aligned and balanced carefully and reduce tire life, and at the factory to give the longest tire Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need. excessive temperature can life and best overall performance. lead to sudden tire failure. Adjustments to wheel alignment and Each new wheel should have the The grade C corresponds to a tire balancing will not be necessary same load-carrying capacity, level of performance which all on a regular basis. However, if there diameter, width, offset, and be is unusual tire wear or the vehicle passenger car tires must meet mounted the same way as the pulls to one side or the other, the one it replaces. under the Federal Motor Safety alignment should be checked. If the If you need to replace any of the Standard No. 109. Grades B and vehicle vibrates when driving on a wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, A represent higher levels of smooth road, the tires and wheels or Tire Pressure Monitor System performance on the laboratory might need to be rebalanced. (TPMS) sensors, replace them only See your dealer/retailer for proper test wheel than the minimum with new GM original equipment diagnosis. required by law. Warning: The parts. This way, you will be sure to temperature grade for this tire have the right wheel, wheel bolts, is established for a tire that is wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for the vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-57

Used Replacement Wheels { WARNING WARNING (Continued) { WARNING Using the wrong replacement suspension or other vehicle parts. wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Putting a used wheel on the The area damaged by the tire nuts on your vehicle can be vehicle is dangerous. You cannot chains could cause you to lose dangerous. It could affect the know how it has been used or control of the vehicle and you or braking and handling of your how far it has been driven. others may be injured in a crash. vehicle, make your tires lose It could fail suddenly and cause air and make you lose control. Use another type of traction a crash. If you have to replace a You could have a collision in device only if its manufacturer wheel, use a new GM original which you or others could be recommends it for use on the equipment wheel. injured. Always use the correct vehicle and tire size combination wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel and road conditions. Follow that nuts for replacement. Tire Chains manufacturer's instructions. To help avoid damage to the Notice: The wrong wheel can { WARNING vehicle, drive slowly, readjust also cause problems with bearing or remove the device if it is life, brake cooling, speedometer Do not use tire chains. There is contacting the vehicle, and do not or odometer calibration, not enough clearance. Tire chains spin the vehicle's wheels. If you headlamp aim, bumper height, used on a vehicle without the do find traction devices that will vehicle ground clearance, and proper amount of clearance can fit, install them on the front tires. tire or tire chain clearance to cause damage to the brakes, the body and chassis. (Continued) See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑58 for more information. 10-58 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes Flat you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you { WARNING It is unusual for a tire to blowout can still steer. Gently brake to a while you are driving, especially if stop, well off the road if possible. Changing a tire can be you maintain your vehicle's tires dangerous. The vehicle can properly. If air goes out of a tire, slip off the jack and roll over { WARNING it is much more likely to leak out or fall on you or other people. slowly. But if you should ever have a Lifting a vehicle and getting You and they could be badly blowout, here are a few tips about under it to do maintenance or injured or even killed. Find a level what to expect and what to do: repairs is dangerous without the place to change your tire. To help If a front tire fails, the flat tire appropriate safety equipment and prevent the vehicle from moving: creates a drag that pulls the vehicle training. If a jack is provided with 1. Set the parking brake firmly. toward that side. Take your foot off the vehicle, it is designed only for 2. Put an automatic the accelerator pedal and grip the changing a flat tire. If it is used for steering wheel firmly. Steer to transmission shift lever in anything else, you or others could P (Park), or shift a manual maintain lane position, and then be badly injured or killed if the gently brake to a stop well out of transmission to 1 (First) or vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack R (Reverse). the traffic lane. is provided with the vehicle, only A rear blowout, particularly on a use it for changing a flat tire. 3. Turn off the engine and do curve, acts much like a skid and not restart while the vehicle may require the same correction If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire is raised. you would use in a skid. In any rear and wheel damage by driving slowly 4. Do not allow passengers to blowout remove your foot from the to a level place. Turn on the hazard remain in the vehicle. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle warning flashers. See Hazard (Continued) under control by steering the way Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. Vehicle Care 10-59

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), Tire Sealant and WARNING (Continued) use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement Compressor Kit To be certain the vehicle will not of wheel blocks (A). move, put blocks at the front and { WARNING rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That Idling a vehicle in an enclosed would be the tire on the other area with poor ventilation is side, at the opposite end of the dangerous. Engine exhaust may vehicle. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) This vehicle may come with a jack which cannot be seen or smelled. and spare tire or a tire sealant and It can cause unconsciousness compressor kit. To use the jacking and even death. Never run the equipment to change a spare tire engine in an enclosed area safely, follow the instructions below. that has no fresh air ventilation. Then see Tire Changing on For more information, see Engine page 10‑67. To use the tire sealant A. Wheel Block Exhaust on page 9‑23. and compressor kit, see Tire B. Flat Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 10‑59. The following information explains how to repair or change a tire. 10-60 Vehicle Care

If this vehicle has a tire sealant and This vehicle may have one of { WARNING compressor kit, there may not be a the following tire sealant and spare tire, tire changing equipment, compressor kits. The kit includes: Over-inflating a tire could and on some vehicles there may not cause the tire to rupture and be a place to store a tire. you or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the The tire sealant and compressor tire sealant and compressor kit can be used to temporarily seal instructions and inflate the tire punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. It can to its recommended pressure. also be used to inflate an under Do not exceed the recommended inflated tire. pressure. If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, { WARNING or has a large puncture, the tire is too severely damaged for the tire Storing the tire sealant and sealant and compressor kit to be compressor kit or other effective. See Roadside Assistance equipment in the passenger Program on page 13‑6. compartment of the vehicle Read and follow all of the tire could cause injury. In a sudden sealant and compressor kit stop or collision, loose equipment instructions. could strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location. Vehicle Care 10-61

Tire Sealant Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer/ retailer. See “Removal and A. Selector Switch Installation of the Sealant Canister” (Sealant/Air or Air Only) following. B. On/Off Button There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After usage, the C. Pressure Gage sealant canister and sealant/air D. Pressure Deflation Button hose assembly must be replaced. (If equipped) See “Removal and Installation of E. Tire Sealant Canister the Sealant Canister” following. F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) Using the Tire Sealant G. Air Only Hose (Black) and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and H. Power Plug Inflate a Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage. 10-62 Vehicle Care

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle and the power plug (H). must be running while using the 3. Place the kit on the ground. air compressor. Make sure the tire valve stem is 8. Turn the selector switch (A) positioned close to the ground counterclockwise to the so the hose will reach it. Sealant + Air position. 4. Remove the valve stem cap 9. Press the on/off (B) button from the flat tire by turning it to turn the tire sealant and counterclockwise. compressor kit on. 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) The compressor will inject onto the tire valve stem. Turn it sealant and air into the tire. When using the tire sealant and clockwise until it is tight. The pressure gauge (C) will compressor kit during cold 6. Plug the power plug (H) into initially show a high pressure temperatures, warm the kit in a while the compressor pushes the heated environment for 5 minutes. the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items sealant into the tire. Once the This will help to inflate the tire sealant is completely dispersed faster. from other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets on into the tire, the pressure will Always do a safety check first. See quickly drop and start to rise page 5‑10. If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑58. again as the tire inflates with Do not remove any objects that If the vehicle has an accessory air only. have penetrated the tire. power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage If the vehicle only has a cigarette location. See Storing the Tire lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Sealant and Compressor Kit on Do not pinch the power plug page 10‑67. cord in the door or window. Vehicle Care 10-63

10. Inflate the tire to the the tire valve. See Roadside 15. Replace the sealant/air recommended inflation Assistance Program on hose (F), and the power pressure using the pressure page 13‑6. plug (H) back in their original gauge (C). The recommended 11. Press the on/off button (B) to location. inflation pressure can be found turn the tire sealant and on the Tire and Loading compressor kit off. Information label. See Tire Pressure on page 10‑44. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until the The pressure gauge (C) may vehicle is driven and the read higher than the actual tire sealant is distributed in the tire, pressure while the compressor therefore, Steps 12 through is on. Turn the compressor off 16. If the flat tire was able to 18 must be done immediately inflate to the recommended to get an accurate pressure after Step 11. reading. The compressor may inflation pressure, remove the be turned on/off until the Be careful while handling the maximum speed label from the correct pressure is reached. tire sealant and compressor sealant canister (E) and place kit as it could be warm after it in a highly visible location. Notice: If the recommended usage. The label is a reminder not to pressure cannot be reached after exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until approximately 25 minutes, the 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the damaged tire is repaired or vehicle should not be driven the accessory power outlet in replaced. farther. The tire is too severely the vehicle. 17. Return the equipment to its damaged and the tire sealant and 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) compressor kit cannot inflate the original storage location in the counterclockwise to remove it vehicle. tire. Remove the power plug from from the tire valve stem. the accessory power outlet and 18. Immediately drive the vehicle unscrew the inflating hose from 14. Replace the tire valve 5 miles (8 km) to distribute the stem cap. sealant in the tire. 10-64 Vehicle Care

19. Stop at a safe location and 21. Dispose of the used sealant check the tire pressure. canister (E) and sealant/air Refer to Steps 1 through 11 hose (F) assembly at a local under “Using the Tire Sealant dealer/retailer or in accordance and Compressor Kit without with local state codes and Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not practices. Punctured).” 22. Replace it with a new canister If the tire pressure has fallen available from your dealer/ more than 10 psi (68 kPa) retailer. below the recommended 23. After temporarily sealing a tire inflation pressure, stop driving using the tire sealant and the vehicle. The tire is too compressor kit, take the severely damaged and the tire vehicle to an authorized dealer/ sealant cannot seal the tire. retailer within a 100 miles See Roadside Assistance (161 km) of driving to have Program on page 13‑6. the tire repaired or replaced. If the tire pressure has not dropped more than Using the Tire Sealant and 10 psi (68 kPa) from the Compressor Kit without recommended inflation Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not pressure, inflate the tire to Punctured) the recommended inflation To use the air compressor to inflate pressure. a tire with air only and not sealant: 20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-65

4. Remove the tire valve stem cap 8. Turn the selector switch (A) from the flat tire by turning it clockwise to the Air Only counterclockwise. position. 5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto 9. Press the on/off (B) button to the tire valve stem by turning it turn the compressor on. clockwise until it is tight. The compressor will inflate the 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the tire with air only. accessory power outlet in the 10. Inflate the tire to the vehicle. Unplug all items from recommended inflation other accessory power outlets. pressure using the pressure See Power Outlets on gauge (C). The recommended page 5 10. Always do a safety check first. See ‑ inflation pressure can be found If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑58. If the vehicle has an accessory on the Tire and Loading power outlet, do not use the Information label. See Tire 1. Remove the tire sealant and cigarette lighter. Pressure on page 10 44. compressor kit from its storage ‑ location. See Storing the Tire If the vehicle only has a cigarette The pressure gauge (C) may Sealant and Compressor Kit on lighter, use the cigarette lighter. read higher than the actual tire page 10‑67. Do not pinch the power plug pressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) cord in the door or window. to get an accurate reading. and the power plug (H). 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle The compressor may be turned 3. Place the kit on the ground. must be running while using the on/off until the correct pressure air compressor. Make sure the tire valve stem is is reached. positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. 10-66 Vehicle Care

If you inflate the tire higher 14. Replace the air only hose (G) Removal and Installation of the than the recommended and the power plug (H) and Sealant Canister pressure you can adjust cord back in its original the excess pressure by location. To remove the sealant canister: pressing the pressure deflation 15. Place the equipment in the 1. Unwrap the sealant hose. button (D), if equipped, until original storage location in the 2. Press the canister release the proper pressure reading is vehicle. button. reached. This option is only functional when using the air 3. Pull up and remove the canister. only hose (G). 4. Replace with a new canister 11. Press the on/off button (B) which is available from your to turn the tire sealant and dealer/retailer. compressor kit off. 5. Push the new canister into Be careful while handling the place. tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage. 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. The tire sealant and compressor kit 13. Disconnect the air only has an accessory adapter located in hose (G) from the tire a compartment on the bottom of its valve stem, by turning it housing that may be used to inflate counterclockwise, and replace air mattresses, balls, etc. the tire valve stem cap. Vehicle Care 10-67

Storing the Tire Sealant 2. Press the two tabs on the quick release buckle to release the and Compressor Kit tire sealant and compressor kit The tire sealant and compressor strap. kit is located in the storage 3. Remove the sealant and compartment on the driver side, compressor kit from its tray. at the rear of the vehicle. To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the steps. Tire Changing

Removing Tools A. Tool Bag The tools needed to remove the B. Wing Bolt spare tire are located in the storage compartment on the driver side, at C. Jack the rear of the vehicle. 2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by 1. Open the jack storage turning it counterclockwise compartment by pulling on the 3. Push the jack (C) up out of the latch tab, located toward the rear 1. Press down on the latch tab and holding bracket. of the vehicle, and pulling the pull the cover off to access the cover off. 4. Turn the jack on its side, with the storage compartment. bottom facing toward you. 5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom first. 10-68 Vehicle Care

1. Open the storage compartment door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate and remove the cap on the bottom of the storage compartment. 2. Open the carpet cutout that is located through the hole of the storage compartment. 3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft. 4. Turn the lug wrench The tools you will be using include A. Rear Convenience Center counterclockwise to lower the jack (A) and lug wrench (B). B. Lug Wrench the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the wrench Removing the Spare Tire C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole until the spare tire can be pulled The compact spare tire is located D. Hoist Shaft out from under the vehicle. under the vehicle, in front of the rear E. Compact Spare Tire bumper. See Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑79 for more information F. Retainer about the compact spare. G. Hoist Shaft Assembly Vehicle Care 10-69

6. Turn the wrench clockwise to Do the following to check the cable: raise the cable back up after 1. Check under the vehicle to see if removing the spare tire. the cable is visible. Do not store a full‐size or a flat 2. If it is not visible, see Secondary road tire under the vehicle. See Latch System on page 10‑77. “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” later in this section. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the lug To continue changing the flat tire, wrench clockwise until you hear see “Removing the Flat Tire and two clicks or feel it skip twice. Installing the Spare Tire later in this ” You cannot over‐tighten the section. cable. 3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns. 4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at least two times. If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue with Step 5 under “Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles with the Rear Convenience Center)” listed previously. 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it If the spare tire will not lower, the through the wheel opening to secondary latch could be engaged. remove the spare tire from the cable. 10-70 Vehicle Care

5. If you still cannot lower the If the vehicle has aluminum Notice: If this vehicle has wheel spare tire to the ground, see wheels, remove the wheel nut locks and an impact wrench is Secondary Latch System on caps using the wheel wrench. used to remove the wheel nuts, page 10‑77. the lock nut or wheel lock key could be damaged. Do not use Removing the Flat Tire and an impact wrench to remove the Installing the Spare Tire wheel nuts if this vehicle has 1. Do a safety check before wheel locks. proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑58 for more information. 2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench. They will not come off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry 4. To identify the appropriate along the edge of the cover until 3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do jacking location, find the it comes off. Be careful; the not remove them — using the triangle (A) about 12 inches edges may be sharp. Do not try lug wrench. For wheels with a (30.5 cm) from the front tire to remove the cover with your wheel lock key, use the wheel or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm) bare hands. lock key between the lock nut from the rear tire. and lug wrench. The key is Store the wheel cover securely The triangle is located near each supplied in the front passenger wheel on the vehicle's exterior. in the rear of the vehicle until door pocket. you have the flat tire repaired or replaced. Vehicle Care 10-71

Notice: If a jack is used to raise the vehicle without positioning it { WARNING correctly, the vehicle could be damaged. When raising the Raising your vehicle with the vehicle on a jack, avoid contact jack improperly positioned can with the rear axle control arms. damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help 5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. avoid personal injury and vehicle Put the compact spare tire damage, be sure to fit the jack lift near you. head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. { WARNING 6. Attach the lug wrench to the 7. Place the jack under the vehicle Getting under a vehicle when it jack, and turn the wrench as identified in Step 4. Raise the is jacked up is dangerous. If the clockwise to raise the jack vehicle by turning the lug wrench vehicle slips off the jack, you head 3 inches (7.6 cm). clockwise in the jack. Raise the could be badly injured or killed. vehicle far enough off the Never get under a vehicle when ground so that there is enough it is supported only by a jack. room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well. 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire. 10-72 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING { WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Never use oil or grease on bolts parts to which it is fastened, can or nuts because the nuts might make wheel nuts become loose come loose. The vehicle's wheel after time. The wheel could come could fall off, causing a crash. off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any 10. Remove any rust or dirt from rust or dirt from places where the wheel bolts, mounting the wheel attaches to the vehicle. surfaces, and spare wheel. In an emergency, use a cloth or a 11. Place the spare tire on the 9. Remove the plastic spare tire paper towel to do this; but be sure wheel mounting surface. heat shield by pulling the rubber to use a scraper or wire brush latch. Store the plastic spare tire later, if needed, to get all the rust heat shield. See “Storing a Flat or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” later in on page 10‑58. this section for more information. Vehicle Care 10-73

12. Put the nuts on by hand by turning them clockwise until { WARNING the wheel is held against the mounting surface. Make sure Wheel nuts that are improperly or the rounded end is toward the incorrectly tightened can cause wheel. the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching be tightened with a torque wrench the lug wrench to the jack to the proper torque specification and turning the wrench after replacing. Follow the torque counterclockwise. Lower specification supplied by the the jack completely. aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel 14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly nuts. See Capacities and in a crisscross sequence, as Specifications on page 12‑2 for shown. original equipment wheel nut Notice: Wheel covers will not fit torque specifications. on your vehicle's compact spare. Notice: Improperly tightened If you try to put a wheel cover on wheel nuts can lead to brake the compact spare, the cover or pulsation and rotor damage. the spare could be damaged. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 12‑2 for the wheel nut torque specification. 10-74 Vehicle Care

Storing the Spare Tire 4. When the compact spare tire is { WARNING almost in the stored position, { WARNING turn the tire so the valve is Storing a jack, a tire, or other toward the rear of the vehicle. equipment in the passenger The underbody-mounted spare compartment of the vehicle could This position helps when tire needs to be stored with the cause injury. In a sudden stop or checking the air pressure in valve stem pointing down. If the collision, loose equipment could the compact spare tire. spare tire is stored with the valve strike someone. Store all these in 5. Raise the tire fully against stem pointing upwards, the the proper place. the underside of the vehicle. secondary latch will not work Continue turning the lug wrench properly and the spare tire could To store the spare tire: until you feel more than two loosen and suddenly fall from the 1. Lay the compact spare tire near clicks. This indicates that the vehicle. If this happened when compact spare tire is secure and the vehicle was being driven, the the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem down. the cable is tight. The spare tire tire might contact a person or hoist cannot be overtightened. another vehicle, causing injury 2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire and damage to itself. Be sure the heat shield on the compact underbody-mounted spare tire is spare tire. stored with the valve stem 3. Slide the cable retainer through pointing down. the center of the wheel and start to raise the compact spare tire. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. Vehicle Care 10-75

3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle.

6. Make sure the tire is stored 5. Hook the cable onto the outside securely. Push, pull (A), and then portion of the liftgate hinges (B). try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the lug wrench to 6. Hook the other end of the cable tighten the cable. onto the outside portion of the liftgate hinge on the other side of Storing the Flat Tire 4. Pull the cable (A) through the the vehicle. 1. Remove the cable package from door striker (E), the center of the 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it the jack storage area. wheel (D), and the plastic spare is secure. tire heat shield (C), as shown. 2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels. 10-76 Vehicle Care

Storing the Tools 3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning clockwise. 4. To replace the cover, line up the tab at the front of the cover with the notch in the cover opening. Push the cover in place and make sure that the rear clips are in the slots and push the cover closed. Store the center cap or the plastic bolt‐on wheel covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. When 8. Make sure the metal tube is you replace the compact spare with centered at the striker. Push the a full size tire, reinstall the bolt on tube toward the front of the A. Tool Bag ‐ ‐ wheel covers or the center cap. vehicle. B. Wing Bolt Hand‐tighten them over the wheel 9. Close the liftgate and make sure C. Jack nuts, using the lug wrench. it is latched properly. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. 1. Ensure that the bottom of the jack is facing toward you. 2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place down on the holding bracket. Vehicle Care 10-77

Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch: This vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly that { has a secondary latch system. It is WARNING designed to stop the compact spare Someone standing too close tire from suddenly falling off the during the procedure could be vehicle if the cable holding the injured by the jack. If the spare spare tire is damaged. For the tire does not slide off the jack secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem completely, make sure no one is pointing down. See Tire Changing behind you or on either side of on page 10‑67 for instructions on you as you pull the jack out from storing the spare tire correctly. under the spare. All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicle shown 2. Turn the lug wrench 1. If the cable is not visible, start { WARNING counterclockwise until this procedure at Step 3. approximately 6 inches (15 cm) Before beginning this procedure of cable is exposed. read all the instructions. Failure to 3. Attach the lug wrench to the read and follow the instructions jack and raise the jack at least could damage the hoist assembly 10 turns. and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the 4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. instructions listed next. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. 10-78 Vehicle Care

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise 9. Tilt the retainer and slip it to raise the jack until it lifts the through the wheel opening secondary latch spring. when the spare tire has been 6. Keep raising the jack until the completely lowered. spare tire stops moving upward 10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise and is held firmly in place. This to raise the cable back up if the lets you know that the secondary cable is hanging. latch has released and the spare Have the hoist shaft assembly tire is balancing on the jack. inspected as soon as you can. You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced. 8. Disconnect the lug wrench from the jack and carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push against the spare tire while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lug wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack. Vehicle Care 10-79

Compact Spare Tire The compact spare is made to And do not mix the compact spare perform well at speeds up to tire or wheel with other wheels or 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up tires. They will not fit. Keep the { WARNING to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you spare tire and its wheel together. Driving with more than one can finish your trip and have the The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system full-size tire repaired or replaced at compact spare tire at a time will be automatically disabled your convenience. Of course, it is could result in loss of braking when you use the compact spare. best to replace the spare with a To restore the AWD and prevent and handling. This could lead to a full-size tire as soon as possible. crash and you or others could be excessive wear on the clutch in your The spare tire will last longer and be AWD, replace the compact spare injured. Use only one compact in good shape in case it is needed spare tire at a time. tire with a full-size tire as soon as again. possible. The compact spare tire, if the Notice: When the compact spare Notice: Tire chains will not fit the vehicle has one, was fully inflated is installed, do not take the compact spare. Using them can when the vehicle was new, however, vehicle through an automatic damage the vehicle and can it can lose air after a time. Check car wash with guide rails. The damage the chains too. Do not the inflation pressure regularly. compact spare can get caught on use tire chains on the compact It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). the rails which can damage the spare. tire, wheel and other parts of the After installing the compact spare vehicle. on the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and make sure the Do not use the compact spare on spare tire is correctly inflated. other vehicles. 10-80 Vehicle Care

Jump Starting Trying to start the vehicle by involved in the jump start pushing or pulling it will not procedure. Put an automatic If the vehicle's battery has run work, and it could damage the transmission in P (Park) or a down, you may want to use another vehicle. manual transmission in Neutral vehicle and some jumper cables to 1. Check the other vehicle. It must before setting the parking brake. start your vehicle. Be sure to use have a 12 volt battery with a If one of the vehicles is a the following steps to do it safely. ‐ negative ground system. four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is not in { WARNING Notice: If the other vehicle's Neutral. system is not a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both Notice: If you leave the radio or Batteries can hurt you. They can other accessories on during the be dangerous because: vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems jump starting procedure, they . They contain acid that can with negative grounds to jump could be damaged. The repairs burn you. start your vehicle. would not be covered by the warranty. Always turn off the . They contain gas that can 2. Get the vehicles close enough radio and other accessories when explode or ignite. so the jumper cables can reach, jump starting the vehicle. . They contain enough but be sure the vehicles are 3. Turn off the ignition on both electricity to burn you. not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground vehicles. Unplug unnecessary If you do not follow these steps connection you do not want. You accessories plugged into the exactly, some or all of these would not be able to start your cigarette lighter or the accessory things can hurt you. vehicle, and the bad grounding power outlets. Turn off the radio could damage the electrical and all lamps that are not Notice: Ignoring these steps systems. needed. This will avoid sparks could result in costly damage to and help save both batteries. the vehicle that would not be To avoid the possibility of the And it could save the radio! covered by the warranty. vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles Vehicle Care 10-81

4. Open the hoods and locate the Before you connect the cables, positive (+) and negative (−) WARNING (Continued) here are some basic things you terminal locations on the other should know. Positive (+) will go vehicle. Your vehicle has a add water to take care of that to positive (+) or to a remote remote positive (+) and a first. If you do not, explosive gas positive (+) terminal if the vehicle remote negative (−) jump could be present. has one. Negative (−) will go to a starting terminal. See Engine Battery fluid contains acid that heavy, unpainted metal engine Compartment Overview on can burn you. Do not get it on part or to a remote negative (−) page 10‑6 for more information you. If you accidentally get it in terminal if the vehicle has one. on the terminal locations. your eyes or on your skin, flush Do not connect positive (+) to the place with water and get negative (−) or you will get a { WARNING medical help immediately. short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts Using a match near a battery can too. And do not connect the cause battery gas to explode. { WARNING negative (−) cable to the People have been hurt doing this, negative (−) terminal on the and some have been blinded. Fans or other moving engine dead battery because this can Use a flashlight if you need parts can injure you badly. Keep cause sparks. more light. your hands away from moving Be sure the batteries have parts once the engine is running. enough water. You do not need to add water to the ACDelco® 5. Check that the jumper cables battery (or batteries) installed in do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could your new vehicle. But if a battery get a shock. The vehicles could has filler caps, be sure the right be damaged too. amount of fluid is there. If it is low, (Continued) 10-82 Vehicle Care

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part, 6. Connect the red positive (+) or to a remote negative (−) 9. Connect the other end of the cable to the positive (+) terminal terminal on the vehicle with negative (−) cable at least of the dead battery. the dead battery. 18 inches (45 cm) away from Use a remote positive (+) the dead battery, but not near terminal if the vehicle has one. engine parts that move. 7. Do not let the other end The electrical connection is just touch metal. Connect it to as good there, and the chance the positive (+) terminal of the of sparks getting back to the good battery. Use a remote battery is much less. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle Your vehicle has a remote has one. negative (−) terminal for this purpose. Vehicle Care 10-83

10. Now start the vehicle with To disconnect the jumper cables the good battery and run the from both vehicles, do the following: engine for a while. 1. Disconnect the black 11. Try to start the vehicle that negative (−) cable from the had the dead battery. If it will vehicle that had the dead not start after a few tries, it battery. probably needs service. 2. Disconnect the black Notice: If the jumper cables are negative (−) cable from the connected or removed in the vehicle with the good battery. wrong order, electrical shorting 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) may occur and damage the cable from the vehicle with the vehicle. The repairs would not be Jumper Cable Removal good battery. covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) jumper cables in the correct Part or Remote Negative (−) cable from the other vehicle. order, making sure that the Terminal cables do not touch each other B. Good Battery or Remote or other metal. Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal 10-84 Vehicle Care

Towing dolly towing. Dinghy towing is . Is the vehicle ready to be towing the vehicle with all four towed? Just as preparing the wheels on the ground. Dolly towing vehicle for a long trip, make Towing the Vehicle is towing the vehicle with two sure the vehicle is prepared To avoid damage, the disabled wheels on the ground and two to be towed. vehicle should be towed with all wheels up on a device known Dinghy Towing four wheels off the ground. Consult as a dolly. your dealer/retailer or a professional Here are some important things to towing service if the disabled consider before recreational vehicle vehicle must be towed. towing: To tow the vehicle behind . What is the towing capacity another vehicle for recreational of the towing vehicle? purposes — such as behind a Be sure to read the tow motorhome, see Recreational vehicle manufacturer's Vehicle Towing following. recommendations. Recreational Vehicle . What is the distance that will be travelled? Some vehicles have Towing restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. Recreational vehicle towing If the vehicle is front-wheel‐drive, it means towing the vehicle behind . Is the proper towing equipment can be dinghy towed from the front. another vehicle – such as behind a going to be used? See your These vehicles may also be towed motorhome. The two most common dealer/retailer or trailering by putting the front wheels on a types of recreational vehicle towing professional for additional dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in are known as dinghy towing and advice and equipment this section. recommendations. Vehicle Care 10-85

If the vehicle is all‐wheel‐drive, it 5. Shift the transmission to Once the destination is reached: can be dinghy towed from the front. N (Neutral). 1. Set the parking brake. These vehicles can also be towed 6. To prevent the battery from by placing them on a platform trailer 2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse draining while the vehicle to the underhood fuse block. with all four wheels off of the is being towed, remove the ground. These vehicles cannot be 50 amp BATT1 fuse from the 3. Shift the transmission to towed using a dolly. underhood fuse block and store P (Park), turn the ignition to For vehicles being dinghy towed, in a safe location. See Engine LOCK/OFF and remove the the vehicle should be run at the Compartment Fuse Block on key from the ignition. beginning of each day and at each page 10‑31. 4. Disconnect the vehicle from the RV fuel stop for about five minutes. 7. Release the parking brake. towing vehicle. This will ensure proper lubrication of transmission components. Re-install Notice: If the vehicle is towed Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with the fuse to start the vehicle. without performing each of the the front drive wheels on the steps listed under Dinghy ground if one of the front tires To tow the vehicle from the front “ Towing,” the automatic is a compact spare tire. Towing with all four wheels on the ground: transmission could be damaged. with two different tire sizes on 1. Position the vehicle to be Be sure to follow all steps of the the front of the vehicle can towed, shift the transmission to dinghy towing procedure prior to cause severe damage to the P (Park), and turn the ignition to and after towing the vehicle. transmission. LOCK/OFF. Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is 2. Secure the vehicle to the towing exceeded while towing the vehicle. vehicle, it could be damaged. 3. Set the parking brake. Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing the vehicle. 4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY. 10-86 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing Dolly Towing 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a (All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles) (Front-Wheel‐Drive straight-ahead position with a Vehicles Only) clamping device designed for towing. 5. Remove the key from the ignition. 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. 7. Release the parking brake. Towing the Vehicle From the Rear

All-wheel‐drive vehicles must not be towed with two wheels on the To tow a front-wheel‐drive vehicle ground. To properly tow these from the front with two wheels on vehicles, they should be placed on the ground: a platform trailer with all four wheels 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. off of the ground or dinghy towed from the front. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park). 3. Set the parking brake. Vehicle Care 10-87

Appearance Care Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Exterior Care may damage it. Use only Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ non-abrasive waxes and polishes Lenses that are made for a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish on the Use only lukewarm or cold water, a vehicle. soft cloth and a car washing soap to Foreign materials such as calcium clean exterior lamps and lenses. chloride and other salts, ice melting Follow instructions under Washing “ agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, the Vehicle later in this section. ” bird droppings, chemicals from Notice: Towing the vehicle from Finish Care industrial chimneys, etc., can the rear could damage it. Also, damage the vehicle's finish if they repairs would not be covered by Occasional waxing or mild polishing remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle warranty. Never have of the vehicle by hand may be the vehicle as soon as possible. the vehicle towed from the rear. necessary to remove residue from If necessary, use non-abrasive Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. the paint finish. Approved cleaning cleaners that are marked safe for products can be obtained from your painted surfaces to remove foreign dealer/retailer. matter. If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather and gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take their colored basecoat. Always use toll over a period of years. To keep waxes and polishes that are the paint finish looking new, keep non-abrasive and made for a the vehicle garaged or covered basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. whenever possible. 10-88 Vehicle Care

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal should not be used on plastic High pressure car washes could Parts parts, do not use it on the vehicle cause water to enter the vehicle. Bright metal parts should be or damage may occur and it Avoid using high pressure washes cleaned regularly to keep their would not be covered by the closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the luster. Wash with water or use warranty. surface of the vehicle. Use of power chrome polish on chrome or Do not use cleaning agents that are washers exceeding 8,274 kPa stainless steel trim, if necessary. petroleum based or that contain (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Use special care with aluminum acid or abrasives, as they can trim. To avoid damaging protective damage the paint, metal or plastic Notice: Conveyor systems on trim, never use auto or chrome on the vehicle. Approved cleaning some automatic car washes could polish, steam or caustic soap to products can be obtained from damage the vehicle. There may clean aluminum. A coating of your dealer/retailer. Follow all not be enough clearance for the wax, rubbed to high polish, is manufacturer directions regarding undercarriage. Check with the car recommended for all bright correct product usage, necessary wash manager before using the metal parts. safety precautions and appropriate automatic car wash. disposal of any vehicle care Washing the Vehicle product. Weatherstrips To preserve the vehicle's finish, Rinse the vehicle well, before Silicone grease on weatherstrips will keep it clean by washing it often. washing and after to remove all make them last longer, seal better, cleaning agents completely. If they and not stick or squeak. Apply Do not wash the vehicle in are allowed to dry on the surface, silicone grease with a clean cloth. direct sunlight and use a car they could stain. During very cold, damp weather washing soap. frequent application may be Dry the finish with a soft, clean Notice: Certain cleaners contain required. See Recommended Fluids chamois or an all-cotton towel to chemicals that can damage the and Lubricants on page 11‑7. avoid surface scratches and water emblems or nameplates on the spotting. vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it Vehicle Care 10-89

Wheels and Trim — Aluminum damage the surface of the Notice: Driving the vehicle or Chrome wheel(s). The repairs would through an automatic car wash not be covered by the vehicle that has silicone carbide tire The vehicle may have either warranty. Use only approved cleaning brushes, could damage aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. cleaners on aluminum or the aluminum or chrome-plated Keep the wheels clean using a soft chrome-plated wheels. wheels. The repairs would not be clean cloth with mild soap and The surface of these wheels is covered by the vehicle warranty. water. Rinse with clean water. After similar to the painted surface of the Never drive a vehicle that has rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, aluminum or chrome-plated clean towel. A wax may then be chemicals, abrasive polishes, wheels through an automatic applied. abrasive cleaners, cleaners with car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Notice: Chrome wheels and other acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes chrome trim may be damaged on them because the surface could Windshield and Wiper Blades if the vehicle is not washed after be damaged. Do not use chrome driving on roads that have been polish on aluminum wheels. Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. sprayed with magnesium, calcium Notice: Using chrome polish on or sodium chloride. These aluminum wheels could damage Clean the rubber blades using a lint chlorides are used on roads the wheels. The repairs would free cloth or paper towel soaked for conditions such as ice and not be covered by the vehicle with windshield washer fluid or a dust. Always wash the vehicle's warranty. Use chrome polish mild detergent. Wash the windshield chrome with soap and water after on chrome wheels only. thoroughly when cleaning the exposure. blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, Use chrome polish only on Notice: Using strong soaps, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax chrome-plated wheels, but avoid treatments may cause wiper chemicals, abrasive polishes, any painted surface of the wheel, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners streaking. Replace the wiper blades and buff off immediately after if they are worn or damaged. that contain acid on aluminum application. or chrome-plated wheels, could 10-90 Vehicle Care

Wipers can be damaged by: Sheet Metal Damage Underbody Maintenance . Extreme dusty conditions If the vehicle is damaged and Chemicals used for ice and snow . Sand and salt requires sheet metal repair or removal and dust control can collect replacement, make sure the body on the underbody. If these are not . Heat and sun repair shop applies anti-corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can . Snow and ice, without proper material to parts repaired or develop on the underbody parts removal replaced to restore corrosion such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, protection. and exhaust system even though Tires Original manufacturer replacement they have corrosion protection. Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to parts will provide the corrosion At least every spring, flush these clean the tires. protection while maintaining the materials from the underbody with Notice: Using petroleum-based vehicle warranty. plain water. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt tire dressing products on the Finish Damage vehicle may damage the paint packed in close areas of the frame finish and/or tires. When applying Any stone chips, fractures or deep should be loosened before being a tire dressing, always wipe off scratches in the finish should be flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an any overspray from all painted repaired right away. Bare metal will underbody car washing system can surfaces on the vehicle. corrode quickly and may develop do this. into major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's/ retailer's body and paint shop. Vehicle Care 10-91

Chemical Paint Spotting Remove dust from small buttons Cleaners can contain solvents that and knobs with a small brush with can become concentrated in the Some weather and atmospheric soft bristles. vehicle's interior. Before using conditions can create a chemical cleaners, read and adhere to all fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall Your dealer/retailer has products for safety instructions on the label. upon and attack painted surfaces on cleaning the vehicle's interior. When While cleaning the vehicle's interior, the vehicle. This damage can take cleaning the vehicle's interior, only maintain adequate ventilation by two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped use cleaners specifically designed opening the vehicle's doors and discolorations, and small, irregular for the surfaces that are being windows. dark spots etched into the paint cleaned. Permanent damage can surface. result from using cleaners on Do not clean the interior using the surfaces for which they were not following cleaners or techniques: intended. Apply the cleaner directly Interior Care . Never use a knife or any other to the cleaning cloth to prevent The vehicle's interior will continue to sharp object to remove a soil over-spray. Remove any accidental from any interior surface. look its best if it is cleaned often. over-spray from other surfaces Dust and dirt can accumulate on immediately. . Never use a stiff brush. It can the upholstery and cause damage cause damage to the vehicle's to the carpet, fabric, leather, and Notice: Using abrasive cleaners interior surfaces. plastic surfaces. Stains should be when cleaning glass surfaces on . Never apply heavy pressure or removed quickly as extreme heat the vehicle, could scratch the rub aggressively with a cleaning could cause them to set rapidly. glass and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger. When cloth. Use of heavy pressure can Lighter colored interiors may cleaning the glass on the vehicle, damage the interior and does require more frequent cleaning. use only a soft cloth and glass not improve the effectiveness of Newspapers and garments that can cleaner. soil removal. transfer color to home furnishings can also transfer color to the vehicle's interior. 10-92 Vehicle Care

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Fabric/Carpet To clean: Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white degreasers. Using too much brush attachment to remove dust cloth with water or club soda. soap will leave a residue that and loose dirt. A canister vacuum 2. Remove excess moisture. leaves streaks and attracts with a beater bar in the nozzle may 3. Start on the outside edge of the dirt. For liquid cleaners, about only be used on floor carpet and soil and gently rub toward the 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of carpeted floor mats. For soils, center. Continue cleaning, using water is a good guide. always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda. Before a clean area of the cloth each . Do not heavily saturate the cleaning, gently remove as much of time it becomes soiled. upholstery while cleaning. the soil as possible using one of the 4. Continue to gently rub the . Damage to the vehicle's interior following techniques: soiled area. may result from the use of many . For liquids: gently blot the 5. If the soil is not completely organic solvents such as naptha, remaining soil with a paper removed, use a mild soap alcohol, etc. towel. Allow the soil to absorb solution and repeat the cleaning into the paper towel until no process with plain water. more can be removed. . For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and then vacuum. Vehicle Care 10-93

If any of the soil remains, a Leather Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and commercial fabric cleaner or spot To remove dust, a soft cloth Other Plastic Surfaces lifter may be necessary. Test a small dampened with water can be hidden area for colorfastness before To remove dust, a soft cloth used. If a more thorough cleaning using a commercial upholstery dampened with water can be used. is necessary, a soft cloth dampened cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally If a more thorough cleaning is with a mild soap solution can be cleaned area gives any impression necessary, a clean soft cloth used. Allow the leather to dry that a ring formation may result, dampened with a mild soap naturally. Do not use heat, clean the entire surface. solution can be used to gently steam, or spot lifters or spot remove dust and dirt. Never use A paper towel can be used to blot removers, or shoe polish on leather. spot lifters or removers on plastic excess moisture from the fabric or Many commercial leather cleaners surfaces. Many commercial carpet after the cleaning process. and coatings that are sold to cleaners and coatings that are sold preserve and protect leather to preserve and protect soft plastic may permanently change the surfaces may permanently change appearance and feel of the the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended. interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing products, or those containing organic solvents to clean the organic solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. the gloss in a non-uniform manner. 10-94 Vehicle Care

Some commercial products may Floor Mats increase gloss on the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may If the floor mat has a snap retainer, cause annoying reflections in the a grommet in the driver side floor windshield and even make it difficult mat attaches to a hook on the floor to see through the windshield under of the vehicle to secure the floor certain conditions. mat. To remove the floor mat, pull the mat towards the rear of the Care of Safety Belts vehicle until the grommet can be Keep belts clean and dry. removed from the hook. If the floor mat has a knob retainer, { WARNING a grommet in the floor mat attaches to a knob on the floor of the vehicle Do not bleach or dye safety belts. to secure the floor mat. To remove It may severely weaken them. the floor mat, turn the knob till it is In a crash, they might not be able aligned with the slot in the floor mat to provide adequate protection. grommet and pull the floor mat up. Clean safety belts only with mild To reinstall, center the slot in the soap and lukewarm water. floor mat grommet with the knob on the floor and set the mat in place. Then turn the knob until it is perpendicular to the slot in the grommet to lock the mat in place. Service and Maintenance 11-1

General Information Please read the information under Service and Scheduled Maintenance. To keep Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals, the vehicle in good condition, see checks, inspections, your dealer/retailer. recommended fluids, and The maintenance schedule is for lubricants are necessary to keep General Information vehicles that: General Information ...... 11-1 this vehicle in good working condition. Damage caused by . Carry passengers and cargo Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled within recommended limits on Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 maintenance might not be the Tire and Loading Information covered by the vehicle warranty. label. See Vehicle Load Limits Recommended Fluids, on page 9‑12. Lubricants, and Parts Proper vehicle maintenance helps to . Recommended Fluids and keep the vehicle in good working Are driven on reasonable road Lubricants ...... 11-7 condition, improves fuel economy, surfaces within legal driving Maintenance Replacement and reduces vehicle emissions for limits. Parts ...... 11-9 better air quality. . Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel on Maintenance Records Because of all the different ways people use vehicles, maintenance page 9‑42. Maintenance Records ...... 11-10 needs vary. The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services. 11-2 Service and Maintenance

The proper replacement parts, Scheduled { WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Maintenance Performing maintenance work can Lubricants on page 11‑7 and be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑9. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer/ Change engine oil and filter. See have the required know-how and retailer. Engine Oil on page 10‑8. An the proper tools and equipment. Emission Control Service. If in doubt, see your dealer/ Rotation of New Tires retailer to have a qualified To maintain ride, handling, and When the “Change Engine Oil technician do the work. See performance of the vehicle, it is Soon” message displays, service is Doing Your Own Service Work on important that the first rotation required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within the next 1 000 km/ page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km 600 miles. If driving under the best At your General Motors dealer/ (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire conditions, the engine oil life system retailer, you can be certain that you Rotation on page 10‑50. might not indicate the need for will receive the highest level of vehicle service for more than a year. service available. Your dealer/ The engine oil and filter must be retailer has specially trained service changed at least once a year and technicians, uses genuine GM the oil life system must be reset. replacement parts, as well as, up to Your dealer/retailer has trained date tools and equipment to ensure service technicians who will perform fast and accurate diagnostics. this work and reset the system. Service and Maintenance 11-3

If the engine oil life system is reset Maintenance I . Brake system inspection (or accidentally, service the vehicle every 12 months, whichever . Change engine oil and filter. See within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since occurs first). Engine Oil on page 10 8. An the last service. Reset the oil life ‑ Emission Control Service. Maintenance II system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on . Engine coolant level check. See . Perform all services described in page 10‑10. Engine Coolant on page 10‑13. Maintenance I. When the “Change Engine Oil . Windshield washer fluid level . Steering and suspension Soon” message displays, certain check. See Washer Fluid on inspection. Visual inspection for services, checks, and inspections page 10‑20. damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. are required. The services . Tire inflation check. See Tire described for Maintenance I should Pressure on page 10‑44. . Engine cooling system be performed at every engine oil inspection. Visual inspection of . Tire wear inspection. See Tire change. The services described for hoses, pipes, fittings, and Inspection on page 10 50. Maintenance II should be ‑ clamps and replacement, performed when: . Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation if needed. . on page 10 50. Maintenance I was performed ‑ . Windshield wiper blade the last time the engine oil was . Fluids visual leak check (or inspection for wear, cracking, changed. every 12 months, whichever or contamination and windshield . It has been 10 months or more occurs first). A leak in any and wiper blade cleaning, since the “Change Engine Oil system must be repaired and the if contaminated. See Exterior Soon” message has displayed or fluid level checked. Care on page 10‑87. Worn or since the last service. . Engine air cleaner filter damaged wiper blade inspection (vehicles driven in replacement. See Wiper Blade dusty conditions only). See Replacement on page 10‑26. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑11. 11-4 Service and Maintenance

. Body hinges and latches, key Additional Required Services . See Ignition Transmission Lock lock cylinders, hood latch Check on page 10‑25. assemblies, secondary latches, At Each Fuel Stop . See Park Brake and P (Park) pivots, spring anchor and . Engine oil level check. See Mechanism Check on release pawl, hood and door Engine Oil on page 10‑8. page 10‑26. hinges, rear folding seats, and liftgate hinges lubrication. See . Engine coolant level check. See . Engine cooling system and Recommended Fluids and Engine Coolant on page 10‑13. pressure cap pressure check. Lubricants on page 11‑7. More . Windshield washer fluid level Radiator and air conditioning frequent lubrication may be check. See Washer Fluid on condenser outside cleaning. See required when vehicle is page 10‑20. Cooling System on page 10‑13. exposed to a corrosive . Exhaust system and nearby heat Once a Month environment. Applying silicone shields inspection for loose or grease on weatherstrips with a . Tire inflation check. See Tire damaged components. clean cloth makes them last Pressure on page 10‑44. longer, seal better, and not stick . Accelerator pedal check for . or squeak. Tire wear inspection. See Tire damage, high effort, or binding. Inspection on page 10‑50. Replace if needed. . Restraint system component check. See Safety System Once a Year . If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit, check the Check on page 3‑28. . See Starter Switch Check on sealant expiration date printed . page 10‑24. Engine air cleaner filter on the instruction label of the kit. inspection. See Engine Air . See Automatic Transmission See Tire Sealant and Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑11. Shift Lock Control System Compressor Kit on page 10‑59. Check on page 10‑25. Service and Maintenance 11-5

First Engine Oil Change After or delivery service. During washer is used to clean mud Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles any maintenance, if a power and dirt from the underbody, washer is used to clean mud care should be taken to not . Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks. and dirt from the underbody, directly spray the transfer case care should be taken to not output seals. High pressure First Engine Oil Change After directly spray the transfer case water can overcome the seals Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles output seals. High pressure and contaminate the transfer . Engine air cleaner filter water can overcome the seals case fluid. Contaminated fluid replacement. See Engine Air and contaminate the transfer will decrease the life of the case fluid. Contaminated fluid transfer case and should be Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑11. will decrease the life of the replaced. . Automatic transmission fluid transfer case and should be change (severe service) for replaced. First Engine Oil Change After vehicles mainly driven in heavy Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles First Engine Oil Change After city traffic in hot weather, in hilly . Engine cooling system drain, or mountainous terrain, when Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles flush, and refill, cooling system frequently towing a trailer, . Automatic transmission fluid and cap pressure check, and or used for taxi, police, change (normal service). See cleaning of outside of radiator or delivery service. See Automatic Transmission Fluid on and air conditioning condenser Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑11. (or every 5 years, whichever page 10‑11. occurs first). See Cooling . Spark plug replacement and . All‐wheel drive only: Transfer spark plug wires inspection. An System on page 10‑13. An case fluid change (severe Emission Control Service. Emission Control Service. service) for vehicles mainly . Engine accessory drive belt . All‐wheel drive only: Transfer driven when frequently towing a inspection for fraying, excessive trailer, or used for taxi, police, case fluid change (normal service). During any cracks, or obvious damage and maintenance, if a power replacement, if needed. An Emission Control Service. 11-6 Service and Maintenance

Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • • Engine coolant level check. • • Windshield washer fluid level check. • • Tire inflation pressures check. • • Tire wear inspection. • • Rotate tires. • • Fluids visual leak check. • • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • • Brake system inspection. • • Steering and suspension inspection. • Engine cooling system inspection. • Windshield wiper blades inspection. • Body components lubrication. • Restraint system components check. • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). • Service and Maintenance 11-7

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst Engine Oil symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil on page 10‑8. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 10‑13. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, Hydraulic Brake System in Canada 88862807). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, Hydraulic Power Steering System in Canada 89021186). Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Carrier Assembly Differential — SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, (Rear Drive Module) and Transfer ‐ in Canada 89021678). Case (Power Transfer Unit) 11-8 Service and Maintenance

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Key Lock Cylinders in Canada 10953474). Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges and Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Rear Folding Seat in Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Service and Maintenance 11-9

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107 Wiper Blades Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 15254805 — Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 15254804 — Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 25820122 — 11-10 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Service and Maintenance 11-11

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading 11-12 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine, Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications” Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications Label ...... 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's engine code. Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications ...... 12-2 Service Parts Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 This legal identifier is in the front Identification Label corner of the instrument panel, on This label, on the inside of the glove the left side of the vehicle. It can be box, has the following information: seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification outside. The VIN also appears on Number (VIN) the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title . Model designation and registration. . Paint information . Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. 12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information. Capacities Application Metric English For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt Engine Oil with Filter 5.2 L 5.5 qt Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft *See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑11 for information on checking fluid level. All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing 3.6L V6 Engine 12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES Customer Information 13-1

Reporting Safety Defects Customer Information Customer Reporting Safety Defects to Information the United States Government ...... 13-13 Customer Satisfaction Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are Customer Satisfaction Government ...... 13-14 important to your dealer and to Procedure ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Buick. Normally, any concerns with General Motors ...... 13-14 Customer Assistance Offices the sales transaction or the (US, Can) ...... 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of your vehicle will be Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your GM dealer's sales Telephone (TTY) Users Privacy Vehicle Data Recording and or service departments. Sometimes, (US, Can) ...... 13-4 however, despite the best intentions Online Owner Center ...... 13-4 Privacy ...... 13-15 Event Data Recorders ...... 13-15 of all concerned, misunderstandings GM Mobility Reimbursement can occur. If your concern has not Program ...... 13-5 Navigation System ...... 13-16 Radio Frequency been resolved to your satisfaction, Roadside Assistance the following steps should be taken: Program ...... 13-6 Identification (RFID) ...... 13-16 Scheduling Service Radio Frequency STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Appointments ...... 13-8 Statement ...... 13-16 with a member of dealership Courtesy Transportation management. Normally, concerns Program ...... 13-8 can be quickly resolved at that level. Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10 If the matter has already been Service Publications reviewed with the sales, service, Ordering Information ...... 13-12 or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. 13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO : If after contacting a When contacting Buick, please case will generally be heard within member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest you may reject it and proceed with any further help, in the U.S., contact the follow Step One first if you have a other venue for relief available Buick Customer Assistance Center concern. to you. by calling 1-800-521-7300. In STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Canada, contact General Motors of Both General Motors and your Line Program using the toll-free Canada Customer Communication dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at Centre by calling 1‐800-263-3777 sure you are completely satisfied the following address: (English) or 1-800-263-7854 with your new vehicle. However, in (French). BBB Auto Line Program the United States, if you continue to Council of Better Business We encourage you to call the remain unsatisfied after following Bureaus, Inc. toll-free number in order to give your the procedure outlined in Steps One 4200 Wilson Boulevard inquiry prompt attention. Please and Two, you can file with the BBB Suite 800 have the following information Auto Line Program to enforce your Arlington, VA 22203-1838 available to give the Customer rights. Assistance Representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 The BBB Auto Line Program is an dr.bbb.org/goauto . Vehicle Identification Number. out of court program administered This is available from the vehicle by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all registration or title, or the plate Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of at the top left of the instrument disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by panel. the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage and other Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves . Dealership name and location be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility . Vehicle delivery date and dispute resolution program prior to limitations and/or discontinue its present mileage filing a court action, use of the participation in this program. program is free of charge and your Customer Information 13-3

STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), Offices (US, Can) addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Buick encourages customers to call procedure outlined in Steps one and Alternatively you may call the the toll-free number for assistance. two, General Motors of Canada General Motors Customer However, if a customer wishes to Limited wants you to be aware of its Communication Centre, write or e-mail Buick, the letter participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-3777 (English), should be addressed to: Mediation/Arbitration program. 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you General Motors of Canada Limited may write to the Mediation/ United States — Customer has committed to binding arbitration Arbitration Program at the following Assistance of owner disputes involving address. Your inquiry should be Buick Customer Assistance Center factory-related vehicle service accompanied by your Vehicle P.O. Box 33136 claims. The program provides for Identification Number (VIN). Detroit, MI 48232-5136 the review of the facts involved by Mediation/Arbitration Program www.Buick.com an impartial third party arbiter, and c/o Customer Communication 1-800-521-7300 may include an informal hearing Centre before the arbiter. The program is 1-800-832-8425 (For Text General Motors of Canada Limited Telephone devices (TTYs)) designed so that the entire dispute Mail Code: CA1-163-005 settlement process, from the time Roadside Assistance: 1908 Colonel Sam Drive 1-800-252-1112 you file your complaint to the final Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 decision, should be completed in From Puerto Rico: approximately 70 days. We believe 1-800-496-9992 (English) our impartial program offers 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, From U.S. Virgin Islands quick, and free of charge. 1-800-496-9994 13-4 Customer Information

Canada — Customer Mexico, Central America and Online Owner Center Assistance Caribbean Islands/Countries Online Owner Center (U.S.) — General Motors of Canada Limited (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer www.gmownercenter.com/ Customer Communication Centre, buick CA1-163-005 Assistance 1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, Information and services Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 S. de R.L. de C.V. customized for your specific www.gmcanada.com Customer Assistance Center vehicle — all in one convenient place. 1-800-263-3777 (English) Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Lomas de Bezares . Digital owner manual, warranty 1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. information, and more Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-508-0000 . Online service and maintenance Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 records 1-800-268-6800 . Find Buick dealers for service Overseas — Customer Customer Assistance for nationwide Assistance Text Telephone (TTY) . Exclusive privileges and offers Please contact the local General Users (US, Can) . Recall notices for your specific Motors Business Unit. To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle hard of hearing, or speech-impaired . OnStar® and GM Cardmember and who use Text Telephones Services Earnings summaries (TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in Canada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830. Customer Information 13-5

Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable tools GM Mobility and services you will have Buick — www.buick.com access to: Reimbursement Program Buick Merchandise — . www.buickmerchandise.com My Showroom: Find and save information on vehicles and Help Center — www.buick.com/ current offers in your area. helpcenter . My Dealers/Retailers: Save . FAQ details such as address and . Contact Us phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers/retailers. This program, available to qualified My GM Canada (Canada) — . My Driveway: Access quick links applicants, can reimburse you up to www.gm.ca to parts and service estimates, $1,000 of the cost of eligible My GM Canada is a check trade-in values, aftermarket adaptive equipment password-protected section of or schedule a service required for your vehicle, such as www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the hand controls or a wheelchair/ information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your scooter lift. personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile. The offer is available for a very tools and forms with greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your limited period of time from the date profile and use tools and forms of vehicle purchase/lease. For more with greater ease. details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit To sign up, visit the My GM Canada gmmobility.com or call the GM section within www.gm.ca. Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. 13-6 Customer Information

General Motors of Canada also . Model, year, color, and license owner or driver if they decide the has a Mobility Program. Call plate number of the vehicle claims are made too often, or the 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) . Odometer reading, Vehicle same type of claim is made many for details. TTY users call Identification Number (VIN), and times. 1-800-263-3830. delivery date of the vehicle Services Provided . Description of the problem Roadside Assistance . Emergency Fuel Delivery: Program Coverage Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest For U.S. purchased vehicles, call Services are provided up to 5 years/ service station. 1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone 160 000 km (100,000 miles), . (TTY): 1 888 889 2438). whichever comes first. Lock‐Out Service: Service is ‐ ‐ ‐ provided to unlock the vehicle if For Canadian purchased vehicles, In the U.S., anyone driving the you are locked out. A remote call 1-800-268-6800. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a unlock may be available if you person driving the vehicle without have OnStar®. For security Service is available 24 hours a day, permission from the owner is not 365 days a year. reasons, the driver must present covered. identification before this service Calling for Assistance Roadside Assistance is not a part of is given. When calling Roadside Assistance, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. . Emergency Tow From a Public have the following information Buick and General Motors of Road or Highway: Tow to the ready: Canada Limited reserve the right to nearest Buick dealer for make any changes or discontinue warranty service, or if the vehicle . Your name, home address, and the Roadside Assistance program at home telephone number was in a crash and cannot be any time without notification. driven. Assistance is also given . Telephone number of your Buick and General Motors of when the vehicle is stuck in location Canada Limited reserve the right to sand, mud, or snow. . Location of the vehicle limit services or payment to an Customer Information 13-7

. Flat Tire Change: Service is Services Specific to Canadian . Trip Interruption Benefits and provided to change a flat tire Purchased Vehicles Assistance: Must be over with the spare tire. The spare 250 kilometres from where tire, if equipped, must be in good . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement your trip was started to condition and properly inflated. is approximately $5 Canadian. qualify. General Motors of It is the owner's responsibility for Diesel fuel delivery may be Canada Limited requires the repair or replacement of the restricted. Propane and other pre-authorization, original tire if it is not covered by the fuels are not provided through detailed receipts, and a copy warranty. this service. of the repair orders. Once authorization has been received, . Battery Jump Start: Service is . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle provided to jump start a dead registration is required. the Roadside Assistance advisor battery. will help you make arrangements . Trip Routing Service: Detailed and explain how to receive Services Not Included in maps of North America are payment. Roadside Assistance provided when requested either with the most direct route or the . Alternative Service: If . Impound towing caused by most scenic route. There is a six assistance cannot be provided violation of any laws. request limit per year. Additional right away, the Roadside Assistance advisor may give . Legal fines. travel information is also available. Allow three weeks for you permission to get local . Mounting, dismounting or delivery. emergency road service. You will changing of snow tires, chains, receive payment, up to $100, or other traction devices. after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance. . Towing or services for vehicles Mechanical failures may be driven on a non-public road or covered, however any cost for highway. parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility. 13-8 Customer Information

Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Appointments Program Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, When your vehicle requires To enhance your ownership if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty service, contact your experience, we and our participating to minimize your inconvenience by dealer/retailer and request an dealers are proud to offer Courtesy providing several transportation appointment. By scheduling a Transportation, a customer support options. Depending on the service appointment and advising program for vehicles with the circumstances, your dealer can offer your service consultant of your Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty you one of the following: transportation needs, your dealer/ Coverage period in Canada) and retailer can help minimize your extended powertrain, and hybrid Shuttle Service inconvenience. specific warranty in both the U.S. Shuttle service is the preferred and Canada. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled means of offering Courtesy into the service department Several courtesy transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide immediately, keep driving it until it options are available to assist in you with shuttle service to get you can be scheduled for service, reducing your inconvenience when to your destination with minimal unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required. interruption of your daily schedule. safety-related. If it is, please call Courtesy Transportation is not a This includes one‐way or round trip your dealership/retailer, let them part of the New Vehicle Limited shuttle service within reasonable know this, and ask for instructions. Warranty. A separate booklet time and distance parameters of the dealer's area. If the dealer/retailer requests you to entitled “Warranty and Owner bring the vehicle for service, you are Assistance Information” furnished urged to do so as early in the work with each new vehicle provides day as possible to allow for the detailed warranty coverage same day repair. information. Customer Information 13-9

Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Reimbursement Your dealer may arrange to provide Information If your vehicle requires overnight you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as shuttle warranty repairs, and public reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at transportation is used instead of the that you obtain if your vehicle is every dealer. Please contact your dealer's shuttle service, the expense kept for an overnight warranty dealer for specific information must be supported by original repair. Rental reimbursement will be about availability. All Courtesy receipts and can only be up to the limited and must be supported by Transportation arrangements will be maximum amount allowed by GM original receipts. This requires that administered by appropriate dealer for shuttle service. In addition, for you sign and complete a rental personnel. U.S. customers, should you arrange agreement and meet state/ transportation through a friend or provincial, local, and rental General Motors reserves the right to relative, limited reimbursement for vehicle provider requirements. unilaterally modify, change or reasonable fuel expenses may be Requirements vary and may include discontinue Courtesy Transportation available. Claim amounts should minimum age requirements, at any time and to resolve all reflect actual costs and be insurance coverage, credit card, questions of claim eligibility supported by original receipts. See etc. You are responsible for fuel pursuant to the terms and your dealer for information regarding usage charges and may also be conditions described herein at its the allowance amounts for responsible for taxes, levies, usage sole discretion. reimbursement of fuel or other fees, excessive mileage, or rental transportation costs. usage beyond the completion of the repair. It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. 13-10 Customer Information

Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment parts subsequent collisions. Aftermarket may also be used for repair. These parts are not covered by your GM If your vehicle is involved in a parts are typically removed from New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and collision and it is damaged, have vehicles that were total losses in any vehicle failure related to such the damage repaired by a qualified prior crashes. In most cases, the parts are not covered by that technician using the proper parts being recycled are from warranty. equipment and quality replacement undamaged sections of the vehicle. parts. Poorly performed collision A recycled original equipment GM Repair Facility repairs diminish your vehicle's part, may be an acceptable choice We recommend that you choose a resale value, and safety to maintain your vehicle's originally collision repair facility that meets performance can be compromised designed appearance and safety your needs before you ever need in subsequent collisions. performance, however, the history of collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer Collision Parts these parts is not known. Such parts may have a collision repair center are not covered by your GM New with GM-trained technicians and Genuine GM Collision parts are new Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any state of the art equipment, or be parts made with the same materials related failures are not covered by able to recommend a collision repair and construction methods as the that warranty. center that has GM-trained parts with which your vehicle was Aftermarket collision parts are also technicians and comparable originally built. Genuine GM equipment. Collision parts are your best choice available. These are made by to ensure that your vehicle's companies other than GM and may Insuring Your Vehicle not have been tested for your designed appearance, durability, Protect your investment in your GM and safety are preserved. The use vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature vehicle with comprehensive and of Genuine GM parts can help collision insurance coverage. There maintain your GM New Vehicle durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in are significant differences in the Warranty. quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Customer Information 13-11

Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs . Vehicle license plate reduced protection to your GM . If there has been an injury, call Vehicle make, model and vehicle by limiting compensation emergency services for help. Do not model year for damage repairs by using leave the scene of a crash until all . aftermarket collision parts. Some Vehicle Identification matters have been taken care of. insurance companies will not Number (VIN) Move the vehicle only if its position specify aftermarket collision parts. . Insurance company and policy puts you in danger, or you are When purchasing insurance, we number instructed to move it by a police recommend that you assure your officer. . General description of the vehicle will be repaired with GM damage to the other vehicle original equipment collision parts. Give only the necessary information If such insurance coverage is not to police and other parties involved Choose a reputable repair facility available from your current in the crash. that uses quality replacement parts. See Collision Parts earlier in this insurance carrier, consider switching For emergency towing see What “ ” section. to another insurance carrier. Will You See After an Airbag If your vehicle is leased, the leasing Inflates? on page 3‑35. If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See After an Airbag company may require you to have Gather the following information: insurance that assures repairs with Inflates? on page 3‑35. Genuine GM Original Equipment . Driver's name, address, phone Manufacturer (OEM) parts or number Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Driver's license number parts. Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of . Owner's name, address, phone your lease for poor quality repairs. number 13-12 Customer Information

Managing the Vehicle Damage initially value the repair using Service Publications Repair Process aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair professional, and insist Ordering Information In the event that your vehicle on Genuine GM parts. Remember if Service Manuals requires damage repairs, GM your vehicle is leased you may be recommends that you take an active obligated to have the vehicle Service Manuals have the diagnosis role in its repair. If you have a repaired with Genuine GM parts, and repair information on engines, pre-determined repair facility of even if your insurance coverage transmission, axle, suspension, choice, take your vehicle there, does not pay the full cost. brakes, electrical, steering, or have it towed there. Specify to body, etc. the facility that any required If another party's insurance replacement collision parts be company is paying for the repairs, Service Bulletins original equipment parts, either new you are not obligated to accept a Service Bulletins give additional Genuine GM parts or recycled repair valuation based on that technical service information original GM parts. Remember, insurance company's collision policy needed to knowledgeably service recycled parts will not be covered by repair limits, as you have no General Motors cars and trucks. your GM vehicle warranty. contractual limits with that company. Each bulletin contains instructions In such cases, you can have control Insurance pays the bill for the repair, to assist in the diagnosis and of the repair and parts choices as service of your vehicle. but you must live with the repair. long as cost stays within reasonable Depending on your policy limits, limits. your insurance company may Customer Information 13-13

Owner Information ORDER TOLL FREE: Reporting Safety 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday Owner publications are written 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Defects specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational For Credit Card Orders Only information about the vehicle. (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Reporting Safety Defects The owner manual includes the Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web to the United States Maintenance Schedule for all at: helminc.com Government models. Or you can write to: If you believe that your vehicle In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Helm, Incorporated has a defect which could cause Owner Manual, and Warranty P.O. Box 07130 Booklet. a crash or could cause injury or Detroit, MI 48207 death, you should immediately RETAIL SELL PRICE: Prices are subject to change without inform the National Highway $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee notice and without incurring Traffic Safety Administration Without Portfolio: Owner obligation. Allow ample time for (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Manual only. delivery. General Motors. RETAIL SELL PRICE: Note to Canadian Customers: All If NHTSA receives similar $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to complaints, it may open an Current and Past Model Order make checks payable in U.S. funds. investigation, and if it finds that Forms a safety defect exists in a group Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. 13-14 Customer Information of vehicles, it may order a Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects recall and remedy campaign. to the Canadian to General Motors However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or problems between you, your If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like dealer, or General Motors. believe that your vehicle has a this, please notify General Motors. safety defect, notify Transport Call 1-800-521-7300, or write: To contact NHTSA, you may Canada immediately, in addition Buick Customer Assistance Center call the Vehicle Safety Hotline to notifying General Motors of P.O. Box 33136 toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Canada Limited. Call them at Detroit, MI 48232-5136 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to 1-800-333-0510 or write to: In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 http://www.safercar.gov; or Transport Canada (English) or 1-800-263-7854 write to: Road Safety Branch (French), or write: Administrator, NHTSA 2780 Sheffield Road 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 General Motors of Canada Limited Washington, D.C. 20590 Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005 You can also obtain other 1908 Colonel Sam Drive information about motor Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. Customer Information 13-15

Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur. Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded crash or near crash-like situations, by your vehicle only if a non-trivial Your GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will recorded by the EDR under normal information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The data (e.g., name, gender, age, and For example, your vehicle uses crash location) is recorded. computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as law control engine and transmission enforcement, could combine the performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. EDR data with the type of conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data routinely and deploy airbags in a crash and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: acquired during a crash if so equipped, to provide antilock investigation. braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in your vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating To read data recorded by an EDR, data to help your dealer/retailer special equipment is required, and . technician service your vehicle. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is Some modules may also store data passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle about how you operate the vehicle, buckled/fastened manufacturer, other parties, such as such as rate of fuel consumption or . How far, if at all, the driver was law enforcement, that have the average speed. These modules may pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the also retain the owner’s personal brake pedal information if they have access to preferences, such as radio pre-sets, the vehicle or the EDR. . How fast the vehicle was seat positions, and temperature traveling settings. 13-16 Customer Information

GM will not access this data or Radio Frequency Radio Frequency share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, Identification (RFID) Statement if the vehicle is leased, with the RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that consent of the lessee; in response vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that to an official request of police or pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal similar government office; as part of system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC) GM's defense of litigation through connection with conveniences such Rules and with RSS-210/211 of the discovery process; or, as as key fobs for remote door locking/ Industry Canada. required by law. Data that GM unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following collects or receives may also be in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions: used for GM research needs or may door openers. RFID technology in be made available to others for GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause research purposes, where a need is personal information or link with any interference. shown and the data is not tied to a other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any specific vehicle or vehicle owner. personal information. interference received, including interference that may cause Navigation System undesired operation of the If your vehicle has a navigation device. system, use of the system may Changes or modifications to any of result in the storage of destinations, these systems by other than an addresses, telephone numbers, and authorized service facility could void other trip information. Refer to the authorization to use this equipment. navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions. INDEX i-1

A Airbag System (cont.) Antilock Brake What Will You See After System (ABS) ...... 9-28 Accessories and an Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-35 Warning Light ...... 5-22 Modifications ...... 10-3 When Should an Airbag Appearance Care Accessory Power ...... 9-19 Inflate? ...... 3-33 Exterior ...... 10-87 Adaptive Forward Where Are the Airbags? ...... 3-31 Interior ...... 10-91 Lighting (AFL) ...... 6-4 Airbags Armrest Stoarge ...... 4-1 Add-On Electrical Adding Equipment to the Assistance Program, Equipment ...... 9-58 Vehicle ...... 3-42 Roadside ...... 13-6 Adding Equipment to the Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-17 Audio Players ...... 7-12 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-42 Readiness Light ...... 5-16 CD ...... 7-12 Adjustments Servicing Airbag-Equipped MP3 ...... 7-21, 7-27 Lumbar, Front Seats ...... 3-4 Vehicles ...... 3-42 Audio System Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11 System Check ...... 3-29 Radio Reception ...... 7-11 Air Vents ...... 8-9 Alarm System Rear Seat (RSA) ...... 7-44 Airbag System Anti-Theft ...... 2-12 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 Check ...... 3-43 All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-24, 9-28 Automatic How Does an Airbag AM-FM Radio ...... 7-6 Door Locks ...... 2-8 Restrain? ...... 3-35 Antenna Automatic Transmission ...... 9-24 Passenger Sensing Multi-Band ...... 7-12 Fluid ...... 10-11 System ...... 3-37 Anti-Theft Manual Mode ...... 9-26 What Makes an Airbag Alarm System ...... 2-12 Shiftlock Control System Inflate? ...... 3-34 Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-37 Check ...... 10-25 Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-34 i-2 INDEX

B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Cargo High Intensity Discharge Cover ...... 4-3 Battery ...... 10-23 (HID) Lighting ...... 10-28 Management System ...... 4-3 Jump Starting ...... 10-80 License Plate Lamps ...... 10-29 Tie Downs ...... 4-3 Load Management ...... 6-7 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Cautions, Danger, and Power Protection ...... 6-8 Sidemarker, and Warnings ...... iv Voltage and Charging Stoplamps ...... 10-29 CD Messages ...... 5-31 Buying New Tires ...... 10-52 DVD Player ...... 7-14 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26 CD Player ...... 7-12 Bluetooth ...... 7-46 Center Console Storage ...... 4-1 Brakes ...... 10-21 C Chains, Tire ...... 10-57 Antilock ...... 9-28 Calibration ...... 5-7 Charging System Light ...... 5-18 Assist ...... 9-30 California Check Fluid ...... 10-22 Fuel Requirements ...... 9-43 Engine Lamp ...... 5-19 Parking ...... 9-29 Perchlorate Materials Ignition System Messages ...... 5-32 Requirements ...... 10-3 Transmission Lock ...... 10-25 Braking ...... 9-3 Warning ...... 10-3 Child Restraints Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 9-17 Camera, Rear Vision ...... 9-36 Infants and Young Bulb Replacement ...... 10-30 Canadian Vehicle Owners ...... iii Children ...... 3-47 Fog Lamps ...... 6-5 Capacities and Lower Anchors and Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-28 Specifications ...... 12-2 Tethers for Children ...... 3-53 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-28 Carbon Monoxide Older Children ...... 3-44 Headlamps ...... 10-28 Engine Exhaust ...... 9-23 Liftgate ...... 2-9 Securing ...... 3-60, 3-62 Winter Driving ...... 9-9 Systems ...... 3-49 Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-51 INDEX i-3

Circuit Breakers ...... 10-31 Cooling System ...... 10-13 D Cleaning Engine Messages ...... 5-33 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10 Exterior Care ...... 10-87 Courtesy Transportation Danger, Warnings, and Interior Care ...... 10-91 Program ...... 13-8 Cautions ...... iv Climate Control Systems Covers Data Recorders, Event ...... 13-15 Dual Automatic ...... 8-1 Cargo ...... 4-3 Daytime Running Lamps/ Rear ...... 8-7, 8-8 Engine ...... 10-7 Automatic Headlamp Clock ...... 5-9 Cruise Control ...... 9-32 System ...... 6-3 Cluster, IP ...... 5-13 Light ...... 5-25 Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10 Messages ...... 5-32 Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Compact Spare Tire ...... 10-79 Cupholders ...... 4-1 Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 6-6 Compass ...... 5-7 Customer Assistance ...... 13-4 Delayed Headlamps ...... 6-3 Compressor Kit, Tire Offices ...... 13-3 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Sealant ...... 10-59 Text Telephone (TTY) Devices, Auxiliary ...... 7-34 Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 Users ...... 13-4 Dome Lamps ...... 6-5 Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Customer Information Door Convex Mirrors ...... 2-15 Service Publications Ajar Messages ...... 5-32 Coolant Ordering Information ...... 13-12 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Engine ...... 10-13 Customer Satisfaction Locks ...... 2-7 Procedure ...... 13-1 Engine Temperature Gage . . . .5-15 Power Locks ...... 2-7 Engine Temperature Warning Light ...... 5-23 i-4 INDEX

Drive Systems E Engine (cont.) All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-24, 9-28 Cooling System Messages . . .5-33 Electrical Equipment, Driver Information Cover ...... 10-7 Add-On ...... 9-58 Center (DIC) ...... 5-25 Drive Belt Routing ...... 12-3 Electrical System Driving Exhaust ...... 9-23 Engine Compartment Characteristics and Overheated Protection Fuse Block ...... 10-31 Towing Tips ...... 9-47 Operating Mode ...... 10-19 Fuses and Circuit Defensive ...... 9-2 Overheating ...... 10-17 Breakers ...... 10-31 Drunk ...... 9-2 Power Messages ...... 5-34 Instrument Panel Fuse Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-8 Pressure Light ...... 5-24 Block ...... 10-34 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-8 Running While Parked ...... 9-24 Overload ...... 10-30 If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-11 Starting ...... 9-19 Engine Loss of Control ...... 9-6 Engine Oil Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 10-11 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Life System ...... 10-10 Check and Service Engine Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-12 Messages ...... 5-34 Soon Lamp ...... 5-19 Winter ...... 9-9 Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Compartment Overview ...... 10-6 Driving for Better Fuel Equipment, Towing ...... 9-56 Coolant ...... 10-13 Economy ...... 1-20 Event Data Recorders ...... 13-15 Coolant Temperature Gage . . .5-15 Dual Automatic Climate Extender, Safety Belt ...... 3-28 Coolant Temperature Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 Control System ...... 8-1 Warning Light ...... 5-23 DVD Cooling System ...... 10-13 Rear Seat Entertainment System ...... 7-36 DVD/CD Player ...... 7-14 INDEX i-5

F Fuel ...... 9-42 G Additives ...... 9-43 Filter Gages Filling a Portable Fuel Engine Air Cleaner ...... 10-11 Engine Coolant Container ...... 9-46 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Temperature ...... 5-15 Filling the Tank ...... 9-45 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 6-4 Fuel ...... 5-14 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-43 Flat Tire ...... 10-58 Odometer ...... 5-14 Gage ...... 5-14 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 10-67 Speedometer ...... 5-14 Gasoline Specifications ...... 9-42 Floor Console Storage ...... 4-2 Tachometer ...... 5-14 Recommended ...... 9-42 Floor Mats ...... 10-94 Voltmeter ...... 5-15 Requirements, California . . . . .9-43 Fluid Warning Lights and System Messages ...... 5-34 Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11 Indicators ...... 5-12 Fuel Economy Brakes ...... 10-22 Garage Door Opener ...... 5-47 Driving for Better ...... 1-20 Power Steering ...... 10-19 Programming ...... 5-47 Fuses Washer ...... 10-20 Gasoline Engine Compartment Fog Lamps Specifications ...... 9-42 Fuse Block ...... 10-31 Bulb Replacement ...... 6-5 General Information Fuses and Circuit Light ...... 5-25 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Breakers ...... 10-31 Folding Mirrors ...... 2-16 Towing ...... 9-47 Instrument Panel Fuse Front Seats Vehicle Care ...... 10-2 Block ...... 10-34 Heated ...... 3-7 Glove Box ...... 4-1 Heated and Ventilated ...... 3-8 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 13-5 i-6 INDEX

H High-Beam On Light ...... 5-24 K Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-8 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-28 Key and Lock Messages ...... 5-35 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-8 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 6-4 Keyless Entry Hood ...... 10-5 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Remote (RKE) System ...... 2-3 Horn ...... 5-5 Headlamps Keyless Entry System ...... 2-2 How to Wear Safety Belts Adaptive Forward Keys ...... 2-2 Properly ...... 3-17 Lighting (AFL) ...... 6-4 Aiming ...... 10-28 L Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 I Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 10-37 Ignition Positions ...... 9-18 Daytime Running Lamps/ Lamp Messages ...... 5-35 Ignition Transmission Lock Automatic Headlamp Lamps Check ...... 10-25 System ...... 6-3 Dome ...... 6-5 Immobilizer ...... 2-13 Delayed ...... 6-3 Exterior Controls ...... 6-1 Infants and Young Children, Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 License Plate ...... 10-29 Restraints ...... 3-47 High Intensity Discharge Malfunction Indicator ...... 5-19 Instrument Cluster ...... 5-13 (HID) Lighting ...... 10-28 Reading ...... 6-5 Instrument Panel High-Beam On Light ...... 5-24 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-22 Storage Area ...... 4-1 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-2 LATCH System Introduction ...... iii, 7-1 Heated and Ventilated Front Replacing Parts After a Seats ...... 3-8 Crash ...... 3-59 Heated Front Seats ...... 3-7 J Latch, Lower Anchors and Heated Mirrors ...... 2-17 Jump Starting ...... 10-80 Tethers for Children ...... 3-53 High Voltage Devices and Liftgate Wiring ...... 10-30 Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-9 INDEX i-7

Lighting Locks Messages Adaptive Forward ...... 6-4 Automatic Door ...... 2-8 Airbag System ...... 5-36 Delayed Entry ...... 6-6 Delayed Locking ...... 2-7 Anti-Theft Alarm System ...... 5-37 Delayed Exit ...... 6-6 Door ...... 2-7 Battery Voltage and Entry ...... 6-6 Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Charging ...... 5-31 Illumination Control ...... 6-5 Power Door ...... 2-7 Brake System ...... 5-32 Parade Dimming ...... 6-7 Safety ...... 2-8 Door Ajar ...... 5-32 Lights Loss of Control ...... 9-6 Engine Cooling System ...... 5-33 Airbag Readiness ...... 5-16 Lower Anchors and Tethers Engine Oil ...... 5-34 Antilock Brake System for Children (LATCH Engine Power ...... 5-34 (ABS) Warning ...... 5-22 SYSTEM) ...... 3-53 Fuel System ...... 5-34 Charging System ...... 5-18 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 3-4 Key and Lock ...... 5-35 Cruise Control ...... 5-25 Front Seats ...... 3-4 Lamp ...... 5-35 Engine Coolant Object Detection System . . . . .5-36 Temperature Warning ...... 5-23 M Ride Control System ...... 5-36 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 5-24 Maintenance Service Vehicle ...... 5-37 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Records ...... 11-10 Tire ...... 5-37 Fog Lamps ...... 5-25 Maintenance Schedule Transmission ...... 5-38 High-Beam On ...... 5-24 Recommended Fluids and Vehicle ...... 5-31 High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-2 Lubricants ...... 11-7 Vehicle Reminder ...... 5-39 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-16 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Vehicle Speed ...... 5-39 Security ...... 5-24 Washer Fluid ...... 5-39 ® Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-19 StabiliTrak Indicator ...... 5-23 Manual Mode ...... 9-26 Tire Pressure ...... 5-23 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 5-22 i-8 INDEX

Mirrors O P Automatic Dimming Object Detection System Parade Dimming ...... 6-7 Rearview ...... 2-18 Messages ...... 5-36 Park Convex ...... 2-15 Odometer ...... 5-14 Shifting Into ...... 9-21 Folding ...... 2-16 Off-Road Shifting Out of ...... 9-22 Heated ...... 2-17 Recovery ...... 9-5 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-17 Park Tilt ...... 2-17 Oil Parking Power ...... 2-16 Engine ...... 10-8 Assist, Ultrasonic ...... 9-35 Monitor System, Tire Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Brake ...... 9-29 Pressure ...... 10-45 Messages ...... 5-34 Brake and P (Park) MP3 ...... 7-21, 7-27 Pressure Light ...... 5-24 Mechanism Check ...... 10-26 Multi-Band Antenna ...... 7-12 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44 Over Things That Burn ...... 9-23 Online Owner Center ...... 13-4 Passenger Airbag Status N OnStar® System ...... 1-21 Indicator ...... 5-17 Navigation System Operation, Infotainment Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37 Vehicle Data Recording System ...... 7-2 Perchlorate Materials and Privacy ...... 13-16 Outlets Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Net, Convenience ...... 4-3 Power ...... 5-10 Phone New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-17 Overheated Engine Bluetooth ...... 7-46 Protection Power Operating Mode ...... 10-19 Door Locks ...... 2-7 Overheating, Engine ...... 10-17 Mirrors ...... 2-16 Outlets ...... 5-10 Protection, Battery ...... 6-8 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19 INDEX i-9

Power (cont.) Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Replacement Parts Seat Adjustment ...... 3-3 System ...... 7-44 Airbags ...... 3-44 Steering Fluid ...... 10-19 Rear Seat Entertainment Maintenance ...... 11-9 Windows ...... 2-19 System ...... 7-36 Replacing Airbag System ...... 3-44 Pregnancy, Using Safety Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...... 7-44 Replacing LATCH System Belts ...... 3-27 Rear Seats ...... 3-8 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-59 Privacy Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-36 Replacing Safety Belt Radio Frequency Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6 System Parts After a Identification (RFID) ...... 13-16 Rearview Mirrors Crash ...... 3-29 Program Automatic Dimming ...... 2-18 Reporting Safety Defects Courtesy Transportation ...... 13-8 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-5 Canadian Government ...... 13-14 Proposition 65 Warning, Recommended Fluids and General Motors ...... 13-14 California ...... 10-3 Lubricants ...... 11-7 U.S. Government ...... 13-13 Recommended Fuel ...... 9-42 Retained Accessory R Records Power (RAP) ...... 9-19 Radio Frequency Maintenance ...... 11-10 Ride Control Systems Identification (RFID) ...... 13-16 Recreational Vehicle Messages ...... 5-36 Statement ...... 13-16 Towing ...... 10-84 Roadside Assistance Radios Reimbursement Program, Program ...... 13-6 AM-FM Radio ...... 7-6 GM Mobility ...... 13-5 Roof CD/DVD Player ...... 7-14 Remote Keyless Entry Sunroof ...... 2-21 Reception ...... 7-11 (RKE) System ...... 2-2, 2-3 Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Satellite ...... 7-8 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Rotation, Tires ...... 10-50 Reading Lamps ...... 6-5 Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-30 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3 Rear Climate Control Running the Vehicle While System ...... 8-7, 8-8 Parked ...... 9-24 i-10 INDEX

S Seats (cont.) Shifting Rear ...... 3-8 Into Park ...... 9-21 Safety Belts ...... 3-13 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-5 Out of Park ...... 9-22 Care ...... 3-28 Third Row Seat ...... 3-11 Sidemarker and Stoplamps Extender ...... 3-28 Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-77 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-29 How to Wear Safety Belts Securing Child Signals, Turn and Properly ...... 3-17 Restraints ...... 3-60, 3-62 Lane-Change ...... 6-4 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-22 Security Spare Tire Reminders ...... 5-16 Light ...... 5-24 Compact ...... 10-79 Replacing After a Crash ...... 3-29 Vehicle ...... 2-12 Specifications and Use During Pregnancy ...... 3-27 Service Capacities ...... 12-2 Safety Defects Reporting Accessories and Speedometer ...... 5-14 Canadian Government ...... 13-14 Modifications ...... 10-3 StabiliTrak System ...... 9-30 General Motors ...... 13-14 Doing Your Own Work ...... 10-4 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-23 U.S. Government ...... 13-13 Engine Soon Lamp ...... 5-19 Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 2-5 Safety Locks ...... 2-8 Maintenance Records ...... 11-10 Starter Switch Check ...... 10-24 Safety System Check ...... 3-28 Maintenance, General Starting the Engine ...... 9-19 Satellite Radio ...... 7-8 Information ...... 11-1 Steering ...... 9-4 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Fluid, Power ...... 10-19 Scheduling Appointments ...... 13-8 Publications Ordering Sealant Kit, Tire ...... 10-59 Wheel Adjustment ...... 5-2 Information ...... 13-12 Wheel Controls ...... 5-3 Seats Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8 Storage Areas Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-37 Armrest ...... 4-1 Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-8 Servicing the Cargo Cover ...... 4-3 Heated Front ...... 3-7 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-42 Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4 Center Console ...... 4-1 Power Adjustment, Front ...... 3-3 INDEX i-11

Storage Areas (cont.) Time ...... 5-9 Tires (cont.) Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Tires Wheel Alignment and Tire Floor Console ...... 4-2 Buying New Tires ...... 10-52 Balance ...... 10-56 Glove Box ...... 4-1 Chains ...... 10-57 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-56 Instrument Panel ...... 4-1 Changing ...... 10-67 When It Is Time for New Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Compact Spare ...... 10-79 Tires ...... 10-51 Storing the Tire Sealant Designations ...... 10-40 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-27 and Compressor Kit ...... 10-67 Different Size ...... 10-54 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-22 Stuck Vehicle ...... 9-11 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-58 Towing Sun Visors ...... 2-21 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-46 Driving Characteristics ...... 9-47 Sunroof ...... 2-21 Inspection ...... 10-50 Equipment ...... 9-56 Symbols ...... iv Messages ...... 5-37 General Information ...... 9-47 System Pressure Light ...... 5-23 Recreational Vehicle ...... 10-84 Roof Rack ...... 4-4 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-45 Trailer ...... 9-52 System Check Rotation ...... 10-50 Vehicle ...... 10-84 Automatic Transmission Sealant and Trailer Towing ...... 9-52 Shiftlock Control ...... 10-25 Compressor Kit ...... 10-59 Transmission Sealant and Compressor Automatic ...... 9-24 T Kit, Storing ...... 10-67 Fluid, Automatic ...... 10-11 Tachometer ...... 5-14 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-77 Messages ...... 5-38 Taillamps Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-37 Transportation Program, Bulb Replacement ...... 10-29 Terminology and Courtesy ...... 13-8 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Definitions ...... 10-40 Turn and Lane-Change Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-13 Uniform Tire Quality Signals ...... 6-4 Immobilizer ...... 2-13 Grading ...... 10-54 Turn Signal, Third-Row Seats ...... 3-11 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-29 i-12 INDEX

U Vehicle Identification Wheels Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 Alignment and Tire Ultrasonic Parking Assist ...... 9-35 Service Parts Identification Balance ...... 10-56 Uniform Tire Quality Label ...... 12-1 Different Size ...... 10-54 Grading ...... 10-54 Vehicle Reminder Replacement ...... 10-56 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-47 Messages ...... 5-39 When It Is Time for New Operation ...... 5-51 Ventilation, Air ...... 8-9 Tires ...... 10-51 Programming ...... 5-47 Visors ...... 2-21 Where to Put the Child Using this Manual ...... iv Voltage Devices, and Restraint ...... 3-51 Wiring ...... 10-30 Windows ...... 2-18 V Voltmeter Gage ...... 5-15 Power ...... 2-19 Vehicle Windshield Canadian Owners ...... iii Replacement ...... 10-27 Control ...... 9-3 W Warning Lights, Gages, and Wiper/Washer ...... 5-5 Load Limits ...... 9-12 Indicators ...... 5-12 Winter Driving ...... 9-9 Messages ...... 5-31 Warnings ...... iv Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26 Personalization ...... 5-40 Cautions and Danger ...... iv Wipers Remote Start ...... 2-5 Hazard Flashers ...... 6-4 Rear Washer ...... 5-6 Security ...... 2-12 Washer Fluid ...... 10-20 Wiring, High Voltage Speed Messages ...... 5-39 Washer Fluid Messages ...... 5-39 Devices ...... 10-30 Towing ...... 10-84 Vehicle Care Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 10-67 Tire Pressure ...... 10-44